Hyundai 2019 Ioniq-Electric Owner Manual

O pe attiio n

M aiin na e

S pe ciiffiic attiio

S M AN L

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, HYUNDAI reserves the right to make changes at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all HYUNDAI models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.

As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

F2

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO

YOUR HYUNDAI

Your HYUNDAI should not be modified in any way.

Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safety or durability of your HYUNDAI and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR

TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer’s instructions or consult your HYUNDAI dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE

WARNING

This manual includes information titled as DAN-

GER, WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.

These titles indicate the following:

DANGER

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE

NOTICE indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in vehicle damage.

HYUNDAI VEHICLE OWNER PRIVACY POLICY

Your Hyundai vehicle may be equipped with technologies and services that use information collected, generated, recorded or stored by the vehicle. Hyundai has created a Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy to explain how these technologies and services collect use and share this information.

You may read our Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy on the Hyundaiusa.com website at: https://www.hyundaiusa.com/owner-privacy-policy.aspx

If you would like to receive a hard copy of our Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy, please contact our Customer

Connect Center at:

Hyundai Customer Care

P.O. Box 20850

Fountain Valley, CA 92728

800-633-5151 [email protected]

Hyundai's Customer Connect Center representatives are available Monday through Friday, between the hours of 5:00 AM and 7:00 PM PST and Saturday and Sunday between 6:30 AM and 3:00 PM PST

(English).

For Customer Connect Center assistance in Spanish or Korean, representatives are available Monday through Friday between 6:30 AM and 3:00 PM PST.

F3

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations, and thank you for choosing HYUNDAI. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of distinguished people who drive HYUNDAIS. We are very proud of the advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each HYUNDAI we build.

Your Owner’s Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new HYUNDAI. To become familiar with your new HYUNDAI, so that you can fully enjoy it, read this Owner’s Manual carefully before driving your new vehicle.

This manual contains important safety information and instructions intended to familiarize you with your vehicle’s controls and safety features so you can safely operate your vehicle.

This manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance safe operation of the vehicle. It is recommended that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. HYUNDAI dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.

This Owner’s Manual should be considered a permanent part of your vehicle, and should be kept in the vehicle so you can refer to it at any time. The manual should stay with the vehicle if you sell it to provide the next owner with important operating, safety and maintenance information.

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA

CAUTION

Severe vehicle damage may result from the use of poor quality lubricants that do not meet HYUNDAI specifications. You must always use high quality lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 8-6 in the

Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2018 HYUNDAI Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI

Motor America.

F4

GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS

1. What are HYUNDAI Genuine

Parts?

HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are the same parts used by HYUNDAI

Motor Company to manufacture vehicles. They are designed and tested for the optimum safety, performance, and reliability for our customers.

2. Why should you use genuine parts?

HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are engineered and built to meet rigid manufacturing requirements.

Damage caused by using imitation, counterfeit or used salvage parts is not covered under the

HYUNDAI New Vehicle Limited

Warranty or any other HYUNDAI warranty.

In addition, any damage to or failure of HYUNDAI Genuine Parts caused by the installation or failure of an imitation, counterfeit or used salvage part is not covered by any HYUNDAI Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchasing HYUNDAI Genuine

Parts?

Look for the HYUNDAI Genuine

Parts Logo on the package (see below).

HYUNDAI Genuine Parts exported to the U.S. are packaged with labels written only in English.

HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are only sold through authorized HYUNDAI

Dealerships.

F5

Introduction

H OW US E T S M AN L

We want to help you get the greatest possible driving pleasure from your vehicle. Your Owner's Manual can assist you in many ways. To gain an overview of the contents of your

Owner's Manual, use the Table of

Contents in the front of the manual.

The first page of each Chapter includes a detailed Table of Contents of the topics in that Chapter.

To quickly locate information about your vehicle, use the Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in this manual and the page number where it can be found.

For your convenience, we have incorporated tabs on the right-hand page edges. These tabs are coded with the Chapter titles to assist you with navigating through the manual.

AF ET Y M ES AG S

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. This Owner's

Manual provides you with many safety precautions and operating procedures. This information alerts you to potential hazards that may hurt you or others, as well as damage to your vehicle.

Safety messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe these hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce the risks.

Warnings and instructions contained in this manual are for your safety.

Failure to follow safety warnings and instructions can lead to serious injury or death.

Throughout this manual DANGER,

WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE and the SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL will be used.

This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential physical injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death. The safety alert symbol precedes the signal words

DANGER, WARNING and

CAUTION.

DANGER

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

F6

Introduction

CAUTION

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE

NOTICE indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in vehicle damage.

V EH E M OD FIIC AT S

• This vehicle should not be modified. Modification of your vehicle could affect its performance, safety or durability and may even violate governmental safety and emissions regulations.

In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under warranty.

• If you use unauthorized electronic devices, it may cause the vehicle to operate abnormally, wire damage, battery discharge and fire. For your safety, do not use unauthorized electronic devices.

WARNING

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Items contained in motor vehicles or emitted from them are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or reproductive harm.

These include:

•

Gasoline and its vapors

•

Engine exhaust

•

Used engine oil

•

Interior passenger compartment components and materials

•

Component parts which are subject to heat and wear

In addition, battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead, lead compounds and other chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

F7

Introduction

V EH LE AT A C LL EC TIIO N A D E EN T D AT A R EC RD S

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The

EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/ fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data

(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.

However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

F8

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Your vehicle at a glance

Safety system of your vehicle

Convenient features of your vehicle

Multimedia System

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications, Consumer information and

Reporting safety defects

Index

I

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

Your vehicle at a glance

Exterior Overview ..................................................1-2

Interior Overview ...................................................1-4

Instrument Panel Overview ..................................1-5

Motor Compartment ..............................................1-6


E XT RIIO

■

Front view

OV ER VIIE W

1-2

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Hood......................................................3-46

2. Windows ................................................3-38

3. Sunroof..................................................3-42

4. Wiper blade ..........................................7-20

5. Tires and wheels ..................................7-26

6. Headlamp ..............................................7-56

7. Outer side view mirror ..........................3-34

8. Daytime running light (DRL) ........3-95, 7-60

OAEE016001N

■

Rear view


1. Door lock ................................................3-9

2. Charging door ......................................3-50

3. Antenna ..................................................4-2

4. Rear combination lamp ........................7-61

5. High mounted stop lamp ......................7-62

6. Rear view monitor ..............................3-110

7. Liftgate ..................................................3-48

8. Towing hook ..........................................6-22

OAEE016005N

1-3

1


IIN TE RIIO R O VE RV W


1. Door lock/unlock button ........................3-10

2. Driver position memory system ............3-14

3. Side view mirror folding switch ..............3-36

4. Side view mirror control switch ..............3-35

5. Central door lock switch ........................3-11

6. Power window switches ........................3-38

7. Power window lock switch......................3-41

8. Instrument panel illumination control switch ....................................................3-52

9. Blind-spot Collision Warning (BCW)

System ..................................................5-38

10. Lane keeping assist (LKA) System......5-59

11. ESC (Electronic Stability Control)

OFF button ..........................................5-29

12. Charging door open button ..................3-50

13. AUTO/LOCK mode selection button....H-15

14. Scheduled charging deactivation button ..................................................H-16

15. Fuse panel ..........................................7-43

16. Steering wheel ....................................3-16

17. Steering wheel tilt/telescope lever ......3-16

18. Seat........................................................2-4

19. Hood release lever ..............................3-46

OAEE017003N

1-4

IIN ST RU ME T P NE L O VE VIIE W


1. Steering wheel audio controls/

Bluetooth

® wireless technology hands-free controls ..............................4-4

2. Instrument cluster ..............................3-51

3. Horn ....................................................3-17

4. Driver’s front air bag ..........................2-49

5. Cruise controls/ ..................................5-73

Smart cruise controls..........................5-78

6. POWER button ....................................5-5

7. Light control/Turn signals....................3-95

8. Wiper/Washer ..................................3-108

9. Reduction gear (shift button) ..............5-10

10. Hazard warning flasher button ..............6-2

11. Climate control system ..................3-112

12. Seat warmer ....................................2-20

13. Drive mode integrated control system ..............................................5-36

14. Auto hold ..........................................5-23

15. EPB (Electronic Parking brake) ........5-18

16. Wireless cellular phone charging system ............................................3-133

17. Passenger's front air bag..................2-49

18. Glove box........................................3-129

19. Power outlet ....................................3-132

20. AUX, USB and iPod ® port ..................4-2

OAEE016004N

1-5

1


M OT R C OM AR TM EN

1-6

The actual motor compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Coolant reservoir ..............................7-12

2. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-16

3. Fuse box ...........................................7-44

4. Battery (12 volt) ................................7-23

5. Coolant cap.......................................7-13

6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-17

OAEE076001N

Safety system of your vehicle

This chapter provides you with important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers.

It explains how to properly use your seats and seat belts, and how your air bags work.

Additionally, this chapter explains how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.

Important Safety Precautions..............................2-2

Always Wear Your Seat Belt ..........................................2-2

Restrain All Children .........................................................2-2

Air Bag Hazards.................................................................2-2

Driver Distraction ..............................................................2-2

Control Your Speed...........................................................2-3

Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition............................2-3

Seats ........................................................................2-4

Safety Precautions ...........................................................2-5

Front Seats .........................................................................2-6

Rear Seats.........................................................................2-12

Head Restraints ...............................................................2-16

Seat warmers ...................................................................2-20

Seat Belts ..............................................................2-23

Seat Belt Safety Precautions.......................................2-23

Seat Belt Warning Light ................................................2-24

Seat Belt Restraint System...........................................2-26

Additional Seat Belt Safety Precautions...................2-32

Care of Seat Belts...........................................................2-35

Child Restraint System (CRS).............................2-36

Children Always in the Rear.........................................2-36

Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) .................2-37

Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)..................2-39

Air Bag

- Advanced Supplemental Restraint System.....2-47

Where Are the Air Bags?..............................................2-49

How Does the Air Bag System Operate?..................2-53

What to Expect After an Air Bag Inflates................2-57

Occupant Classification System (OCS).......................2-58

Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off in a Collision? ........2-63

SRS Care............................................................................2-68

Additional Safety Precautions .....................................2-69

Air Bag Warning Labels .................................................2-70

2


IIM PO TA T S FE Y P CA TIIO S

You will find many safety precautions and recommendations throughout this section, and throughout this manual. The safety precautions in this section are among the most important.

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Restrain All Children

All children under age 13 should ride in your vehicle properly restrained in a rear seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in an appropriate child restraint. Larger children should use a booster seat with the lap/shoulder belt until they can use the seat belt properly without a booster seat.

A seat belt is your best protection in all types of accidents. Air bags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with air bags,

ALWAYS make sure you and your passengers wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.

Air Bag Hazards

While air bags can save lives, they can also cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or who are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and shorter adults are at the greatest risk of being injured by an inflating air bag. Follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.

Driver Distraction

Driver distraction presents a serious and potentially deadly danger, especially for inexperienced drivers. Safety should be the first concern when behind the wheel and drivers need to be aware of the wide array of potential distractions, such as drowsiness, reaching for objects, eating, personal grooming, other passengers, and using cellular phones.

Drivers can become distracted when they take their eyes and attention off the road or their hands off the wheel to focus on activities other than driving. To reduce your risk of distraction or getting into an accident:

2-2

• ALWAYS set up your mobile devices

(i.e., MP3 players, phones, navigation units, etc.) when your vehicle is parked or safely stopped.

• ONLY use your mobile device when allowed by laws and when conditions permit safe use. NEVER text or email while driving. Most states have laws prohibiting drivers from texting.

Some states and cities also prohibit drivers from using handheld phones.

• NEVER let the use of a mobile device distract you from driving. You have a responsibility to your passengers and others on the road to always drive safely, with your hands on the wheel as well as your eyes and attention on the road.

Control Your Speed

Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.

Keep Your Vehicle in Safe

Condition

Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.

2

2-3


S EA S

■

Manual seat

■

Power seat

Front seats

(1) Forward and backward

(2) Seatback angle

(3) Seat cushion height

(4) Lumbar support (Driver's seat)*

(5) Seat warmer*

(6) Headrest

Rear seats

(7) Seat warmer*

(8) Armrest*

(9) Headrest

(10) Seatback folding

* : if equipped

OAEE036001N

2-4

Safety Precautions

Adjusting the seats so that you are sitting in a safe, comfortable position plays an important role in driver and passenger safety together with the seat belts and air bags in an accident.

WARNING

Do not use a cushion that reduces friction between the seat and the passenger. The passenger's hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt during an accident or a sudden stop.

Serious or fatal internal injuries could result because the seat belt cannot operate properly.

Air bags

You can take steps to reduce the risk of being injured by an inflating air bag. Sitting too close to an air bag greatly increases the risk of injury in the event the air bag inflates.

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) recommends that drivers allow at least 10 inches

(25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and their chest.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating air bag, take the following precautions:

•

Adjust the driver's seat as far to the rear as possible while maintaining the ability to maintain full control of the vehicle.

•

Adjust the front passenger seat as far to the rear as possible.

•

Hold the steering wheel by the rim with hands at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions to minimize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms.

•

NEVER place anything or anyone between the steering wheel and the air bag.

•

Do not allow the front passenger to place feet or legs on the dashboard to minimize the risk of leg injuries.

2

2-5


Seat belts

Always fasten your seat belt before starting any trip.

At all times, passengers should sit upright and be properly restrained.

Infants and small children must be restrained in appropriate child restraint systems. Adults and children who have outgrown a booster seat must be restrained using the seat belts.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when adjusting your seat belt:

•

NEVER use one seat belt for more than one occupant.

•

Always position the seatback upright with the lap portion of the seat belt snug and low across the hips.

•

NEVER allow children or small infants to ride in a passenger's lap.

•

Do not route the seat belt across your neck, across sharp edges, or reroute the shoulder strap away from your body.

•

Do not allow the seat belt to become caught or jammed.

Front Seats

WARNING

Take the following precautions when adjusting your seat:

•

NEVER attempt to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat could respond with unexpected movement and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

•

Do not place anything under the front seats. Loose objects in the driver's foot area could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, causing an accident.

•

Do not allow anything to interfere with the normal position and proper locking of the seatback.

•

Do not place a cigarette lighter on the floor or seat. When you operate the seat, gas may exit out of the lighter causing a fire.

(Continued)

2-6

(Continued)

•

Use extreme caution when picking small objects trapped under the seats or between the seat and the center console. Your hands might be cut or injured by the sharp edges of the seat mechanism.

Manual adjustment (if equipped)

The front seat can be adjusted by using the levers located on the outside of the seat cushion. Before driving, adjust the seat to the proper position so that you can easily control the steering wheel, foot pedals and controls on the instrument panel.

CAUTION

To prevent injury:

•

Do not adjust your seat while wearing your seat belt.

Moving the seat cushion forward may cause strong pressure on your abdomen.

•

Do not allow your hands or fingers to get caught in the seat mechanisms while the seat is moving.

OAE036002

Forward and rearward adjustment

To move the seat forward or rearward:

1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment lever and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the seat is locked in place. Move forward and rearward without using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly.

2

2-7


OAE036003

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the seatback lever.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat and adjust the seatback to the position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place.

(The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to lock.)

Reclining seatback

Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the protection of your restraint system

(seat belts and air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seatback.

WARNING

NEVER ride with a reclined seatback when the vehicle is moving.

Riding with a reclined seatback increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop.

Drivers and passengers should

ALWAYS sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.

Seat belts must be snug against your hips and chest to work properly.

When the seatback is reclined, the shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be snug against your chest. Instead, it will be in front of you. During an accident, you could be thrown into the seat belt, causing neck or other injuries.

The more the seatback is reclined, the greater chance the passenger's hips will slide under the lap belt or the passenger's neck will strike the shoulder belt.

2-8

OAE036004

Seat cushion height

To change the height of the seat cushion:

• Push down on the lever several times, to lower the seat cushion.

• Pull up on the lever several times, to raise the seat cushion.

Power adjustment

(for driver's seat, if equipped)

The front seat can be adjusted by using the control switches located on the outside of the seat cushion. Before driving, adjust the seat to the proper position so that you can easily control the steering wheel, foot pedals and controls on the instrument panel.

WARNING

NEVER allow children in the vehicle unattended. The power seats are operable when the vehicle is turned off.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the seats:

• Always stop adjusting the seats when the seat has been adjusted as far forward or rearward as possible.

• Do not adjust the seats longer than necessary when the vehicle is turned off. This may result in unnecessary battery drain.

• Do not operate two or more seats at the same time. This may result in an electrical malfunction.

2

2-9


OAE036006

Forward and rearward adjustment

To move the seat forward or rearward:

1. Push the control switch forward or rearward.

2. Release the switch once the seat reaches the desired position.

OAE036007

Seatback angle

To adjust the seatback:

1. Rotate the top of control switch forward or rearward.

2. Release the switch once the seatback reaches the desired position.

Reclining seatback

Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the protections of your restraint system

(seat belts and air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seatback.

WARNING



Driver and passengers should

ALWAYS sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.

2-10

Seat belts must be snug against your hips and chest to work properly.

When the seatback is reclined, the shoulder belt cannot do its job because it will not be snug against your chest. Instead, it will be in front of you. During an accident, you could be thrown into the seat belt, causing neck or other injuries.

The more the seatback is reclined, the greater chance the passenger’s hips will slide under the lap belt or the passenger's neck will strike the shoulder belt.

OAE036008

Seat cushion height

To change the height of the seat cushion:

1. • Push the front portion of the control switch up to raise or down to lower the front part of the seat cushion.

• Push the rear portion of the control switch up to raise or down to lower the height of the seat cushion.

2. Release the switch once the seat reaches the desired position.

OAE036005

Lumbar support

(for driver's seat, if equipped)

To adjust the lumbar support:

1. Press the front portion of the switch (1) to increase support or the rear portion of the switch (2) to decrease support.

2. Release the switch once it reaches the desired position.

2

2-11


Seatback pocket

OAD035017

The seatback pocket is provided on the back of the front passenger's seatback.

WARNING

To prevent the Occupant

Classification System from malfunctioning:

Do not hang onto the front passenger's seatback.

CAUTION

Do not put heavy or sharp objects in the seatback pockets.

In an accident they could come loose from the pocket and injure occupants.

Rear Seats

Folding the rear seat

The rear seatbacks can be folded to facilitate carrying long items or to increase the luggage capacity of the vehicle.

WARNING

•

Never allow passengers to sit on top of the folded down seatback while the vehicle is moving. This is not a proper seating position and no seat belts are available for use.

This could result in serious injury or death in case of an accident or sudden stop.

•

Objects carried on the folded down seatback should not extend higher than the top of the front seatbacks. This could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops.

2-12

To fold down the rear seatback:

1. Set the front seatback to the upright position and if necessary, slide the front seat forward.

OAE036065L

OAE036020

5. Pull on the seatback folding lever

(1).

OAE036018

.

2. Lower the rear head restraints to the lowest position by pushing and holding the release button (1) and pushing down on the headrest (2).

OAE036019

3. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in the pocket between the rear seatback and cushion.

4. Locate the seatbelt toward the outboard position before folding down the seatback. If not, the seatbelt system may be interfered by the seatback.

2-13

2


OAE036021

6. Fold the seatback toward the front of the vehicle.

OAE036066L

7. To use the rear seat, lift and unfold the seatback to the upright position. Push the seatback firmly until it clicks into place. Make sure the seatback is locked in place.

When you return the seatback to its upright position, always be sure it has locked into position by pushing on the top of the seatback.

WARNING

When returning the rear seatback from a folded to an upright position, hold the seatback and return it slowly. Ensure that the seatback is completely locked into its upright position by pushing on the top of the seatback. In an accident or sudden stop, the unlocked seatback could allow cargo to move forward with great force and enter the passenger compartment, which could result in serious injury or death.

2-14

WARNING

Do not place objects in the rear seats, since they cannot be properly secured and may hit vehicle occupants in a collision causing serious injury or death.

Armrest (if equipped)

WARNING

Make sure the vehicle is off, shifted to (Park), and the parking brake is securely applied whenever loading or unloading cargo.

Failure to take these steps may allow the vehicle to move if the shift button is inadvertently pressed to another position.

OAE036022

The armrest is located in the center of the rear seat. Pull the armrest down by using the strap from the seatback to use it.

CAUTION

•

Be careful when loading cargo through the rear passenger seats to prevent damage to the vehicle interior.

•

When cargo is loaded through the rear passenger seats, ensure the cargo is properly secured to prevent it from moving while driving.

•

Unsecured cargo in the passenger compartment can cause damage to the vehicle or injury to it's occupants.

2

2-15


Head Restraints

The vehicle's front and rear seats have adjustable head restraints. The head restraints provide comfort for passengers, but more importantly they are designed to help protect passengers from whiplash and other neck and spinal injuries during an accident, especially in a rear impact collision.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death in an accident, take the following precautions when adjusting your head restraints:

•

Always properly adjust the head restraints for all passengers BEFORE starting the vehicle.

•

NEVER let anyone ride in a seat with the head restraints removed.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

OLF034072N

Adjust the head restraints so the middle of the head restraints is at the same height as the height of the top of the eyes.

•

NEVER adjust the head restraint position of the driver’s seat when the vehicle is in motion.

•

Adjust the head restraint as close to the passenger’s head as possible. Do not use a seat cushion that holds the body away from the seatback.

•

Make sure the head restraint locks into position after adjusting it.

2-16

NOTICE

To prevent damage, NEVER hit or pull on the head restraints.

Front seat head restraints

OPDE036068

The vehicle's front and passenger's seats are equipped with adjustable head restraints for the passengers safety and comfort.

OAE036010

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the head restraint:

1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the head restraint:

1. Push and hold the release button

(2) on the head restraint support.

2. Lower the head restraint to the desired position (3).

2

2-17


■

Type A

OAE036012

OLF034015

NOTICE

If you recline the seatback towards the front with the head restraint and seat cushion raised, the head restraint may come in contact with the sunvisor or other parts of the vehicle.

■

Type B

OAE036011

Removal/Reinstallation

To remove the head restraint:

1. Recline the seatback (2) rearward using the seatback angle lever/ switch (1).

2. Raise the head restraint as far as it can go.

2-18

3. Press the head restraint release button (3) while pulling the head restraint up (4).

■

Type A

Rear seat head restraints

OAE036014

■

Type B

OAE036013

To reinstall the head restraint:

1. Put the head restraint poles (2) into the holes while pressing the release button (1).

2. Adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.

3. Recline the seatback (4) forward using the seatback angle lever/ switch (3).

OPDE036069

The rear seats are equipped with head restraints in all the seating positions for the passenger's safety and comfort.

To raise the head restraint:

OAE036017

Adjusting the height up and down

1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the head restraint:

1. Push and hold the release button

(2) on the head restraint support.

2. Lower the head restraint to the desired position (3).

2-19

2


OAE036072L

Removal/Reinstallation

To remove the head restraint:

1. Raise the head restraint as far as it can go.

2. Press the head restraint release button (1) while pulling the head restraint up (2).

To reinstall the head restraint:

1. Put the head restraint poles into the holes (3) while pressing the release button (1).

2. Adjust the head restraint to the appropriate height.

Seat Warmers

Front seat warmers

Seat warmers are provided to warm the seats during cold weather.

WARNING

The seat warmers can cause a

SERIOUS BURN, even at low temperatures and especially if used for long periods of time.

Passengers must be able to feel if the seat is becoming too warm so they can turn it off, if needed.

People who cannot detect temperature change or pain to the skin should use extreme caution, especially the following types of passengers:

•

Infants, children, elderly or disabled persons, or hospital outpatients.

•

People with sensitive skin or who burn easily.

•

Fatigued individuals.

•

Intoxicated individuals.

•

People taking medication that can cause drowsiness or sleepiness.

2-20

WARNING

NEVER place anything on the seat that insulates against heat when the seat warmer is in operation, such as a blanket or seat cushion. This may cause the seat warmer to overheat, causing a burn or damage to the seat.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the seat warmers and seats:

• Never use a solvent such as paint thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline to clean the seats.

• Do not place heavy or sharp objects on seats equipped with seat warmers.

• Do not change the seat cover. It may damage the seat warmer.

• Each time you push the switch, the temperature setting of the seat is changed as follows :

OFF

→

HIGH ( )

LOW ( )

→

MIDDLE ( )

OAEE036002N

(

While the vehicle is in the ready

) mode, push either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or front passenger's seat.

During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the OFF position.

• When pressing the switch for more than 1.5 seconds with the seat warmer operating, the seat warmer will turn OFF.

• The seat warmer defaults to the

OFF position whenever the POWER button is in the ON position.

i

Information

With the seat warmer switch in the

ON position, the heating system in the seat turns off or on automatically depending on the seat temperature.

2

2-21


Rear seat warmers (if equipped)

Each time you push the switch, the temperature setting of the seat is changed as follows :

OFF

→

HIGH ( )

→

LOW ( )

Battery cooling duct

The seat warmer defaults to the OFF position whenever the POWER button is placed in the ON position.

OAE036023

While the vehicle is in the ready

( ) mode, push either of the switches to warm the rear seat.

During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the OFF position.

i

Information

With the seat warmer switch in the

ON position, the heating system in the seat turns off or on automatically depending on the seat temperature.

OAEE036004

The high voltage battery cooling duct is located in the bottom center of the rear seats. The cooling duct cools down the high voltage battery.

When the high voltage battery cooling duct is blocked, the high voltage battery may be overheated. Do not obstruct the cooling duct with any other objects.

2-22

S EA T B LT S

This section describes how to use the seat belts properly. It also describes some of the things not to do when using seat belts.

Seat Belt Safety Precautions

Always fasten your seat belt and make sure all passengers have fastened their seat belts before starting any trip. Air bags are designed to supplement the seat belt as an additional safety device, but they are not a substitute. Most states require all occupants of a vehicle to wear seat belts.

WARNING

Seat belts must be used by ALL passengers whenever the vehicle is moving. Take the following precautions when adjusting and wearing seat belts:

•

ALWAYS properly restrain children under age 13 in the rear seats.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

NEVER allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. If a child age 13 or older must be seated in the front seat, move the seat as far back as possible and properly restrain them in the seat.

•

NEVER allow an infant or child to be carried on an occupant’s lap.

•

NEVER ride with the seatback reclined when the vehicle is moving.

•

Do not allow children to share a seat or seat belt.

•

Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm or behind your back.

•

Always wear both the shoulder portion and lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.

•

Do not use the seat belt if it is twisted. A twisted seat belt will not protect you properly in an accident.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

Do not use a seat belt if the webbing or hardware is damaged.

•

Do not latch the seat belt into the buckles of other seats.

•

NEVER unfasten the seat belt while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

•

Make sure there is nothing in the buckle interfering with the seat belt latch mechanism.

This may prevent the seat belt from fastening securely.

•

No modifications or additions should be made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from being adjusted to remove slack.

2

2-23


WARNING

Damaged seat belts and seat belt assemblies will not operate properly. Always replace:

•

Frayed, contaminated, or damaged webbing

•

Damaged hardware

•

The entire seat belt assembly after it has been worn in an accident, even if damage to webbing or assembly is not apparent

Seat Belt Warning Light

Seat belt warning light

(for driver's seat)

If you continue not to fasten the seat belt and you drive over 6 mph

(9 km/h), the warning light will stay illuminated.


(20 km/h) the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately

100 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink.

OLMB033022

As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt warning light will illuminate and warning chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the POWER button ON if the seat belt is unfastened.

If you unfasten the seat belt while driving under 12 mph (20 km/h), the seat belt warning light will illuminate until the seat belt is fastened.

If you unfasten the seat belt while driving over 12 mph (20 km/h), the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink.

2-24

Seat belt warning light

(for front passenger's seat)

OAEE036011N

As a reminder to the front passenger, the front passenger's seat belt warning lights will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the POWER button to the ON position regardless of belt fastening.


(9 km/h), the warning light will stay illuminated.


(20 km/h) the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink.

If you unfasten the seat belt while driving under 12 mph (20 km/h) the seat belt warning light will illuminate until the seat belt is fastened.

If you unfasten the seat belt while driving over 12 mph (20 km/h), the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink.

WARNING

The front passenger's seat belt warning light may not properly operate if the front passenger does not sit properly in the seat.

Seat Belt Restraint System

WARNING

OLMB033025

Improperly positioned seat belts may increase the risk of serious injury in an accident. Take the following precautions when adjusting the seat belt:

•

Position the lap portion of the seat belt as low as possible across your hips, not on your waist, so that it fits snugly.

(Continued)

2

2-25


(Continued)

•

Position one arm under the shoulder belt and the other over the belt, as shown in the illustration.

•

Always position the shoulder belt anchor into the locked position at the appropriate height.

•

Never position the shoulder belt across your neck or face.

Seat Belt-Driver's 3-point system with emergency locking retractor

OLMB033087

To fasten your seat belt:

Pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into the buckle (2). There will be an audible

"click" when the tab locks into the buckle.

ODH033053

You should place the lap belt (1) portion across your hips and the shoulder belt (2) portion across your chest.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and move with you.

If there is a sudden stop or impact, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly.

2-26

NOTICE

If you are not able to smoothly pull enough of the seat belt out from the retractor, firmly pull the seat belt out and release it. After release, you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly.

OAD035027

Height adjustment

You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of the three different positions for maximum comfort and safety.

The shoulder portion should be adjusted so it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder nearest the door, not over your neck.

To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster into an appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up

(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while pressing the height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into position.

2

2-27


Rear Seat Belt – Passenger's 3point system with convertible locking retractor

This type of seat belt combines the features of both an emergency locking retractor seat belt and an automatic locking retractor seat belt. Convertible retractor type seat belts are installed in the rear seat positions to help accommodate the installation of child restraint systems. Although a convertible retractor is also installed in the front passenger seat position, NEVER place any infant/child restraint system in the front seat of the vehicle.

ODH033057

To release your seat belt:

Press the release button (1) in the locking buckle.

When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor. If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

To fasten your seat belt:

Pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle.

When not securing a child restraint, the seat belt operates in the same way as the driver's seat belt (Emergency

Locking Retractor Type). It automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion of the seat belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly across your hips.

When the seat belt is fully extended from the retractor to allow the installation of a child restraint system, the seat belt operation changes to allow the belt to retract, but not to extend

(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).

Refer to the "Using a Child Restraint

System" section in this chapter.

NOTICE

Although the seat belt retractor provides the same level of protection for seated passengers in either emergency or automatic locking modes, the emergency locking mode allows seated passengers to move freely in their seat while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop, the retractor automatically locks the belt to help restrain your body.

To deactivate the automatic locking mode, unbuckle the seat belt and allow the belt to fully retract.

2-28

Pre-tensioner seat belt

(Driver and front passenger)

ODH033057

To release your seat belt:

Press the release button (1) in the locking buckle.

When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor. If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

OTL035053

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and front passenger's Pre-tensioner

Seat Belts (Retractor Pretensioner and Emergency Fastening Device

System). The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to make sure the seat belts fit tightly against the occupant's body in certain frontal or side collision(s).

The Emergency Fastening Device

System may be activated in certain crashes where the frontal or side collision(s) is severe enough, together with the air bags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock into position. In certain frontal or side collision(s), the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant's body.

(1) Retractor Pretensioner

The purpose of the retractor pretensioner is to make sure that the shoulder belts fit in tightly against the occupant's upper body in certain frontal or side collision(s).

System

The purpose of the Emergency

Fastening Device System is to make sure that the pelvis belts fit in tightly against the occupant's lower body in certain frontal or side collision(s).

If the system senses excessive tension on the driver or passenger's seat belt when the pre-tensioner system activates, the load limiter inside the retractor pre-tensioner will release some of the pressure on the affected seat belt.

2-29

2


WARNING

•

Always wear your seat belt and sit properly in your seat.

•

Do not use the seat belt if it is loose or twisted. A loose or twisted seat belt will not protect you properly in an accident.

•

Do not place anything near the buckle. This may adversely affect the buckle and cause it to function improperly.

•

Always replace your pre-tensioners after activation or an accident.

•

NEVER inspect, service, repair or replace the pre-tensioners yourself. This must be done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

•

Do not hit the seat belt assemblies.

WARNING

Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies for several minutes after they have been activated. When the pre-tensioner seat belt mechanism deploys during a collision, the pre-tensioners become hot and can burn you.

OLMB033040/Q

The Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt System consists mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in the illustration above:

1. SRS air bag warning light

2. Retractor pre-tensioner

3. SRS control module

4. Emergency Fastening Device

System

2-30

NOTICE

The sensor that activates the SRS air bag is connected with the pre–tensioner seat belts. The SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds after the

POWER button is in the ON position, and then it should turn off.

If the pre-tensioner is not working properly, the warning light will illuminate even if the SRS air bag is not malfunctioning. If the warning light does not illuminate, stays illuminated or illuminates when the vehicle is being driven, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the pre-tensioner seat belts and SRS air bags as soon as possible.

NOTICE

• Both the driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts may be activated in certain frontal or side collisions or rollovers.

• When the pre-tensioner seat belts are activated, a loud noise may be heard and fine dust, which may appear to be smoke, may be visible in the passenger compartment. These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous.

• Although it is non-toxic, the fine dust may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed for prolonged periods. Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly after an accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated.

WARNING

•

Fasten your seat belt while sitting properly in an upright position to maximize the effectiveness of the pre-tensioner seat belt system.

•

A pre-tensioner seat belt system is designed to activate only once. Replace the pretensioner seat belt system, if it was activated in an accident.

2

2-31


Rear center seatbelt

(3-point rear center seat belt)

OAE036068L

1.Insert the tongue plate (A) into the buckle (A’) until an audible "click" is heard, indicating the latch is locked. Make sure the belt is not twisted.

OAE036027

2. Pull the tongue plate (B) and insert it into the buckle (B’) until an audible "click" is heard, indicating the latch is locked. Make sure the belt is not twisted.

When using the rear center seat belt, the buckle with the "CENTER" mark must be used.

Additional Seat Belt Safety

Precautions

Seat belt use during pregnancy

The seat belt should always be used during pregnancy. The best way to protect your unborn child is to protect yourself by always wearing the seat belt.

Pregnant women should always wear a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place the shoulder belt across your chest, routed between your breasts and away from your neck. Place the lap belt line so that it fits snugly and as low as possible across the hips, not across the abdomen.

2-32

WARNING

• A pregnant woman or a patient is more vulnerable to any imapcts on the abdomen during an abrupt stop or accident. If you are in an accident while pregnant, we recommend you consult your doctor.

• To reduce the risk of serious injury or death to an unborn child during an accident, pregnant women should

NEVER place the lap portion of the seat belt above or over the area of the abdomen where the unborn child is located.

Seat belt use and children

Infant and small children

All 50 states have child restraint laws which require children to travel in approved child restraint devices, including booster seats. The age at which seat belts can be used instead of child restraints differs among states, so you should be aware of the specific requirements in your state, and where you are travelling. Infant and child restraints must be properly placed and installed in a rear seat.

For more information refer to the

"Child Restraint Systems" section in this chapter.

WARNING

ALWAYS properly restrain infants and small children in a child restraint appropriate for the child's height and weight.

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death to a child and other passengers, NEVER hold a child in your lap or arms when the vehicle is moving.The violent forces created during an accident will tear the child from your arms and throw the child against the interior of the vehicle.

Small children are best protected from injury in an accident when properly restrained in the rear seat by a child restraint system that meets the requirements of the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards. Before buying any child restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard FMVSS

213. The restraint must be appropriate for your child's height and weight.

2

2-33


Check the label on the child restraint for this information. Refer to the

"Child Restraint Systems" section in this chapter.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly touches the child's neck or face, try placing the child closer to the center of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still touches their face or neck they need to be returned to an appropriate booster seat in the rear seat.

Larger children

Children under age 13 and who are too large for a booster seat must always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. A seat belt should lie across the upper thighs and be snug across the shoulder and chest to restrain the child safely. Check belt fit periodically.

Children are afforded the most safety in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system and/or seat belts in the rear seat. Always have the

LATCH system inspected by your authorized HYUNDAI dealer after an accident. An accident can damage the LATCH system and may not properly secure the child restraint.

If a larger child over age 13 must be seated in the front seat, the child must be securely restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be placed in the rearmost position.

2-34

WARNING

•

Always make sure children are wearing their seat belts and that they are properly adjusted before driving.

•

NEVER allow the shoulder belt to contact the child’s neck or face.

•

Do not allow more than one child to use a single seat belt.

Transporting an injured person

A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported.

Consult a physician for specific recommendations.

One person per belt

Two people (including children) should never attempt to use a single seat belt.

This could increase the severity of injuries in case of an accident.

Do not lie down

Sitting in a reclined position when the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.

Even when buckled up, the protections of your restraint system (seat belts and air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seatback.

To reduce the chance of injuries in the event of an accident and to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the restraint system, all passengers should be sitting up and the front and rear seats should be in an upright position when the car is moving.

A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if the person is lying down in the rear seat or if the front or rear seats are in a reclined position.

WARNING

•


•


•

Drivers and passengers should always sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seatbacks upright.

Care of Seat Belts

Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

Periodic inspection

All seat belts should be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind. Any damaged parts should be replaced as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

When to replace seat belts

The entire seat belt assembly or assemblies should be replaced if the vehicle has been involved in an accident. This should be done even if no damage is visible. Additional questions concerning seat belt operation should be directed to an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts become dirty, they can be cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasives should not be used because they may damage and weaken the fabric.

2

2-35


C HIIL ES TR T S YS EM

Children Always in the Rear

WARNING

Always properly restrain children in the rear seats of the vehicle.

Children of all ages are safer when restrained in the rear seat.

A child riding in the front passenger seat can be forcefully struck by an inflating air bag resulting in SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH.

CR S))

Children under age 13 must always ride in the rear seats and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver.

According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat. Even with air bags,

children can be seriously injured

or killed. Children too large for a child restraint must use the seat belts provided.

All 50 states have child restraint laws which require children to travel in approved child restraint devices. The laws governing the age or height/weight restrictions at which seat belts can be used instead of child restraints differs among states, so you should be aware of the specific requirements in your state, and where you are travelling.

Child restraint systems must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. You must use a commercially available child restraint system that meets the requirements of the Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

(FMVSS 213).

Child restraint systems are generally designed to be secured in a vehicle seat by lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH system in the rear seats of the vehicle.

2-36

Child restraint system (CRS)

Infants and younger children must be restrained in an appropriate rear-facing or forward-facing CRS that has first been properly secured to the rear seat of the vehicle. Read and comply with the instructions for installation and use provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.

WARNING

An improperly secured child restraint can increase the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH in an accident. Always take the following precautions when using a child restraint system:

•

NEVER install a child or infant restraint in the front passenger's seat.

•

Always properly secure the child restraint to a rear seat of the vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

Always follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.

•

Always properly restrain your child in the child restraint.

•

If the vehicle head restraint prevents proper installation of a child seat (as described in the child restraint system manual), the head restraint of the respective seating position shall be readjusted or entirely removed.

•

Do not use an infant carrier or a child safety seat that

"hooks" over a seatback, it may not provide adequate protection in an accident.

•

After an accident, have a

HYUNDAI dealer check the child restraint system, seat belts, tether anchors and lower anchors.

Selecting a Child Restraint

System (CRS)

When selecting a CRS for your child, always:

• Make sure the CRS has a label certifying that it meets applicable

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (FMVSS 213).

• Select a child restraint based on your child's height and weight. The required label or the instructions for use typically provide this information.

• Select a child restraint that fits the vehicle seating position where it will be used.

• Read and comply with the warnings and instructions for installation and use provided with the child restraint system.

2

2-37


Child restraint system types

There are three main types of child restraint systems: rear-facing seats, forward-facing seats, and booster seats. They are classified according to the child’s age, height and weight.

Rear-facing child seats

WARNING

NEVER install a child or infant restraint in the front passenger's seat.

Placing a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat can result in SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH if the child restraint is struck by an inflating air bag.

OAE036062

A rear-facing child seat provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the child. The harness system holds the child in place, and in an accident, acts to keep the child positioned in the seat and reduce the stress to the neck and spinal cord.

All children under age one must always ride in a rear-facing infant child restraint.

Convertible and 3-in-1 child seats typically have higher height and weight limits for the rear-facing position, allowing you to keep your child rearfacing for a longer period of time.

Continue to use a rear-facing child seat for as long as your child will fit within the height and weight limits allowed by the child seat manufacturer. It's the best way to keep them safe. Once your child has outgrown the rear-facing child restraint, your child is ready for a forward-facing child restraint with a harness.

2-38

OAE036028

Forward-facing child restraints

A forward-facing child seat provides restraint for the child's body with a harness. Keep children in a forwardfacing child seat with a harness until they reach the top height or weight limit allowed by your child restraint’s manufacturer.

Once your child outgrows the forwardfacing child restraint, your child is ready for a booster seat.

Booster seats

A booster seat is a restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle's seat belt system. A booster seat positions the seat belt so that it fits properly over the lap of your child.

Keep your child in a booster seat until they are big enough to sit in the seat without a booster and still have the seat belt fit properly. For a seat belt to fit properly, the lap belt must lie snugly across the upper thighs, not the stomach. The shoulder belt should lie snug across the shoulder and chest and not across the neck or face.

Children under age 13 must always ride in the rear seats and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury.

Installing a Child Restraint

System (CRS)

WARNING

Before installing your child restraint system always:

•

Read and follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.

•

Read and follow the instructions regarding child restraint systems in this manual.

Failure to follow all warnings and instructions could increase the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH if an accident occurs.

WARNING

If the vehicle headrest prevents proper installation of a child seat (as described in the child seat system manual, the headrest of the respective seating position shall be readjusted or entirely removed.

2

2-39


After selecting a proper child seat for your child, check to make sure it fits properly in your vehicle. Follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child seat. Note these general steps when installing the seat to your vehicle:

• Properly secure the child restraint

to the vehicle. All child restraints must be secured to the vehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or with the LATCH system.

• Make sure the child restraint is

firmly secured. After installing a child restraint to the vehicle, push and pull the seat forward-and-back and side-to-side to verify that it is securely attached to the seat. A child restraint secured with a seat belt should be installed as firmly as possible. However, some side-toside movement can be expected.

• Secure the child in the child

restraint. Make sure the child is properly strapped in the child restraint according to the manufacturer instructions.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. To prevent burns, check the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in the child restraint.

Lower Anchors and Tether for

Children (LATCH System)

The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving and in an accident. This system is designed to make installation of the child restraint easier and reduce the possibility of improperly installing your child restraint. The LATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint. The

LATCH system eliminates the need to use seat belts to secure the child restraint to the rear seats.

Lower anchors are metal bars built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments.

To use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you must have a child restraint with LATCH attachments.

The child seat manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to use the child seat with its attachments for the LATCH lower anchors.

2-40

OAE036063

LATCH anchors have been provided in the left and right outboard rear seating positions. Their locations are shown in the illustration. There are no

LATCH anchors provided for the center rear seating position.

WARNING

Do not attempt to install a child restraint system using LATCH anchors in the rear center seating position.There are no LATCH anchors provided for this seat.

Using the outboard seat anchors can damage the anchors which may break or fail in a collision resulting in serious injury or death.

Lower Anchor

Position Indicator

Lower Anchor

OAE036031

The lower anchor position indicator symbols are located on the left and right rear seat backs to identify the position of the lower anchors in your vehicle (see arrows in illustration).

The LATCH anchors are located between the seatback and the seat cushion of the rear seat left and right outboard seating positions.

2

2-41


Securing a child restraint with the LATCH anchors system

To install a LATCH-compatible child restraint in either of the rear outboard seating positions:

1. Move the seat belt buckle away from the lower anchors.

2. Move any other objects away from the anchors that could prevent a secure connection between the child restraint and the lower anchors.

3. Place the child restraint on the vehicle seat, then attach the seat to the lower anchors according to the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.

4. Follow the child restraint instructions for properly adjusting and tightening the lower attachments on the child restraint to the lower anchors.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when using the LATCH system:

•

Read and follow all installation instructions provided with your child restraint system.

•

To prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of unretracted seat belts, buckle all unused rear seat belts and retract the seat belt webbing behind the child. Children can be strangled if a shoulder belt becomes wrapped around their neck and the seat belt tightens.

•

NEVER attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor. This could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or break.

•

Always have the LATCH system inspected by your authorized HYUNDAI dealer after an accident. An accident can damage the LATCH system and may not properly secure the child restraint.

2-42

NOTICE

The recommended weight for the

LATCH system is under 65 lb (30 kg).

How to determine an appropriate child restraint weight:

Child weight + Child restraint weight < 65 lb (30kg)

Securing a child restraint seat with "Tether Anchor" system

OAEE036029N

First secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors or the seat belt. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether strap be attached, attach and tighten the top tether strap to the top tether strap anchor.

Child restraint hook holders are located on the rear of the seatbacks.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when installing the tether strap:

•

Read and follow all installation instructions provided with your child restraint system.

•

NEVER attach more than one child restraint to a single tether anchor. This could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or break.

•

Do not attach the tether strap to anything other than the correct tether anchor. It may not work properly if attached to something else.

•

Do not use the tether anchors for adult seat belts or harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

OAE036030

To install the tether anchor:

1. Route the child restraint tether strap over the child restraint seatback.

Route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, or route the tether strap over the top of the vehicle seatback. Make sure the strap is not twisted.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to the tether anchor, then tighten the tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer’s instructions to firmly secure the child restraint to the seat.

3. Check that the child restraint is securely attached to the seat by pushing and pulling the seat forward-and-back and side-to-side.

2-43

2


Securing a child restraint with lap/shoulder belt

When not using the LATCH system, all child restraints must be secured to a vehicle rear seat with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING

ALWAYS place a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat of the vehicle.

Placing a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the child restraint is struck by an inflating air bag.

OLMB033044

Automatic locking mode

Since all passenger seat belts move freely under normal conditions and only lock under extreme or emergency conditions (emergency locking mode), you must manually pull the seat belt all the way out to shift the retractor to the "Automatic Locking" mode to secure a child restraint.

The "Automatic Locking" mode will help prevent the normal movement of the child in the vehicle from causing the seat belt to loosen and compromise the child restraint system. To secure a child restraint system, use the following procedure.

To install a child restraint system on the rear seats, do the following:

1. Place the child restraint system on a rear seat and route the lap/ shoulder belt around or through the child restraint, following the restraint manufacturer's instructions.

Be sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.

NOTICE

When using the rear center seat belt, you should also refer to the

"Rear Seat Belt – Passenger's 3point system" section in this chapter.

2-44

OLMB033045

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into the buckle. Listen for the distinct "click" sound.

i

Information

Position the release button so that it is easy to access in case of an emergency.

OLMB033097

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat belt all the way out. When the shoulder portion of the seat belt is fully extended, it will shift the retractor to the "Automatic Locking" (child restraint) mode.

OLMB033098

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of the seat belt to retract and listen for an audible "clicking" or "ratcheting" sound. This indicates that the retractor is in the "Automatic

Locking" mode. If no distinct sound is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

2

2-45


5. Remove as much slack from the belt as possible by pushing down on the child restraint system while feeding the shoulder belt back into the retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraint system to confirm that the seat belt is holding it firmly in place. If it is not, release the seat belt and repeat steps 2 through 6.

7. Double check that the retractor is in the "Automatic Locking" mode by attempting to pull more of the seat belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the retractor is in the

"Automatic Locking" mode.

If your CRS manufacturer instructs or recommends you to use a tether anchor with the lap/shoulder belt, refer to the previous pages for more information.

NOTICE

When the seat belt is allowed to retract to its fully stowed position, the retractor will automatically switch from the "Automatic

Locking" mode to the emergency lock mode for normal adult usage.

WARNING

If the retractor is not in the

"Automatic Locking" mode, the child restraint can move when your vehicle turns or stops suddenly. A child can be seriously injured or killed if the child restraint is not properly anchored in the car, including manually pulling the seat belt all the way out to shift the rectractor to the

"Automatic Locking" mode.

To remove the child restraint, press the release button on the buckle and then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the restraint and allow the seat belt to retract fully.

2-46

R B AG - A DV NC D S PP EM NT L R ES TR AIIN T S TE M

1. Driver's front air bag

2. Passenger's front air bag

3. Side air bag

4. Curtain air bag

5. Driver's knee air bag

2

The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OAEE036035

2-47


This vehicle is equipped with an

Advanced Supplemental Air Bag

System for the driver's seat and front passenger's seats.

The front air bags are designed to supplement the three-point seat belts. For these air bags to provide protection, the seat belts must be worn at all times when driving.

You can be severely injured or killed in an accident if you are not wearing a seat belt. Air bags are designed to supplement seat belts, but do not replace them. Also, air bags are not designed to deploy in every collision.

In some accidents, the seat belts are the only restraint protecting you.

WARNING

AIR BAG SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ALWAYS use seat belts and child restraints - every trip, every time, everyone! Even with air bags, you can be seriously injured or killed in a collision if you are improperly belted or not wearing your seat belt when the air bag inflates.

NEVER place a child in any child restraint or booster seat in the front passenger seat. An inflating air bag could forcefully strike the infant or child causing serious or fatal injuries.

ABC - Always Buckle Children under age 13 in the back seat. It is the safest place for children of any age to ride. If a child age 13 or older must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.

All occupants should sit upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked and turned off. If an occupant is out of position during an accident, the rapidly deploying air bag may forcefully contact the occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.

You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily close to the air bags or lean against the door or center console.

Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still maintaining control of the vehicle. The U.S. National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.

2-48

Where Are the Air Bags?

Driver's and passenger's front air bags

Your vehicle is equipped with a

Advanced Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and passenger seating positions.

The SRS consists of air bags which are located in the center of the steering wheel, in the driver's side lower crash pad below the steering wheel column and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box.

The air bags are labeled with the letters "AIR BAG" embossed on the pad covers.

■

Driver's front air bag

■

Driver's knee air bag

■

Passenger's front air bag

OAE036032

The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and front passengers with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt system alone. The advanced SRS offers the ability to control the air bag inflation within two levels. A first stage level is provided for moderate-severity impacts. A second stage level is provided for more severe impacts.

According to the impact severity, the

SRS Control Module (SRSCM) controls the air bag inflation. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.

OAE036033

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating front air bags, take the following precautions:

•

Seat belts must be worn at all times to help keep occupants positioned properly.

(Continued)

2

OAE036036

2-49


(Continued)

•

Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still maintaining control of the vehicle.

•

Never lean against the door or center console.

•

Do not allow the front passenger to place their feet or legs on the dashboard.

•

No objects (such as crash pad cover, cellular phone holder, cup holder, perfume or stickers) should be placed over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, windshield glass, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box. Such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to deploy.

•

Do not attach any objects on front windshield and inside mirror.

]

Side air bags

OAE036037

OAE036038

Your vehicle is equipped with a side air bag in each front seat. The purpose of the air bag is to provide the vehicle's driver and the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt alone.

The side air bags are designed to deploy only during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity.

The side and curtain air bags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy if a rollover or possible rollover is detected.

The side air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating side air bag, take the following precautions:

•

Seat belts must be worn at all times to help keep occupants positioned properly.

(Continued)

2-50

(Continued)

•

Do not allow passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and seats.

•

Hold the steering wheel at the

9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions, to minimize the risk of injuries to your hands and arms.

•

Do not use any accessory seat covers. This could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system.

•

Do not place any objects over the air bag or between the air bag and yourself. Also, do not attach any objects around the area the air bag inflates such as the door, side door glass, front and rear pillar.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

Do not place any objects between the door and the seat. They may become dangerous projectiles if the side air bag inflates.

•

Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side air bags.

•

Do not put any objects between the side airbag label and seat cushion. It could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to deploy.

•

Do not cause impact to the doors when the POWER button is in the ON position or this may cause the side air bags to inflate.

•

If the seat or seat cover is damaged, have the vehicle checked and repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Curtain air bags

OAE036041

OAE036042

Curtain air bags are located along both sides of the roof rails above the front and rear doors.

2

2-51


They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions.

The curtain air bags are designed to deploy only during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity.

The side and curtain air bags on both sides of the vehicle may deploy if a rollover or possible rollover is detected.

The curtain air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating curtain air bags, take the following precautions:

•

All seat occupants must wear seat belts at all times to help keep occupants positioned properly.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

Properly secure child restraints as far away from the door as possible.

•

Do not place any objects over the air bag. Also, do not attach any objects around the area the air bag inflates such as the door, side door glass, front and rear pillar, roof side rail.

•

Do not hang other objects except clothes, especially hard or breakable objects. In an accident, it may cause vehicle damage or personal injury.

•

Do not allow passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and seats.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

Do not open or repair the side curtain air bags.

2-52

How Does the Air Bag System

Operate?

9. Side pressure sensors

10. Emergency Fastening Device

System

11. Occupant classification system

SRS warning light

OAEE036075N

The SRS consists of the following components:

1. Driver's front air bag module/

Driver’s knee airbag module

2. Passenger's front air bag module

3. Side air bag modules/

Side impact sensors

4. Curtain air bag modules

5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies

6. Air bag warning light

7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/

Rollover sensor

8. Front impact sensors

The SRSCM (Supplemental Restraint

System Control Module) continually monitors all SRS components while the POWER button is in the ON position to determine if a crash impact is severe enough to require air bag deployment or pre-tensioner seat belt deployment.

The SRS (Supplement Restraint

System) air bag warning light on the instrument panel displays the air bag symbol depicted in the illustration.

The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions. The light indicates that there is a potential malfunction with your air bag system, which could include your side and curtain air bags used for rollover protection.

2-53

2


WARNING

If your SRS malfunctions, the air bag may not inflate properly during an accident increasing the risk of serious injury or death.

If any of the following conditions occur, your SRS is malfunctioning:

•

The light does not turn on for approximately six seconds when the POWER button is in the ON position.

•

The light stays on after illuminating for approximately six seconds.

•

The light comes on while the vehicle is in motion.

•

The light blinks when the vehicle is in the ready ( mode.

)

Have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer inspect the SRS as soon as possible if any of these conditions occur.

During a frontal collision, sensors will detect the vehicle's deceleration. If the rate of deceleration is high enough, the control unit will inflate the front air bags.

The front air bags help protect the driver and front passenger by responding to frontal impacts in which seat belts alone cannot provide adequate restraint. When needed, the side air bags help provide protection in the event of a side impact or rollover.

• Air bags are activated (able to inflate if necessary) only when the

POWER button is in the ON position.

• Air bags inflate in the event of certain frontal or side collisions to help protect the occupants from serious physical injury.

• Generally, air bags are designed to inflate based upon the severity of a collision, its direction, etc. These two factors determine whether the sensors produce an electronic deployment/inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on a number of factors including vehicle speed, angles of impact and the density and stiffness of the vehicles or objects which your vehicle impacts during a collision. The determining factors are not limited to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completely inflate and deflate in an instant. It is virtually impossible for you to see the air bags inflate during an accident. It is much more likely that you will simply see the deflated air bags hanging out of their storage compartments after the collision.

• In addition to inflating in certain side collisions, vehicles equipped with a rollover sensor, side and curtain air bags will inflate if the sensing system detects a rollover.

When a rollover is detected, side and curtain air bags will remain inflated longer to help provide protection from ejection, especially when used in conjunction with the seat belts.

2-54

• To help provide protection, the air bags must inflate rapidly. The speed of air bag inflation is a consequence of extremely short time in which to inflate the air bag between the occupant and the vehicle structures before the occupant impacts those structures. This speed of inflation reduces the risk of serious or lifethreatening injuries and is thus a necessary part of air bag design.

However, the rapid air bag inflation can also cause injuries which can include facial abrasions, bruises and broken bones because the inflation speed also causes the air bags to expand with a great deal of force.

• There are even circumstances under which contact with the air bag can cause fatal injuries, especially if the occupant is positioned excessively close to the air bag.

You can take steps to help reduce the risk of being injured by an inflating air bag. The greatest risk is sitting too close to the air bag. An air bag needs about 10 inches (25 cm) of space to inflate. NHTSA recommends that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from an inflating air bag, take the following precautions:

•

NEVER place a child restraint in the front passenger seat.

Always properly restrain children under age 13 in the rear seats of the vehicle.

•

Adjust the front passenger’s and driver's seats as far to the rear as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle.

•

Hold the steering wheel with hands at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions.

•

Never place anything or anyone between the air bag and the seat occupant.

•

Do not allow the front passenger to place their feet or legs on the dashboard.

■

Driver’s front air bag (1)

OHM039102N

When the SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically deploy the front air bags.

2-55

2


■


■


OHM039104N

■

Passenger’s front air bag

OHM039103N

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the air bags. Further opening of the covers allows full inflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver or the front passenger forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury.

OLMB033057

After complete inflation, the air bag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to steer or operate other controls.

WARNING

To prevent objects from becoming dangerous projectiles when the passenger's air bag inflates:

•

Do not install or place any objects (drink holder, CD holder, stickers, etc.) on the front passenger's panel above the glove box where the passenger's air bag is located.

•

Do not install a container of liquid air freshener near the instrument cluster or on the instrument panel surface.

2-56

What to Expect After an Air

Bag Inflates

After a frontal or side air bag inflates, it will deflate very quickly. Air bag inflation will not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able to steer. Curtain air bags may remain partially inflated for some time after they deploy.

WARNING

After an air bag inflates, take the following precautions:

•

Open your windows and doors as soon as possible after impact to reduce prolonged exposure to the smoke and powder released by the inflating air bag.

•

Do not touch the air bag storage area's internal components immediately after an air bag has inflated. The parts that come into contact with an inflating air bag may be very hot.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

Always wash exposed skin areas thoroughly with cold and mild soap.

•

Always have an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer replace the air bag immediately after deployment. Air bags are designed to be used only once.

Noise and smoke from inflating air bag

When the air bags inflate, they make a loud noise and may produce smoke and powder in the air inside of the vehicle. This is normal and is a result of the ignition of the air bag inflator. After the air bag inflates, you may feel substantial discomfort in breathing because of the contact of your chest with both the seat belt and the air bag, as well as from breathing the smoke and powder. The powder may aggravate asthma for some people. If you experience breathing problems after an air bag deployment, seek medical attention immediately.

Though the smoke and powder are nontoxic, they may cause irritation to the skin, eyes, nose, throat, etc. If this is the case, wash and rinse with cold water immediately and seek medical attention if the symptoms persist.

2

2-57


Occupant Classification

System (OCS)

OAEE036040N

Your vehicle is equipped with an

Occupant Classification System

(OCS) in the front passenger's seat.

Main components of the

Occupant Classification System

• A detection device located within the front passenger seat cushion.

• Electronic system to determine whether the passenger air bag systems should be activated or deactivated.

• An indicator light located on the instrument panel which illuminates the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG

OFF" indicating the front passenger air bag system is deactivated.

• The instrument panel air bag indicator light is interconnected with the OCS.

The OCS is designed to detect the presence of a properly-seated front passenger and determine if the passenger's front air bag should be enabled (may inflate) or not.

The purpose is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF.

For example, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, the occupant classification sensor can detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and wearing the seat belt properly, should not cause the passenger air bag to be automatically turned OFF.

For small adults it may be turned

OFF, however, if the occupant does not sit in the seat properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on the edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag

OFF.

You will find the "PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF" indicator on the center facia panel. This system detects the conditions 1-4 in the following table and activates or deactivates the front passenger air bag based on these conditions.

2-58

Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated properly and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the air bag and the seat belt.

The OCS may not function properly if the passenger takes actions which can affect the classification system.

These include:

• Failing to sit in an upright position.

• Leaning against the door or center console.

• Sitting towards the sides of the front of the seat.

• Putting their legs on the dashboard or resting them on other locations which reduce the passenger weight on the front seat.

• Wearing the seat belt improperly.

• Reclining the seatback.

• Wearing a thick cloth like ski wear or hip protection wear.

• Putting an additional thick cushion on the seat.

• Putting electrical devices (e.g.

notebook, satellite radio) on the seat with inverter charging.

Condition and operation in the front passenger Occupant Classification System

Condition detected by the occupant classification system

1. Adult *

1

2. Infant * 2 or child restraint system with 12 months old * 3 * 4

3. Unoccupied

4. Malfunction in the system

Indicator/Warning light

"PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF" indicator light

Off

SRS warning light

Off

Devices

Front passenger air bag

Activated

On

On

Off

Off

Off

On

Deactivated

Deactivated

Activated

* 1 The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

* 2 Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as an adult depending upon his/her physique or sitting position.

* 3 Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

* 4 The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above 12 months to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front passenger seat. This is a normal condition.

2

2-59


WARNING

Riding in an improper position or placing weight on the front passenger’s seat when it is unoccupied by a passenger adversely affects the OCS. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death:

•

NEVER put a heavy load in the front seat or seatback pocket, or hang any items on the front passenger seat.

•

NEVER ride with the seatback reclined when the vehicle is moving.

OVQ036013NB

•

NEVER place your feet on the front passenger seatback.

OLMB033103

•

NEVER place your feet or legs on the dashboard.

OLMB033100

•

NEVER sit with your hips shifted towards the front of the seat.

OLMB033101

OLMB033102

•

NEVER lean on the door or center console or sit on one side of the front passenger seat.

OLMB033104

(continued)

2-60

(continued)

ODH035900K

•

Do not sit on the passenger seat wearing heavily padded clothes such as ski wear and hip protector.

ODH035902K

•

Do not place electronic devices such as laptops,

DVD player, or conductive materials such as water bottles on the passenger seat.

• Do not use electronic devices such as laptops and satellite radios which use inverter chargers.

ODH035901K

•

Do not use car seat accessories such as thick blankets and cushions which cover up the car seat surface.

ODH035903K

•

If large quantity of liquid has been spilled on the passenger seat, the air bag warning light may illuminate or malfunction.

Therefore, make sure the seat has been completely dried before driving the vehicle.

• Do not place sharp objects on the front passenger seat. These may damage the occupant detection system, if they puncture the seat cushion.

• Do not place any items under the front passenger seat.

• When changing or replacing the seat or seat cover, use original items only. The OCS has been developed based on using original HYUNDAI car seats only. Altering or changing the authentic parts may result in system malfunction and increase risk of injury when in collision. Any of the above could interfere with the proper operation of the OCS sensor thereby increasing the risk of an injury in an accident.

2-61

2


B990A01O

Proper seated position for OCS

If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator is on when an adult is seated in the front passenger seat, place the POWER button in the OFF position and ask the passenger to sit properly (sitting upright with the seat back in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor). Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in that position. This will allow the system to detect the person and to enable the passenger air bag. If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator is still on, ask the passenger to move to the rear seat.

2-62

WARNING

Never allow an adult passenger to ride in the front passenger seat when the "PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF" indicator is illuminated. During a collision, the air bag will not inflate if the indicator is illuminated. Have your passenger reposition himself in the seat. If the "PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF" indicator remains illuminated after the passenger repositions himself properly and the vehicle is restarted, have the passenger move to the rear seat because the air bag will not inflate.

Do Not Install a Child Restraint in the Front Passenger's Seat

NOTICE

The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator illuminates for approximately 4 seconds after the POWER button is in the ON position or after the vehicle is in the ready ( mode. If the front passenger seat is

) occupied, the OCS will then classify the front passenger after several more seconds.

1JBH3051

Even though your vehicle is equipped with the OCS, never install a child restraint in the front passenger’s seat.

An inflating air bag can forcefully strike a child or child restraint resulting in serious or fatal injury.

WARNING

•

NEVER place a rear-facing or front-facing child restraint in the front passenger’s seat of the vehicle.

•

An inflating frontal air bag could forcefully strike a child resulting in serious injury or death.

•

Always properly restrain children in an appropriate child restraint in the rear seat of the vehicle.

Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off in a Collision?

Air bags are not designed to inflate in every collision. There are certain types of accidents in which the air bag would not be expected to provide additional protection. These include rear impacts, second or third collisions in multiple impact accidents, as well as low speed impacts. Damage to the vehicle indicates a collision energy absorption, and is not an indicator of whether or not an air bag should have inflated.

Air bag collision sensors

WARNING

To reduce the risk of an air bag deploying unexpectedly and causing serious injury or death:

•

Do not hit or allow any objects to impact the locations where air bags or sensors are installed.

•

Do not perform maintenance on or around the air bag sensors. If the location or angle of the sensors is altered, the air bags may deploy when they should not or may not deploy when they should.

•

Do not install bumper guards or replace the bumper with a non-genuine HYUNDAI parts.

This may adversely affect the collision and air bag deployment performance.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

Place the POWER button in the OFF or ACC position when the vehicle is being towed to prevent inadvertent air bag deployment.

•

Have all air bag repairs conducted by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

2-63

2


1. SRS control module/Rollover sensor

2. Front impact sensor

3. Side pressure sensor

4. Side impact sensor

OAEE036005N/OAE036044/OAEE036006N/OAE036046/OAE036047

2-64

Air bag inflation conditions

OAE036048

Front air bags

Front air bags and the driver’s knee air bag are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the the severity of impact of the front collision.

OAE036050

Side and curtain air bags

Side and curtain air bags are designed to inflate when an impact is detected by side collision sensors depending on the severity of impact resulting from a side impact collision.

OAEE036007

Although the driver’s and front passenger’s air bags are designed to inflate only in frontal collisions, they also may inflate in other types of collisions if the front impact sensors detect a sufficient impact. Side and curtain air bags are designed to inflate only in side impact collisions or rollover situations, but they may inflate in other collisions if the side impact sensors detect a sufficient impact.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by bumps or objects on unimproved roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive carefully on unimproved roads or on surfaces not designed for vehicle traffic to prevent unintended air bag deployment.

2

2-65


Air bag non-inflation conditions

OAE036051

In certain low-speed collisions the air bags may not deploy. The air bags are designed not to deploy in such cases because they may not provide benefits beyond the protection of the seat belts.

OAE036052

Front air bags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, because occupants are moved backward by the force of the impact. In this case, inflated air bags would not provide any additional benefit.

OAEE036008

Front air bags may not inflate in side impact collisions, because occupants move in the direction of the collision, and thus in side impacts, front air bag deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.

However, side and curtain air bags may inflate depending on the severity of impact.

2-66

OAE036061

In an angled collision, the force of impact may direct the occupants in a direction where the air bags would not be able to provide any additional benefit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any air bags.

OAE036054

Just before impact, drivers often brake heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the front portion of the vehicle causing it to "ride" under a vehicle with a higher ground clearance. Air bags may not inflate in this "underride" situation because deceleration forces that are detected by sensors may be significantly reduced by such

"underride" collisions.

OAE036055

Front air bags may not inflate in rollover accidents because air bag deployment could not provide protection to the occupants.

However, side and curtain air bags may inflate when the vehicle is rolled over by a side impact collision.

2

2-67


OAEE036009L

Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of impact is concentrated and the collision energy is absorbed by the vehicle structure.

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenancefree and there are no parts you can safely service by yourself. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the POWER button is in the ON position, or continuously remains on, have your vehicle immediately inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such as removing, installing, repairing, or any work on the steering wheel, the front passenger's panel, front seats and roof rails must be performed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Improper handling of the SRS system may result in serious personal injury.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death, take the following precautions:

•

Do not attempt to modify or disconnect the SRS components or wiring, including the addition of any kind of badges to the pad covers or modifications to the body structure.

•

Do not place objects over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, or the front passenger’s panel above the glove box.

•

Clean the air bag pad covers with a soft cloth moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the air bag covers and proper deployment of the system.

•

Always have inflated air bags replaced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

2-68

(Continued)

•

If components of the air bag system must be discarded, or if the vehicle must be scrapped, certain safety precautions must be observed. Consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for the necessary information.

Failure to follow these precautions could increase the risk of personal injury.

Additional Safety Precautions

Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is

moving. A passenger who is not wearing a seat belt during a crash or emergency stop can be thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against other occupants, or be ejected from the vehicle.

Do not use any accessories on seat

belts. Devices claiming to improve occupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provided by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash

Do not modify the front seats.

Modification of the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components or side air bags.

Do not place items under the front

seats. Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring harnesses.

Do not cause impact to the doors.

Impact to the doors when the POWER button is in the ON position may cause the air bags to inflate.

Modifications to accommodate

disabilities. If you require modification to your vehicle to accommodate a disability, contact the HYUNDAI

Customer Connect Center at 800-

633-5151.

Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag equipped vehicle

If you modify your vehicle by changing your vehicle’s frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet metal or ride height, this may affect the operation of your vehicle’s air bag system.

2-69

2


Air Bag Warning Labels

OAD035053N

Air bag warning labels, required by the U.S. National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA), are attached to alert the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system. Be sure to read all of the information about the air bags that are installed on your vehicle in this

Owners Manual.

2-70

Convenient features of your vehicle

Accessing Your Vehicle .........................................3-3

Smart Key............................................................................3-3

Immobilizer System ...........................................................3-8

Door Locks..............................................................3-9

Operating Door Locks from Outside the Vehicle ......3-9

Operating Door Locks from Inside the Vehicle .......3-10

Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features...............................3-12

Child-Protector Rear Door locks ................................3-12

Theft-Alarm System............................................3-13

Driver Position Memory System........................3-14

Storing Positions into Memory ..................................3-14

Recalling positions from memory ...............................3-15

Easy Access Function ....................................................3-15

Steering Wheel .....................................................3-16

Electric Power Steering (EPS) .....................................3-16

Tilt Steering / Telescope Steering..............................3-16

Horn....................................................................................3-17

Heated Steering Wheel (for Canada).........................3-17

Mirrors...................................................................3-18

Inside Rearview Mirror ..................................................3-18

Side View Mirrors ...........................................................3-34

Reverse Parking Aid Function......................................3-37

Windows ................................................................3-38

Power Windows ...............................................................3-39

Sunroof..................................................................3-42

Sunroof Opening and Closing ......................................3-43

Sliding the Sunroof.........................................................3-43

Tilting the Sunroof .........................................................3-44

Sunshade ...........................................................................3-44

Resetting the Sunroof ...................................................3-45

Exterior Features.................................................3-46

Hood ...................................................................................3-46

Liftgate ..............................................................................3-48

Charging Door ..................................................................3-50

Instrument Cluster ...............................................3-51

Instrument Cluster Control............................................3-52

Gauges and Meters ........................................................3-52

Warning and Indicator lights ........................................3-58

LCD Display Messages ...................................................3-68

LCD Display ...........................................................3-80

LCD Display Control........................................................3-80

LCD Display Modes .........................................................3-81

Trip Computer .......................................................3-91

Light .......................................................................3-95

Exterior Lights .................................................................3-95

Interior Lights ................................................................3-103

Welcome System ...........................................................3-106

3

3

Wipers and Washers..........................................3-108

Windshield Wipers ........................................................3-108

Windshield Washers .....................................................3-109

Driver Assist System .........................................3-110

Rear View Monitor .......................................................3-110

Defroster.............................................................3-111

Rear Window Defroster ..............................................3-111

Automatic Climate Control System..................3-112

Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning.................3-113

Manual Heating and Air Conditioning......................3-114

System Operation .........................................................3-122

System Maintenance....................................................3-123

Windshield Defrosting and Defogging............3-125

To Defog Inside Windshield........................................3-125

To Defrost Outside Windshield..................................3-126

Defogging Logic ............................................................3-126

Auto Defogging System ..............................................3-126

Climate Control Additional Features ...............3-128

Automatic Ventilation...................................................3-128

Storage Compartment .......................................3-128

Center Console Storage ..............................................3-128

Glove Box ........................................................................3-129

Sunglass Holder.............................................................3-129

Multi Box.........................................................................3-130

Interior Features ................................................3-130

Cup Holder ......................................................................3-130

Sunvisor...........................................................................3-131

Power Outlet ..................................................................3-132

Wireless Cellular Phone Charging System..............3-133

Clock.................................................................................3-135

Clothes Hanger ..............................................................3-135

Floor Mat Anchor(s).....................................................3-136

Cargo Security Screen.................................................3-137

A CC ES SIIN

Smart Key

YO UR EH E

Locking

i

Information

The door handle button will only operate when the smart key is within

28~40 inches (0.7~1 m) from the outside door handle.

OAE046029

Your HYUNDAI uses a Smart Key, which you can use to lock or unlock a door (and liftgate) and even start the vehicle.

1. Door Lock

2. Door Unlock

3. Liftgate Unlock

4. Panic

OAE046001

To lock :

1. Close all doors, hood and liftgate.

2. Either press the door handle button or press the Door Lock button

(1) on the smart key.

3. The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound once. Also, the outer side view mirror will fold, if the side view mirror folding switch is in the AUTO position (if equipped).

4. Make sure the doors are locked by checking the position of the door lock button inside the vehicle.

Even though you press the outside door handle button, the doors will not lock and the chime will sound for three seconds if any of the following occur:

• The Smart Key is in the vehicle.

• The POWER button is in ACC or

ON position.

• Any door except the liftgate is open.

WARNING

Do not leave the Smart Key in your vehicle with unsupervised children. Unattended children could press the POWER button and may operate power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious injury or death.

3

3-3


Unlocking

OAE046001

To unlock:

1. Carry the Smart Key.

2. Either press the driver's outside door handle button or press the

Door Unlock button (2) on the smart key.

3. The driver's door will unlock. The hazard warning lights will blink two times. Also, the outer side view mirror will unfold, if the side view mirror folding switch is in the

AUTO position (if equipped).

If you press the driver's outside door handle button or Door Unlock button on the smart key again within four seconds, then all the doors will unlock.

Two press unlock setting:

Two press unlock setting can be changed according to owner's preference.

Select or deselect the 'Two Press

Unlock' menu in the User Settings mode on the LCD display (User

Settings

➞

Door and select or deselect Two Press Unlock).

i

Information

• The door handle button will only operate when the smart key is within 28~40 inches (0.7~1 m) from the outside door handle and other people can also open the doors.

• If you press the front passenger's outside door handle, while carrying the Smart Key, all doors will unlock.

• After unlocking the doors, the doors will lock automatically after 30 seconds unless a door is opened.

• Either the driver or front passenger door can be opened with the door handle button when the smart key is within this range.

3-4

Liftgate unlocking

To open:

1. Carry the smart key.

2. Either press the liftgate handle button or press and hold the

Liftgate Unlock button (3) on the smart key for more than one second.

3. The hazard warning lights will blink two times.

Once the liftgate is opened and then closed, the liftgate will lock automatically.

i

Information

The liftgate handle button will only operate when the smart key is within 28 inches (0.7 m) from the liftgate handle.

Panic button

Press and hold the Panic button (4) for more than one second. The horn sounds and hazard warning lights blink for about 30 seconds. To cancel the panic mode, press any button on the Smart Key.

Start-up

You can start the vehicle without inserting the key.

For more information, refer to the

"Power Button" section in chapter

5.

NOTICE

To prevent damaging the smart key:

• Keep the smart key away from any liquid or fire. Internal circuits may malfunction if the inside of the smart key gets damp (from liquids or moisture) or if it is heated. This can exclude the smart key from warranty coverage.

• Avoid dropping or throwing the smart key.

• Protect the smart key from extreme temperatures.

NOTICE

Always have the smart key with you when leaving the vehicle. If the smart key is left near the vehicle, the vehicle battery may be discharged.

3-5

3


Mechanical key

OAEE046001

If the Smart Key does not operate normally, you can lock or unlock the door by using the mechanical key.

Press and hold the release button (1) and remove the mechanical key (2).

Insert the mechanical key into the key hole on the door.

To reinstall the mechanical key, put the key into the hole and push it until a click sound is heard.

Loss of a smart key

A maximum of two Smart Keys can be registered to a single vehicle. If you happen to lose your smart key, you should immediately take the vehicle and remaining keys to your authorized HYUNDAI dealer or tow the vehicle, if necessary.

If the smart key is in close proximity to your mobile phone, the signal could be blocked by your mobile phones normal operational signals.

This is especially important when the phone is active such as making and receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails.

Avoid placing the smart key and your mobile phone in the same pants or jacket pocket and always try to maintain an adequate distance between the two devices.

Smart key precautions

The smart key will not work if any of the following occur:

• The smart key is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter.

• The smart key is near a mobile two way radio system or a cellular phone.

• Another vehicle's smart key is being operated close to your vehicle.

When the smart key does not work correctly, open and close the door with the mechanical key. If you have a problem with the smart key, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

Keep the smart key away from electromagnetic materials that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.

3-6

i

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

3. modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user

' s authority to operate the device.

Battery replacement

OLF044008

If the Smart Key is not working properly, try replacing the battery with a new one.

Battery Type: CR2032

To replace the battery:

1. Pry open the rear cover of the smart key.

2. Remove the old battery and insert the new battery.

3. Reinstall the rear cover of the smart key.

If you suspect your smart key might have sustained some damage, or you feel your smart key is not working correctly, contact an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

i

Information

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose of the battery according to your local law(s) and regulation(s).

3

3-7


Immobilizer System

(if equipped)

The immobilizer system helps protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded key (or other device) is used, the power system is disabled.

When the POWER button is placed in the ON position, the immobilizer system indicator should come on briefly, then go off. If the indicator starts to blink, the system does not recognize the coding of the key.

Place the POWER button to the OFF position, then place the POWER button to the ON position again.

The system may not recognize your key’s coding if another immobilizer key or other metal object (i.e., key chain) is near the key. The vehicle may not start because the metal may interrupt the transponder signal from transmitting normally.

If the system repeatedly does not recognize the coding of the key, it is recommended that you contact your

HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems could result that may make your vehicle inoperable.

WARNING

In order to prevent theft of your vehicle, do not leave spare keys anywhere in your vehicle. Your immobilizer password is a customer unique password and should be kept confidential.

NOTICE

The transponder in your key is an important part of the immobilizer system. It is designed to give years of trouble-free service, however you should avoid exposure to moisture, static electricity and rough handling. Immobilizer system malfunction could occur.

i

Information





3. modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user

’ s authority to operate the device.

3-8

D OO R L CK S

Operating Door Locks from

Outside the Vehicle

Mechanical key

U n ll ll o c k

L o c k

If you lock the driver’s door with a mechanical key, all vehicle doors will lock. If you unlock the driver’s door with a mechanical key, the driver's door will unlock and the passenger doors will unlock according to the current two press unlock setting.

Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle.

When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure that doors are closed securely.

Smart key

OAEE046188N

To remove the cover:

1. Pull out the door handle (1).

2. Press the lock (2) located inside the bottom part of the cover with a key or flat-head screwdriver.

3. Push out the cover while pressing the lock.

To install the cover:

1. Pull out the door handle.

2. Install the cover.

Door

Unlock

Door

Lock

OAE046001

OLF044003

Press the button on the driver’s outside door handle while carrying the

Smart Key with you or press the Door

Unlock button on the Smart Key, the driver’s door will unlock. If you press the button on the front passenger’s outside door, all doors will unlock.

3-9

3


Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle.

When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure that doors are closed securely.

Operating Door Locks from

Inside the Vehicle

With the door lock button

i

Information

• In cold and wet climates, door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components.

• Two press unlock setting can be changed with the smart key or in the

User Settings mode on the cluster.

• If the inner door handle of the driver's (or front passenger's) door is pulled when the door lock button is in the lock position, the button is unlocked and door opens.

• Doors cannot be locked if the smart key is in the vehicle and any door is open.

L o c k

U n ll ll o c k

OAE046004

• To unlock a door, pull the door lock button (1) to the "Unlock" position.

The red mark (2) on the door lock button will be visible.

• To lock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the "Lock" position. If the door is locked properly, the red mark (2) on the door lock button will not be visible.

• To open a door, pull the door handle (3) outward.

i

Information

If a power door lock ever fails to function while you are in the vehicle try one or more of the following techniques to exit:

• Operate the door unlock feature repeatedly (both electronic and manual) while simultaneously pulling on the door handle.

• Operate the other door locks and handles, front and rear.

• Lower a front window and use the mechanical key to unlock the door from outside.

3-10

With the central door lock switch

■

Driver’s door

■

Passenger’s door

WARNING

•

The doors should always be fully closed and locked while the vehicle is in motion. If the doors are unlocked, the risk of being thrown from the vehicle in a crash is increased.

•

Do not pull the inner door handle of driver's or passenger's door while the vehicle is moving.

OAE046005/OAEE046509N

When pressing the ( ) switch (1), all vehicle doors will lock.

When pressing the ( ) switch (2), all vehicle doors will unlock.

If the smart key is in the vehicle and any door is opened, the doors will not lock even though the lock button

(1) of the central door lock switch is pressed.

WARNING

Do not leave children or animals unattended in your vehicle. An enclosed vehicle can become extremely hot, causing death or serious injury to unattended children or animals who cannot escape the vehicle. Children might operate features of the vehicle that could injure them, or they could encounter other harm, possibly from someone gaining entry to the vehicle.

WARNING

Always secure your vehicle.

Leaving your vehicle unlocked increases the potential risk to you or others from someone hiding in your vehicle.

To secure your vehicle, while depressing the brake, shift to the P (Park) position, engage the parking brake, and place the

POWER button in the OFF position, close all windows, lock all doors, and always take the key with you.

3

WARNING

If you stay in the vehicle for a long time while the weather is very hot or cold, there are risks of injuries or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from the outside when someone is in the vehicle.

3-11


CAUTION

Opening a door when something is approaching may cause damage or injury. Be careful when opening doors and watch for vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles or pedestrians approaching the vehicle in the path of the door.

Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features

Impact sensing door unlock

All doors will be automatically unlocked when an impact causes the air bags to deploy.

Child-Protector Rear Door locks

Speed sensing door lock

All doors will be automatically locked

(when set on cluster) when vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h).

All of the doors will be automatically unlocked after the vehicle is turned off.

Shift lever auto door lock

All doors will be automatically locked when shifted out of P (Park) with the vehicle in the ready ( ) mode.

You can activate or deactivate the

Auto Door Lock/Unlock features from the User Settings mode on the LCD display.


"LCD Display" section in this chapter.

OAEE046002N

The child safety lock is provided to help prevent children seated in the rear from accidentally opening the rear doors. The rear door safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock is located on the edge of each rear door. When the child safety lock is in the lock position, the rear door will not open if the inner door handle is pulled.

3-12

To lock the child safety lock, insert a key (or screw driver) (1) into the hole and turn it to the lock position.

To allow a rear door to be opened from inside the vehicle, unlock the child safety lock.

WARNING

If children accidently open the rear doors while the vehicle is in motion, they could fall out of the vehicle. The rear door safety locks should always be used whenever children are in the vehicle.

T HE TLA SY ST M

This system helps to protect your vehicle and valuables. The horn will sound and the hazard warning lights will blink continuously if any of the following occurs:

- A door is opened without using the smart key.

- The liftgate is opened without using the smart key.

- The hood is opened.

The alarm continues for 30 seconds, then the system resets. To turn off the alarm, unlock the doors with the smart key.

The Theft Alarm System automatically sets 30 seconds after you lock the doors and the liftgate. For the system to activate, you must lock the doors and the liftgate from outside the vehicle with the smart key or by pressing the button on the outside of the door handles with the smart key in your possession.

The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound once to indicate the system is armed.

Once the security system is set, opening any door, the liftgate, or the hood without using the smart key will cause the alarm to activate.

The Theft Alarm System will not set if the hood, the liftgate, or any door is not fully closed. If the system will not set, check the hood, the liftgate, or the doors are fully closed.

Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it.

i

Information

• Do not lock the doors until all passengers have left the vehicle. If the remaining passenger leaves the vehicle when the system is armed, the alarm will be activated.

• If the vehicle is not disarmed with the smart key, open the doors by using the mechanical key and start the vehicle ( indicator ON) by directly pressing the POWER button with the smart key.

• When the system is disarmed but a door or liftgate is not opened within

30 seconds, the system will be rearmed.

3

3-13


D RIIV R P SIIT N M MO Y S ST F E QU PE

WARNING

Never attempt to operate the driver position memory system while the vehicle is moving.

This could result in loss of control, and an accident causing death, serious injury, or property damage.

OAE046036L

The Driver Position Memory System is provided to store and recall the following memory settings with a simple button operation.

- Driver’s seat position

- Side view mirror position

- Instrument panel illumination intensity

If the battery is disconnected, the position memory will be lost and the driving positions must be stored in the system again.

If the Driver Position Memory System does not operate normally, have the system checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Storing Positions into Memory

1. Shift to P (Park) while the POWER button is in the ON position.

2. Adjust the driver's seat position, side view mirror position and instrument panel illumination intensity to positions comfortable for the driver.

3. Press the SET button. The system will beep once and notify you

"Press button to save settings" on the LCD display.

4. Press one of the memory buttons

(1 or 2) within 4 seconds. The system will beep twice when the memory has been successfully stored.

5. "Driver 1 (or 2) settings saved" will appear on the LCD display.

3-14

Recalling positions from memory

1. Shift to P (Park) while the POWER button is in the ON position.

2. Press the desired memory button

(1 or 2). The system will beep once, and then the driver’s seat position, side view mirror position and instrument panel illumination intensity will automatically adjust to the stored positions.

3. "Driver 1(or 2) settings is applied" will appear on the LCD display.

NOTICE

• While recalling the "1" memory position, pressing the SET or 1 button temporarily stops the adjustment of the recalled memory position. Pressing the 2 button recalls the "2" memory position.

• While recalling the "2" memory position, pressing the SET or 2 button temporarily stops the adjustment of the recalled memory position. Pressing the 1 button recalls the "1" memory position.

• While recalling the stored positions, pressing one of the control buttons for the driver’s seat, side view mirror or instrument panel illumination will cause the movement of that component to stop and move in the direction that the control button is pressed.

Easy Access Function

When exiting the vehicle the driver’s seat will move rearward when the vehicle is turned off, and the gear in

P (Park).

When entering the vehicle the driver's seat will move forward when the smart key is detected with the

POWER button in the ACC/ON/

START position.


Easy Access Function from the User

Settings mode on the LCD display.



3

3-15


S TE RIIN WH EE

Electric Power Steering (EPS)

The system assists you with steering the vehicle. If the vehicle is turned off or if the power steering system becomes inoperative, you may still steer the vehicle, but it will require increased steering effort.

Should you notice any change in the effort required to steer during normal vehicle operation, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

If the Electric Power Steering

System does not operate normally, the warning light ( ) will illuminate on the instrument cluster. You may steer the vehicle, but it will require increased steering efforts. Take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked as soon as possible.

3-16

i

Information

The following symptoms may occur during normal vehicle operation:

• The steering effort may be high immediately after placing the

POWER button in the ON position.

This happens as the system performs the EPS system diagnostics. When the diagnostics is completed, the steering wheel will return to its normal condition.

• A click noise may be heard from the

EPS relay after the POWER button is in the ON or OFF position.

• Motor noise may be heard when the vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving speed.

• When you operate the steering wheel in low temperature, abnormal noise may occur. If temperature rises, the noise will disappear. This is a normal condition.

• When an error is detected from the

EPS, the assistant function of steering effort will not be activated in order to prevent fatal accidents.

Instrument cluster warning lights may be on or the steering effort may be high. When the following symptoms occur, immediately drive the vehicle to a safe area and check it.

Tilt Steering / Telescope Steering

Adjust the steering wheel so it points toward your chest, not toward your face. Make sure you can see the instrument cluster warning lights and gauges. After adjusting, push the steering wheel both up and down to be certain it is locked in position.

Always adjust the position of the steering wheel before driving.

WARNING

NEVER adjust the steering wheel while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Horn Heated Steering Wheel

(for Canada, if equipped)

OAEE046014

To change the steering wheel angle and height:

1. Pull down the lock-release lever (1).

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired angle (2) and height (3).

3. Pull up the lock-release lever to lock the steering wheel in place.

i

Information

After adjustment, sometimes the lock release lever may not lock the steering wheel. It is not a malfunction. This occurs when two gears are not engaged correctly. In this case, adjust the steering wheel again and then lock the steering wheel.

OAE046009

To sound the horn, press the area indicated by the horn symbol on your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn will operate only when this area is pressed.

NOTICE

Do not strike the horn severely to operate it, or hit it with your fist.

Do not press on the horn with a sharp-pointed object.

OAEE046003N

When the POWER button is in the

ON position or when the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode, press the heated steering wheel button to warm the steering wheel. The indicator on the button will illuminate.

To turn the heated steering wheel off, press the button again. The indicator on the button will turn off.

The heated steering wheel will automatically turn off after approximately

30 minutes.

3-17

3


NOTICE

Do not install any cover or accessory on the steering wheel. The cover or accessory could cause damage to the heated steering wheel system.

MIIR RO S

Inside Rearview Mirror

Before you start driving, adjust the rearview mirror to the center on the view through the rear window.

WARNING

Make sure your line of sight is not obstructed. Do not place objects in the rear seat, cargo area, or behind the rear headrests which could interfere with your vision through the rear window.

WARNING

NEVER adjust the mirror while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

NOTICE

When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.

WARNING

To prevent serious injury during an accident or deployment of the air bag, do not modify the rearview mirror and do not install a wide mirror.

3-18

Day/night rearview mirror

(if equipped)

Night

Blue Link

®

center (if equipped)

Day

OAE046010

Make this adjustment before you start driving and while the day/night lever is in the day position.

Pull the day/night lever toward you to reduce glare from the headlights of the vehicles behind you during night driving.

Remember that you lose some rearview clarity in the night position.

OAD045011N

For details, refer to the Blue Link ®

Owner’s Guide, Navigation Manual or Audio Manual.

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with HomeLink

®

system, compass and Blue Link

®

(for U.S.A)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a

Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror with a Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass

Display and an Integrated HomeLink ®

Wireless Control System. During nighttime driving, this feature will automatically detect and reduce rearview mirror glare while the compass indicates the direction the vehicle is pointed. The HomeLink ®

Universal Transceiver allows you to activate your garage door(s), electric gate, home lighting, etc.

3

3-19


OAD045045N

(1) Telematics button



(4) Compass control button &

Dimming ON/OFF button

(5) Status indicator LED

(6) Channel 1 button



(9) Compass display

(10) Rear light sensor

Automatic-Dimming Night Vision

Safety™ (NVS

®

) Mirror

(if equipped)

The NVS ® Mirror automatically reduces glare by monitoring light levels in the front and the rear of the vehicle. Any object that obstructs either light sensor will degrade the automatic dimming control feature.

For more information regarding

NVS

® mirrors and other applications, please refer to the Gentex website: www.gentex.com

Your mirror will automatically dim upon detecting glare from the vehicles traveling behind you. The autodimming function can be controlled by pressing the Dimming ON/OFF button:

1. Pressing and holding the button for 3 seconds turns the auto-dimming function OFF which is indicated by the green Status

Indicator LED turning off.

2. Pressing and holding the button for 3 seconds again turns the autodimming function ON which is indicated by the green Status Indicator

LED turning on.

The mirror defaults to the ON position each time the vehicle is started.

Z-Nav™ Compass Display

The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is also equipped with a Z-Nav™

Compass that shows the vehicle

Compass heading in the Display

Window using the 8 basic cardinal headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).

3-20

Compass function

The Compass can be turned ON and

OFF and will remember the last state when the vehicle is cycled. To turn the display feature ON/OFF:

1. Press and release the button within 1 second to turn the display feature OFF.

2. Press and release the button again within 1 second to turn the display back ON.

Additional options can be set with press and hold sequences of the button and are detailed below.

There is a difference between magnetic north and true north. To compensate for this difference you will need to adjust the Zone setting based on where you live.

B520C05NF

3-21

3


To adjust the Zone setting:

1. Determine the desired Zone

Number based upon your current location on the Zone Map.

2. Press and hold the button for 6 seconds, the current Zone

Number will appear on the display.

3. Pressing and holding the button again will cause the numbers to increment (Note: they will repeat

…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing the button when the desired Zone

Number appears on the display will set the new Zone.

4. Within about 5 seconds the compass will start displaying a compass heading again.

If you need to recalibrate the compass:

1. Press and hold the button for more than 9 seconds. When the compass memory is cleared a "C" will appear in the display.

2. Drive the vehicle in 2 complete circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

There are some conditions that can cause changes to the vehicle magnets, such as installing a ski rack or a CB antenna. Body repair work on the vehicle can also cause changes to the vehicle’s magnetic field. In these situations, the compass will need to be re-calibrated to quickly correct these changes.

Integrated HomeLink

®

Wireless

Control System

The HomeLink ® Wireless Control

System can replace up to three hand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitters with a single built-in device. This innovative feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most current transmitters to operate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, even home lighting. Both standard and rolling code-equipped transmitters can be programmed by following the outlined procedures.

Additional HomeLink ® information can be found at: www.homelink.com

or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

Retain the original transmitter of the

RF device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink

® programming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed

HomeLink ® buttons be erased for security purposes.

3-22

WARNING

Before programming HomeLink ® to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. Do not use the

HomeLink ® with any garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse features required by

U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April

1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.

Programming HomeLink

®

Please note the following:

• When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to park the vehicle outside of the garage.

• It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink ® for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

• Some vehicles may require the

POWER button to be placed in the

ACC (or "Accessories") position for programming and/or operation of

HomeLink

®

.

• In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions after following the programming steps listed below, contact

HomeLink

® at: www.homelink.com

or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

Programming

Flashing

ODH044413N

To train most devices, follow these instructions:

1. For first-time programming, press and hold the two outside buttons

(

,

), HomeLink

®

Channel 1 and Channel 3, until the indicator light begins to flash (after 10 seconds). Release both buttons. Do not hold the buttons for longer than 20 seconds.

3

3-23


Flashing

ODH044414N

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm) away from the HomeLink ® button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink ® and handheld transmitter buttons until the

HomeLink

® indicator light changes from a slow to a rapid blinking light. Now you may release both the HomeLink ® and hand-held transmitter buttons.

i

Information

Some devices may require you to replace this Programming step 3 with procedures noted in the "Gate

Operator/Canadian Programming" chapter. If the HomeLink

® indicator light does not change to a rapidly blinking light after performing these steps, contact HomeLink

® at www.homelink.com.

4. Press and hold for 5 seconds and release the programmed HomeLink ® button up to two separate times to activate the door. If the door does not activate, press and hold the justtrained HomeLink ® button and observe the indicator light.

• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink ® button is pressed and released.

• If the indicator light blinks rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light, continue with

"Programming" steps 5-7 to complete the programming of a rolling code equipped device (most commonly a garage door opener).

5. At the garage door opener receiver

(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the "learn" or "smart" button.

This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit.

3-24

6. Firmly press and release the

"learn" or "smart" button. (The name and color of the button vary by manufacturer). There are 30 seconds to initiate step 7.

7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for 2 seconds and release the programmed

HomeLink ® button. Repeat the

"press/hold/release" sequence a second time, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming process.

Gate operator & Canadian programming

During programming, your handheld transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press the

Integrated HomeLink

®

Wireless

Control System button (note steps 2 through 3 in the Programming portion of this document) while you press and re-press ("cycle") your handheld transmitter every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training.

Reprogramming a single HomeLink button

®

To program a device to HomeLink

® using a HomeLink ® button previously trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired

HomeLink ® button.

DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the HomeLink ® button, proceed with "Programming" step

2.

HomeLink ® should now activate your rolling code equipped device.

Operating HomeLink ®

To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink ® button.

Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

For questions or comments, contact

HomeLink ® at www.homelink.com or

1-800-355-3515.

3

3-25


Erasing HomeLink

® buttons

Individual buttons cannot be erased.

However, to erase all three programmed buttons:

1. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink ® buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 10 seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.

The Integrated HomeLink ® Wireless

Control System is now in the training

(learn) mode and can be programmed at any time following the appropriate steps in the

Programming chapters above.

NVS ® is a registered trademark and

Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex

Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan.

HomeLink ® is a registered trademark owned by Johnson Controls,

Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.

FCC ID: NZLTLMHL4

IC: 4112A-TLMHL4

i

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.




3. The transceiver has been tested and complies with FCC and Industry

Canada rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user

' s authority to operate the device.

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with compass and HomeLink

®

system (for Canada)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a

Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror with a Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass

Display and an Integrated HomeLink ®

Wireless Control System.

During nighttime driving, this feature will automatically detect and reduce rearview mirror glare while the compass indicates the direction the vehicle is pointed. The HomeLink ®

Universal Transceiver allows you to activate your garage door(s), electric gate, home lighting, etc.

3-26

OAD045046N



(3) Status indicator LED


(5) Rear light sensor

(6) Dimming ON/OFF button

(7) Compass control button

(8) Compass display

Automatic-Dimming Night Vision

Safety™ (NVS

®

) Mirror

(if equipped)

The NVS ® Mirror automatically reduces glare by monitoring light levels in the front and the rear of the vehicle. Any object that obstructs either light sensor will degrade the automatic dimming control feature.

For more information regarding

NVS

® mirrors and other applications, please refer to the Gentex website: www.gentex.com

The auto-dimming function can be controlled by pressing the ON/OFF button:

1. Pressing the button turns the autodimming function OFF which is indicated by the green Status

Indicator LED turning off.

2. Pressing the button again turns the auto-dimming function ON which is indicated by the green

Status Indicator LED turning on.

The mirror defaults to the ON position each time the vehicle is started.

Z-Nav™ Compass Display

The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is also equipped with a Z-Nav™

Compass that shows the vehicle

Compass heading in the Display

Window using the 8 basic cardinal headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).

3

3-27


Compass function

The Compass can be turned ON and

OFF and will remember the last state when the vehicle is cycled. To turn the display feature ON/OFF:

1. Press and release the button to turn the display feature OFF.

2. Press and release the button again to turn the display back ON.

Additional options can be set with press and hold sequences of the button and are detailed below.

There is a difference between magnetic north and true north. To compensate for this difference you will need to adjust the Zone setting based on where you live.

3-28

B520C05NF

To adjust the Zone setting:

1. Determine the desired Zone

Number based upon your current location on the Zone Map.

2. Press and hold the button for more than 3 but less than 6 seconds, the current Zone Number will appear on the display.

3. Pressing and holding the button again will cause the numbers to increment (Note: they will repeat

…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing the button when the desired Zone

Number appears on the display will set the new Zone.

4. Within about 5 seconds the compass will start displaying a compass heading again.

There are some conditions that can cause changes to the vehicle magnets, such as installing a ski rack or a CB antenna. Body repair work on the vehicle can also cause changes to the vehicle’s magnetic field. In these situations, the compass will need to be re-calibrated to quickly correct these changes.

If you need to recalibrate the compass:

1. Press and hold the button for more than 6 seconds. When the compass memory is cleared a "C" will appear in the display.

2. Drive the vehicle in 2 complete circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

3

3-29


Integrated HomeLink

®

Wireless

Control System

The HomeLink ® Wireless Control

System can replace up to three handheld radio-frequency (RF) transmitters with a single built-in device. This innovative feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most current transmitters to operate devices such as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, even home lighting. Both standard and rolling code-equipped transmitters can be programmed by following the outlined procedures.

Additional HomeLink ® information can be found at: www.homelink.com

or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

Retain the original transmitter of the

RF device you are programming for use in other vehicles as well as for future HomeLink ® programming. It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed

HomeLink ® buttons be erased for security purposes.

WARNING

Before programming HomeLink ® to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure people and objects are out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage. Do not use the

HomeLink ® with any garage door opener that lacks the safety stop and reverse features required by

U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April

1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object - signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener without these features increases the risk of serious injury or death.

Programming HomeLink

®

Please note the following:

• When programming a garage door opener, it is advised to park the vehicle outside of the garage.

• It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink ® for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.

• Some vehicles may require the

POWER button to be placed in the

ACC (or "Accessories") position for programming and/or operation of

HomeLink

®

.

• In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions after following the programming steps listed below, contact

HomeLink

® at: www.homelink.com

or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

3-30

Rolling code programming

Rolling code devices which are

"code-protected" and manufactured after 1996 may be determined by the following:

• Reference the device owner's manual for verification.

• The handheld transmitter appears to program the HomeLink ® Universal

Transceiver but does not activate the device.

• Press and hold the trained

HomeLink button. The device has the rolling code feature if the indicator light flashes rapidly and then turns solid after 2 seconds.

To train rolling code devices, follow these instructions:

1. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the "learn" or "smart" button. This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit.

Exact location and color of the button may vary by garage door opener brand. If there is difficulty locating the training button, reference the device owner’s manual or please visit our Web site at www.homelink.com.

2. Firmly press and release the

"learn" or "smart" button (which activates the "training light"). You will have 30 seconds to initiate step 3.

3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and then release the desired

HomeLink

® button. Repeat the

"press/hold/release" sequence a second time to complete the programming. (Some devices may require you to repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming.)

4. Press and hold the just-trained

HomeLink ® button and observe the red Status Indicator LED. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate.

5. To program the remaining two

HomeLink ® buttons, follow either steps 1 through 4 above for other

Rolling Code devices or steps 2 through 5 in Standard Programming for standard devices.

3-31

3


Standard programming

To train most devices, follow these instructions:

1. For first-time programming, press and hold the two outside buttons,

HomeLink ® Channel 1 and

Channel 3 Buttons, until the indicator light begins to flash (after 20 seconds). Release both buttons.

Do not hold the buttons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm) away from the HomeLink ® buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink ® and handheld transmitter button. DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has been completed.

4. While continuing to hold the buttons the red Indicator Status LED will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink ® successfully trains to the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons.


HomeLink ® button and observe the red Status Indicator LED. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink

® button is pressed and released.

6. To program the remaining two

HomeLink ® buttons, follow steps 2 through 5.

Gate operator & Canadian programming

During programming, your handheld transmitter may automatically stop transmitting. Continue to press the

Integrated HomeLink

®

Wireless

Control System button (note steps 2 through 4 in the Standard

Programming portion of this document) while you press and re-press

("cycle") your handheld transmitter every two seconds until the frequency signal has been learned. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after several seconds upon successful training.

Operating HomeLink

®

To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink ® button.

Activation will now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time.

3-32

Reprogramming a single

HomeLink

® button

To program a new device to a previously trained HomeLink ® button, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired

HomeLink

® button.

Do NOT release until step 4 has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after 20 seconds), position the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 inches away from the

HomeLink ® surface.

3. Press and hold the handheld transmitter button. The HomeLink ® indicator light will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.

4. When the indicator light begins to flash rapidly, release both buttons.


HomeLink ® button and observe the red Status Indicator LED. If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and your new device should activate.

Erasing HomeLink

® buttons

Individual buttons cannot be erased.

However, to erase all three programmed buttons:

1. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink ® buttons until the indicator light begins to flash-after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than 30 seconds.

The Integrated HomeLink ® Wireless

Control System is now in the training

(learn) mode and can be programmed at any time following the appropriate steps in the Programming chapters above.

NVS ® is a registered trademark and

Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex

Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan.

HomeLink ® is a registered trademark owned by Johnson Controls,

Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.

FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3

IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3

i

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.




3. The transceiver has been tested and complies with FCC and Industry

Canada rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user

’ s authority to operate the device.

3

3-33


Side View Mirrors

Use your interior side view mirror or direct observation to determine the actual distance of following vehicles when changing lanes.

Blind spot mirror

WARNING

Do not adjust or fold the side view mirrors while driving. This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

OLF044477N

OAE046013

Be sure to adjust mirror angles before driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both left-hand and right-hand side view mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted remotely with the remote switch. The mirror heads can be folded to prevent damage during an automatic car wash or when passing through a narrow street.

The right side view mirror is convex.

Objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.

NOTICE

• Do not scrape ice off the mirror face; this may damage the surface of the glass.

• If the mirror is jammed with ice, do not adjust the mirror by force. Use an approved spray de-icer (not radiator antifreeze) spray, or a sponge or soft cloth with very warm water, or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.

OLF044478N

The Blind Spot Mirror (BSM) is a supplemental mirror that reduces the driver’s blind spot by showing the rear side area of the vehicle. The blind spot mirror is equipped on the left-hand side view mirror.

3-34

Side view mirror control

WARNING

•

Always check the road condition while driving for unexpected situations even though the vehicle is equipped with a blind spot mirror.

•

The blind spot mirror is a device made for convenience.

Do not solely rely on the mirror but always pay attention to traffic around you.

NOTICE

Do not clean the mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products.

OAE046014

Adjusting the side mirrors:

1. Press either the L (driver's side) or

R (passenger's side) button (1) to select the side view mirror you would like to adjust.

2. Use the mirror adjustment control switch to position the selected mirror up, down, left or right.

3. After adjustment, put the button into neutral (center) position to prevent inadvertent adjustment.

NOTICE

• The mirrors stop moving when they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate while the switch is pressed. Do not press the switch longer than necessary, the motor may be damaged.

• Do not attempt to adjust the side view mirrors by hand or the motor may be damaged.

3

3-35


Folding the side view mirrors

NOTICE

The electric type outside rearview mirror operates even though the

POWER button is in the OFF position. However, to prevent unnecessary battery discharge, do not adjust the mirrors longer than necessary while the vehicle is not in the ready ( ) mode.

OAE046015

Manual type (if equipped)

To fold the side view mirrors, grasp the housing of the mirror and then fold it toward the rear of the vehicle.

OAE046016

Electric type (if equipped)

Left : The mirror will unfold.

Right : The mirror will fold.

Center (AUTO) : The mirror will fold or unfold automatically as follows:

- The mirror will fold or unfold when the door is locked or unlocked by the smart key.

- The mirror will fold or unfold when the door is locked or unlocked by the button on the outside door handle.

NOTICE

Do not fold the electric type side view mirror by hand. It could cause motor failure.

3-36

Reverse Parking Aid Function

(if equipped)

The side view mirrors will automatically revert to their original positions if any of the following occur:

• The POWER button is placed to either the OFF position or the ACC position.

• The vehicle is shifted to any position except R (Reverse).

• The remote control side view mirror switch is not selected.

OAEE046512N

When you shift the vehicle to R

(Reverse) position, the side view mirror(s) will rotate downwards to aid with driving in reverse. The position of the side view mirror switch (1) determines whether or not the mirrors will move:

Left/Right : When either the L (Left) or

R (Right) switch is selected, both side view mirrors will move.

Neutral : When neither switch is selected, the side view mirrors will not move.

3-37

3


WIIN DO S

OAEE046508N

(1) Driver’s door power window switch

(2) Front passenger’s door power window switch

(3) Rear door (left) power window switch

(4) Rear door (right) power window switch

(5) Window opening and closing

(6) Automatic power window

(7) Power window lock switch

3-38

Power Windows

The POWER button must be in the

ON position to be able to raise or lower the windows. Each door has a

Power Window switch to control that door’s window. The driver has a

Power Window Lock switch which can block the operation of passenger windows. The power windows will operate for approximately 30 seconds after the POWER button is placed in the ACC or OFF position.

However, if the front doors are opened, the Power Windows cannot be operated even within the 30 second period.

i

Information

• In cold and wet climates, power windows may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

• While driving with the rear windows down or with the sunroof (if equipped) opened (or partially opened), your vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffeting or pulsation noise. This noise is normal and can be reduced or eliminated by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with one or both of the rear windows down, partially lower both front windows approximately 1 inch

(2.5 cm). If you experience the noise with the sunroof open, slightly close the sunroof.

Window opening and closing

OAE046020

To open:

Press the window switch down to the first detent position (5). Release the switch when you want the window to stop.

WARNING

To avoid serious injury or death, do not extend your head, arms or body outside the windows while driving.

To close:

Pull the window switch up to the first detent position (5). Release the window switch when you want the window to stop.

3

3-39


Auto up/down window

(if equipped)

Pressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers or lifts the window even when the switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position while the window is in operation, pull up or press down and release the switch.

To reset the power windows

If the power windows do not operate normally, the automatic power window system must be reset as follows:

1. Place the POWER button to the

ON position.

2. Close the window and continue pulling up on the power window switch for at least one second.

If the power windows do not operate properly after resetting, have the system checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Automatic reverse (if equipped)

WARNING

The automatic reverse feature doesn't activate while resetting the power window system.

Make sure body parts or other objects are safely out of the way before closing the windows to avoid injuries or vehicle damage.

OLF044032

If a window senses any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will stop and lower approximately 12 inches (30 cm) to allow the object to be cleared.

If the window detects the resistance while the power window switch is pulled up continuously, the window will stop upward movement then lower approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm).

If the power window switch is pulled up continuously again within 5 seconds after the window is lowered by the automatic window reverse feature, the automatic window reverse will not operate.

3-40

i

Information

The automatic reverse feature is only active when the "Auto Up" feature is used by fully pulling up the switch to the second detent.

WARNING

Make sure body parts or other objects are safely out of the way before closing the windows to avoid injuries or vehicle damage.

Objects less than 0.16 inch (4 mm) in diameter caught between the window glass and the upper window channel may not be detected by the automatic reverse window and the window will not stop and reverse direction.

NOTICE

Do not install any accessories on the windows.

The automatic reverse feature may not operate.

Power window lock switch

OAE046021

The driver can disable the power window switches on the rear passenger's doors by pressing the power window lock switch.

When the power window lock switch is pressed:

• The driver's master control can operate all the power windows.

• The front passenger's control can operate the front passenger's power window.

• The rear passenger's control cannot operate the rear passenger's power window.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the power windows. Keep the driver's door power window lock switch in the LOCK position. Serious injury or death can result from unintentional window operation by a child.

NOTICE

• To prevent possible damage to the power window system, do not open or close two windows or more at the same time. This will also ensure the longevity of the fuse.

• Never try to operate the main switch on the driver's door and the individual door window switch in opposite directions at the same time. If this is done, the window will stop and cannot be opened or closed.

3

3-41


S UN OO F E QU PE

OAD045022

If your vehicle is equipped with a sunroof, you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the sunroof control switch located on the overhead console.

The sunroof can be opened, closed, or tilted when the POWER button is in the ON position.

The sunroof can be operated for approximately 30 seconds after the

POWER button is in the ACC or OFF position.

However, if the front door is opened, the sunroof cannot be operated even within 30 seconds.

i

Information

• In cold and wet climates, the sunroof may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

• After the vehicle is washed or in a rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it.

WARNING

•

Never adjust the sunroof or sunshade while driving. This could result in loss of control and an accident that may cause death, serious injury, or property damage.

•

Make sure heads, other body parts or objects are out of the way before using the sunroof.

•

Do not extend your head, arms or body outside the sunroof while driving, to avoid serious injury.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

Do not leave the vehicle on and the key in your vehicle with unsupervised children.

Unattended children could operate the sunroof, which could result in serious injury.

•

Do not sit on the top of the vehicle. It may cause injuries or vehicle damage.

NOTICE

• Do not continue to move the sunroof control lever after the sunroof is fully opened, closed, or tilted. Damage to the motor or system components could occur.

• Make sure the sunroof is closed fully when leaving your vehicle.

If the sunroof is open, rain or snow may leak through the sunroof and wet the interior as well as cause theft.

3-42

Sunroof opening and closing Sliding the sunroof

Pressing the sunroof control lever backward or forward momentarily to the second detent position completely opens or closes the sunroof even when the switch is released. To stop the sunroof at the desired position while the sunroof is in operation, press the sunroof control lever backward or forward and release the switch.

Automatic reverse (if equipped)

OAD045023

To open:

Press the sunroof control lever backward to the first detent position.

Release the switch when you want the sunroof to stop.

To close:

Press the sunroof control lever forward to the first detent position. Release the switch when you want the sunroof to stop.

i

Information

To minimize wind noise while driving, it is recommended that you drive with the sunroof slightly closed (stop the sunroof about 3 inch (7 cm) before the maximum slide open position).

OLFC044035CN

If the sunroof senses any obstacle while it is closing automatically, it will reverse direction then stop to allow the object to be cleared.

The auto reverse function does not work if a small obstacle is between the sliding glass and the sunroof sash.

You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the sunroof before closing it.

3

3-43


WARNING

Small objects that can get caught between the sunroof glass and the front glass channel may not be detected by the automatic reverse system. In this case, the sunroof glass will not detect the object and will not reverse direction.

Tilting the sunroof Sunshade

OAD045024

Tilt the sunroof open:

Push the sunroof control lever upward until the sunroof moves to the desired position.

OAD045037

The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof when the glass panel moves. If you want it closed, move the sunshade manually.

To close the sunroof:

Push the sunroof control lever forward until the sunroof moves to the desired position.

NOTICE

The sunroof is made to slide together with the sunshade. Do not leave the sunshade closed while the sunroof is open.

3-44

Resetting the sunroof

Sunroof needs to be reset if the following occurs :

- Battery is discharged or disconnected or the related fuse has been replaced or disconnected

- The one-touch sliding function of the sunroof does not normally operate

Reset procedure :

1. Place the POWER button to the

ON position or start the vehicle

( indicator ON). It is recommended to reset the sunroof while the vehicle is in the ready ( mode.

)

2. Push the control lever forward. The sunroof will close completely or tilt depending on the condition of the sunroof.

3. Release the control lever when the sunroof stops moving.

4. Push the control lever forward about 10 seconds.

- When the sunroof is in the closed position :

The glass will tilt and slightly move up and down.

- When the sunroof is in the tilt position:

The glass will slightly move up and down.

Do not release the lever until the operation is completed.

If you release the lever during operation, start the procedure again from step 2.

6. Release the sunroof control lever after all steps have completed. The sunroof system has been reset.

Do not release the lever until the operation is completed.

If you release the lever during operation, start the procedure again from step 2.

i

Information

• If the sunroof is not reset when the vehicle battery is disconnected or discharged, or the sunroof fuse is blown, the sunroof may not operate normally.

• For more detailed information, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

5. Within 3 seconds, push and hold the control lever forward until the sunroof operates as follows:

Tilt down

→

Slide Open

→

Slide

Close.

3

3-45


E XT RIIO R F EA UR

Hood

Opening the hood

OAEE046011

1. Park the vehicle and set the parking brake.

2. Pull the release lever to unlatch the hood. The hood should pop open slightly.

OAEE046005

3. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the hood slightly, push up the secondary latch (1) inside of the hood center and lift the hood (2).

OAD045039

4. Pull out the support rod and hold the hood open with the support rod (1).

3-46

WARNING

•

Grasp the support rod in the area wrapped in rubber. The rubber will help prevent you from being burned by hot metal when the parts in the motor compartment is hot.

•

The support rod must be inserted completely into the hole provided whenever you inspect the motor compartment. This will prevent the hood from falling and possibly injuring you.

Closing the hood

1. Before closing the hood, check the following:

• All filler caps in motor compartment must be correctly installed.

• Gloves, rags or any other combustible material must be removed from the motor compartment.

2. Lower the hood halfway (lifted approximately 12 inches (30 cm) from the closed position) and push down to securely lock in place.

Then double check to be sure the hood is secure. If the hood can slightly be raised, it is not securely locked. Open it again and close it with more force.

WARNING

•

Before closing the hood, ensure all obstructions are removed from around hood opening.

•

Always double check to be sure that the hood is firmly latched before driving away.

Check there is no hood open warning light or message displayed on the instrument cluster. Driving with the hood opened may cause a total loss of visibility, which might result in an accident.

•

Do not move the vehicle with the hood in the raised position, as vision is obstructed, which might result in an accident, and the hood could fall or be damaged.

3

3-47


Liftgate

Opening the liftgate

Closing the liftgate

OAEE046006

1. Make sure the vehicle is in P

(Park).

2. Then do one of the following :

- Press the button on the liftgate itself with the Smart Key in your possession.

- Press the Smart Key Liftgate

Unlock button for more than one second.

OAEE046007

Lower the liftgate lid and press down until it locks.

To be sure the liftgate lid is securely fastened, always check by trying to pull it up again.

NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing conditions.

WARNING

The liftgate swings upward.

Make sure no objects or people are near the rear of the vehicle when opening the liftgate.

CAUTION

Make certain that you close the liftgate before driving your vehicle. Possible damage may occur to the liftgate lift cylinders and attached hardware if the liftgate is not closed prior to driving.

3-48

WARNING

Emergency liftgate safety release

OHYK047009

Do not hold the part (gas lifter) that supports the liftgate. Be aware that the deformation of the part may cause vehicle damage and a risk of safety accident.

OAEE046008

Your vehicle is equipped with an

Emergency Liftgate Safety Release lever located inside the liftgate. When someone is inadvertently locked in the luggage compartment, the liftgate can be opened manually from inside the luggage compartment by performing the following steps :

1. Input the mechanical key into the hole.

2. Push the mechanical key to the right.

3. Push up the liftgate.

WARNING

•

For emergencies, be fully aware of the location of the emergency liftgate safety release lever in this vehicle and how to open the liftgate if you are accidentally locked in the luggage compartment.

•

No one should be allowed to occupy the luggage compartment of the vehicle at any time.

The luggage compartment is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash.

•

Use the release lever for emergencies only.

Use extreme caution, especially while the vehicle is in motion.

3

3-49


Charging Door

Opening the charging door

Closing the charging door

1. After recharging, install the charging inlet cover.

2. Close the charging door until it is latched securely.

For more details, refer to the

Electric Vehicle Guide provided in the front of the owner’s manual.

Unlock Charging Door in

Emergency

OAEE046010

If the charging door does not open due to battery discharge and failure of the electric wires, open the liftgate and slightly pull the emergency cable as shown above. The charging door will then open.

OAEEQ016063N

The charging door must be opened from inside the vehicle by pushing the charging door open button.

1.Depress the brake pedal and apply the parking brake.

2.Turn OFF all switches, shift to P

(Park), and turn OFF the vehicle.

3.Press the charging door open button ( ) to open the charging door.

3-50

IIN ST RU ME T C ST R

1. ECO guide

2. Speedometer

3. Warning and indicator lights

4. LCD display (including Trip computer)

5. Battery SOC (State of Charge) gauge

3

The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OAEE047100N

3-51


Instrument Cluster Control

Adjusting instrument cluster illumination

Gauges and Meters

Speedometer

■

NORMAL/ECO mode selected

OAEE046412N

When the vehicle’s parking lights or headlights are on, press the illumination control button to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel illumination.

When pressing the illumination control button, the interior switch illumination intensity is also adjusted.

OAE046113L

• The brightness of the instrument panel illumination is displayed.

• If the brightness reaches the maximum or minimum level, a chime will sound.

■

SPORT mode selected

OAEE046196N

OAEE046501N

The speedometer indicates the speed of the vehicle and is calibrated in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h).

3-52

The speedometer is displayed differently according to the selected drive mode in the Drive Mode Integrated

Control System.

For more information, refer to

“Drive Mode Integrated Control

System” in chapter 5.

ECO guide

OAEQ046008

The ECO guide shows the energy consumption rate of the vehicle and the charge/discharge status of the regenerative brakes.

• POWER :

It shows the energy consumption rate of the vehicle when driving uphill or accelerating. The more electric energy is used, the higher the gauge level.

• ECO :

It shows the energy consumption rate during normal driving condition.

• CHARGE :

It shows the charging status of the battery when it is being charged by the regenerative brakes (decelerating or driving on a downhill road).

The more electric energy is charged, the lower the gauge level.

3

3-53


State of Charge (SOC) gauge for high voltage battery

OAEE046144

The SOC gauge shows the charging status of the high voltage battery.

"L (Low)" position on the indicator indicates that there is not enough energy in the high voltage battery. "H

(High)" position indicates that the driving battery is fully charged.

When driving on highways or motorways, make sure to check in advance if the driving battery is charged enough.

OAEE046102

When there are 2~3 gauge bars

(near the "L (Low)" area) on the SOC gauge, the warning lamp turns ON to alert you of the battery level.

When the warning lamp turns ON, the vehicle can drive an additional

12~18 miles (20~30 km) depending on the driving speed, heater/air conditioner, weather, driving style, and other factors. Charging is required.

3-54

NOTICE

When there are 1-2 gauge bars left for the high voltage battery, the vehicle speed is limited and then eventually the vehicle will turn OFF.

Charge the vehicle immediately.

Odometer Distance to Empty

■

NORMAL/

ECO mode selected

■

SPORT mode selected

Outside temperature gauge

OAEE046154N

The odometer indicates the total distance that the vehicle has been driven and should be used to determine when periodic maintenance should be performed.

OAEE046141N/OAEE046503N

• The distance to empty is the estimated distance the vehicle can be driven with remaining level of the high voltage battery.


"Distance to Empty" in the

Electric Vehicle Guide.

• The distance to empty is displayed differently according to the selected drive mode in the Drive Mode

Integrated Control System.


"Drive Mode Integrated Control

System" in chapter 5.

OAEE046502N

This gauge indicates the current outside air temperatures by 1°F (1°C).

- Temperature range : -40°F ~ 140°F

(-40°C ~ 60°C)

The outside temperature on the display may not change immediately like a general thermometer (to avoid distracting the driver).

To change the temperature unit from

°F to °C or °C to °F:

3-55

3


- Go to User Settings Mode

➝

Other

Features

➝

Temperature Unit.

- Press the AUTO button for 3 seconds while pressing the OFF button.

Gear shift indicator

Both the temperature unit on the cluster LCD display and climate control screen will change.

OAEE046103

This indicator displays which gear is selected.

OAEE046104

Shift indicator pop-up

(if equipped)

The pop-up displays the current gear position selected for 2 seconds

(P/R/N/D).

3-56

Regenerative braking rate indicator

Icy road warning light

(if equipped)

i

Information

If the icy road warning light appears while driving, you should drive more attentively and safely refraining from over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden braking or sharp turning, etc.

3

OAEE056100L

While using the regenerative brakes, you may select the regenerative braking rate from 0 to 3 by pulling the paddle shifter.


"Paddle Shifter (Regenerative

Braking Control)" in chapter 5.

OAE046099L

This warning light is to warn the driver the road may be icy.

When the temperature on the outside temperature gauge is approximately below 40°F (4°C), the Icy

Road Warning Light and Outside

Temperature Gauge blinks, and then illuminates. Also, the warning chime is sound.

3-57


Warning and Indicator lights

Service Warning Light Power Down Warning

Light

i

Information

Make sure that all warning lights are

OFF after starting the vehicle. If any light is still ON, this indicates a situation that needs attention.

Ready Indicator

This warning light illuminates:

• When the POWER button is in the

ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a problem with related parts of the electric vehicle control system, such as sensors, etc.

This indicator illuminates:

When the vehicle is ready to be driven.

- ON : Normal driving is possible.

- OFF : Normal driving is not possible, or a problem has occurred.

- Blinking : Emergency driving.

When the warning light illuminates while driving, or does not go OFF after starting the vehicle, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

When the ready indicator goes OFF or blinks, there is a problem with the system. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.


When the power is limited for the safety of the electric vehicle.

The power is limited for the following reasons.

- The high voltage battery level is below a certain level or voltage is decreasing

- The temperature of the motor or high voltage battery is too high or too low

- There is a problem with the cooling system, or a failure that may interrupt normal driving

NOTICE

Do not accelerate or start the vehicle suddenly when the power down warning light is ON.

Charge the battery immediately when the high voltage battery level is not enough.

3-58

Charging Indicator

Light

Supplemental Restraint

System Warning Light

Regenerative Brake

Warning Light

(yellow)

This warning light illuminates (red):

• When charging the high voltage battery.

High Voltage Battery

Low Level Warning

Light


When the high voltage battery level is low. When the warning light turns

ON, charge the battery immediately.



ON position.


• When there is a malfunction with the SRS.

In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Seat Belt Warning Light


When the regenerative brake does not operate and the brake does not perform well. This causes the Brake

Warning light (red) and Regenerative

Brake Warning Light (yellow) to illuminate simultaneously.

In this case, drive safely and have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

The operation of the brake pedal may be more difficult than normal and the braking distance can increase.

3

This warning light informs the driver that the seat belt is not fastened.


"Seat Belts" in chapter 2.

3-59


Parking Brake & Brake

Fluid Warning Light



ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds.

- It remains on if the parking brake is applied.

• When the parking brake is applied.

• When the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low.

- If the warning light illuminates with the parking brake released, it indicates the brake fluid level in reservoir is low.

If the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.

2. With the vehicle turned off, check the brake fluid level immediately and add fluid as required (For more

information, refer to "Brake

Fluid" in chapter 7). After adding brake fluid, check all brake components for fluid leaks. If a brake fluid leak is found, or if the warning light remains on, or if the brakes do not operate properly, do not drive the vehicle. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Also, the vehicle will not stop in as short a distance with only a portion of the brake system working.

WARNING

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid

Warning Light

Driving the vehicle with a warning light ON is dangerous. If the

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid

Warning Light illuminates with the parking brake released, it indicates that the brake fluid level is low.

In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Dual-diagonal braking system

Your vehicle is equipped with dualdiagonal braking systems. This means you still have braking on two wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail.

With only one of the dual systems working, more than normal pedal travel and greater pedal pressure is required to stop the vehicle.

3-60

Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) Warning Light



ON position.


• When there is a malfunction with the ABS (The normal braking system will still be operational without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system).


Electronic

Brake Force

Distribution

(EBD) System Warning Light

These two warning lights illuminate at the same time while driving:

When the ABS and regular brake system may not work normally.


WARNING

Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD) System

Warning Light

When both ABS and Parking

Brake & Brake Fluid Warning

Lights are on, the brake system will not work normally and you may experience an unexpected and dangerous situation during sudden braking.

In this case, avoid high speed driving and abrupt braking.

In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

i

Information

- Electronic

Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) System Warning Light

When the ABS Warning Light is on or both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake

Fluid Warning Lights are on, the speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter may not work. Also, the EPS Warning

Light may illuminate and the steering effort may increase or decrease.

In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

3-61

3


Electric Power

Steering (EPS)

Warning Light

Charging System

Warning Light

(for 12-volt battery)

Low Tire Pressure

Warning Light



ON position.


• When there is a malfunction with the EPS.



• When the 12-volt battery level is low or a failure occurs on the charging system such as LDC.

• If the warning light turns on while driving, move the vehicle to a safe location, turn off and turn on the vehicle again, and check if the warning light turns off. If the warning light remains on, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Even if the warning light turns off, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If you drive the vehicle while the warning light is on, vehicle speed may be limited and the 12-volt battery may be discharged.

❈

LDC : Low voltage DC-DC Converter.



ON position.


• When one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated (The location of each underinflated tire is displayed on the LCD display).


"Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)" in chapter 6.

3-62

This warning light remains ON after blinking for approximately 60 seconds, or repeatedly blinks ON and OFF in 3 second intervals:

When there is a malfunction with the

TPMS.





WARNING

Safe Stopping

•

The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors.

•

If you notice any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator pedal, apply the brakes gradually with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

Electronic Parking

Brake (EPB) Warning

Light

E B



ON position.


• When there is a malfunction with the EPB.

In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i

Information

The Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)

Warning Light may illuminate when the Electronic Stability control (ESC)

Indicator Light comes on to indicate that the ESC is not working properly

(This does not indicate malfunction of the EPB).

AUTO HOLD Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• [White] When you activate the auto hold system by pressing the AUTO

HOLD switch.

• [Green] When you stop the vehicle completely by depressing the brake pedal with the auto hold system activated.

• [Yellow] When there is a malfunction with the auto hold system.

In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.


"Auto Hold" in chapter 5.

3

3-63


Forward Collision-

Avoidance Assist (FCA)

System Warning Light

(if equipped)

Lane Keeping Assist

(LKA) System Indicator

Light (if equipped)

LED Headlamp Warning


This warning light illuminates :


ON position.


• When the FCA system is turned off.

• When the radar sensor or cover is blocked with dirt or snow. Check the sensor and cover and clean them by using a soft cloth.

• When there is a malfunction with

FCA. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.


"Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) system" in chapter 5.


• [Green] When the system operating conditions are satisfied.

• [White] When system operating conditions are not satisfied or when the sensor does not detect the lane line.

• [Yellow] When there is a malfunction with the lane keeping assist system.


For more information, refer to "Lane

Keeping Assist (LKA) System" in chapter 5.



ON position.


• When there is a malfunction with the LED headlamp.

In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

This warning light blinks:

When there is a malfunction with a

LED headlamp related part.

In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

Continuous driving with the LED

Headlamp Warning Light on or blinking can reduce LED headlamp life.

3-64

Adaptive Front Lighting

System (AFLS) Warning


AFLS

Master Warning Light Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) Indicator

Light

This warning light blinks:


ON position.


• When there is a malfunction with the AFLS.

If there is a malfunction with the

AFLS:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle.

2. Turn the vehicle off and restart the vehicle ( indicator ON). If the warning light remains on, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.


When there is a malfunction in operation in any of the following systems:

- Smart Cruise Control with Stop &

Go malfunction (if equipped)

- Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist

System malfunction (if equipped)

- Blind-Spot Collision Warning

(BCW) System malfunction (if equipped)

- High Beam Assist malfunction (if equipped)

- Driver Attention Warning (DAW)


- Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) malfunction

- Service reminder

To identify the details of the warning, look at the LCD display.



ON position.


• When there is a malfunction with the ESC system.

In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

This indicator light blinks:

While the ESC is operating.


"Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" in chapter 5.

3

3-65


Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) OFF

Indicator Light



ON position.


• When you deactivate the ESC system by pressing the ESC OFF button.


"Electronic Stability Control (ESC)" in chapter 5.

Immobilizer Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates for up to 30 seconds:

When the vehicle detects the smart key in the vehicle with the POWER button in the ACC or ON position.

- At this time, you can start the vehicle ( indicator ON).

- The indicator light goes off after starting the vehicle ( indicator

ON).

This indicator light blinks for a few seconds:

When the smart key is not in the vehicle.

- At this time, you cannot start the vehicle.

This indicator light illuminates for

2 seconds and goes off:

If the smart key is in the vehicle and the POWER button is ON, but the vehicle cannot detect the smart key.



• When there is a malfunction with the immobilizer system.


3-66

Turn Signal Indicator

Light

High Beam Indicator

Light

High Beam Assist

(HBA) indicator light

(if equipped)


• When you operate the turn signal indicator.


• When the headlights are on and in the high beam position.

• When the turn signal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-Pass position.

If any of the following occurs, there may be a malfunction with the turn signal system.

- The turn signal indicator light illuminates but does not blink

- The turn signal indicator light blinks rapidly

- The turn signal indicator light does not illuminate at all

If either of these conditions occur, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Light ON Indicator

Light


• When the parking lights or headlights are on.


• When the high-beam is on with the light switch in the AUTO light position.

• If your vehicle detects oncoming or preceding vehicles, the High Beam

Assist (HBA) system will switch the high beam to low beam automatically.

For more details, refer to "High

Beam Assist (HBA) system" in this chapter.

3

3-67


Cruise Indicator Light

(if equipped)

SPORT Mode Indicator

Light


When the cruise control system is enabled.


"Cruise Control System" in chapter 5.


When you select "SPORT" mode as drive mode.



System" in chapter 5.

Cruise SET Indicator


ECO Mode Indicator

Light

LCD Display Messages

Shift to P

This warning message is displayed if you try to turn off the vehicle with the gear in the N (Neutral) position.

At this time, the POWER button changes to the ACC position (If you press the POWER button once more, it will turn to the ON position).

Low Key Battery

This warning message is displayed if the battery of the smart key is discharged while changing the POWER button to the OFF position.


When the cruise control speed is set.


"Cruise Control System" in chapter 5.


When you select "ECO" mode as drive mode.



System" in this chapter.

3-68

Press POWER button while turning wheel

This warning message is displayed if the steering wheel does not unlock normally when the POWER button is pressed.

You should press the POWER button while turning the steering wheel right and left.

Press brake pedal to start vehicle

This warning message is displayed if the POWER button changes to the

ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly without depressing the brake pedal.

You can start the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal.

Check Steering Wheel Lock

System

This warning message is displayed if the steering wheel does not lock normally while the POWER button changes to the OFF position.

Key not in vehicle

This warning message is displayed if the smart key is not in the vehicle when you press the POWER button.

When attempting to start the vehicle, always have the smart key with you.

Key not detected

This warning message is displayed if the smart key is not detected when you press the POWER button.

Press POWER button again

This message is displayed if you were unable to start the vehicle when the POWER button was pressed.

If this occurs, attempt to start the vehicle by pressing the POWER button again.

If the warning message appears each time you press the POWER button, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

3

3-69


Press POWER button with key

This warning message is displayed if you press the POWER button while the warning message "Key not detected" is displayed.

At this time, the immobilizer indicator light blinks.

Unplug vehicle to start Door / Hood / Liftgate open

Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse

This warning message is displayed if the brake switch fuse is disconnected.

You need to replace the fuse with a new one before starting the vehicle.

If that is not possible, you can start the vehicle by pressing the POWER button for 10 seconds in the ACC position.

Shift to P to start vehicle

This warning message is displayed if you try to start the vehicle without shifting to the P (Park) position.

OAEE046131L

This message is displayed when you start the vehicle without unplugging the charging cable. Unplug the charging cable, and then start the vehicle.

OAEE046113/OAE046181

This warning is displayed indicating which door, or the hood, or the liftgate is open.

If the door/hood/liftgate open warning message is blocked with another warning message, an icon will appear on the top of the LCD display.

Low Washer Fluid (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if the washer fluid level in the reservoir is nearly empty.

Have the washer fluid reservoir refilled.

3-70

CAUTION

Before driving the vehicle, you should confirm that the door/ hood/liftgate is fully closed.

Also, check there is no door/ hood/liftgate open warning light or message displayed on the instrument cluster.

Sunroof open Turn on FUSE SWITCH

OAEE046114

This warning is displayed if you turn off the vehicle when the sunroof is open.

OLFH044149L

This warning message is displayed if the fuse switch under the steering wheel is OFF.

If this message is displayed, turn the fuse switch on.


"Fuses" in chapter 7.

3

3-71


Low Pressure Check headlight Check headlamp LED

OAEE046115N

This warning message is displayed if the tire pressure is low. The corresponding tire on the vehicle will be illuminated.




OAD045142L

This warning message is displayed if the headlamps are not operating properly. The headlamp bulb may need to be replaced.

OAEE046119L

This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with the LED headlamp. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i

Information

Make sure to replace the burned out bulb with a new one of the same wattage rating.


"Bulb Wattage" in chapter 8.

3-72

Check headlamp FAN Lights Mode Wiper

OAEE046118L

This warning message is displayed if there is a problem with headlamp fan. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OAEE046504N

This indicator displays which exterior light is selected using the lighting control.

OAE046118L

This indicator displays which wiper speed is selected using the wiper control.

3

3-73


Shift to P to charge Remaining time Charging Door Open

OAEE046192L

This message is displayed if you connect the charging cable without the gear in the P (Park) position.

Shift to P (Park) before connecting the charging cable.

OAEE046193L

This message is displayed to notify the remaining time to fully charge the battery.

OAEE046194L

This message is displayed when the vehicle is driven with the charging door opened. Close the charging door and then start driving.

3-74

Charger Error! /

Quick Charger Error!

Aux. Battery Saver+ used while parked

Stop vehicle and check brakes

OAEE046134LOAEE046135L

This warning message is displayed when there is a problem with the charger.

OAEE046143L

This message is displayed when the

Aux. Battery Saver+ function has been completed.


"Aux. Battery Saver+" in the

Electric Vehicle Guide.

OLFH044234L

This warning message is displayed when a failure occurs in the brake system.

In this case, park the vehicle in a safe location and tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the vehicle inspected.

3

3-75


Check brakes Low Battery Charge immediately.

Power limited

OLFH044250L

This warning message is displayed when the brake performance is low or the regenerative brake does not work properly due to a failure in the brake system.

In this case, it may take longer for the brake pedal to operate and the braking distance may become longer.

OAEE046123L

When the high voltage battery level reaches below 13%, this warning message is displayed.

The warning light on the instrument cluster ( ) will turn ON simultaneously.

Charge the high voltage battery immediately.

OAEE046125L


The warning light on the instrument cluster ( ) and the power down warning light ( ) will turn on simultaneously.

The vehicle's power will be reduced to minimize the energy consumption of the high voltage battery. Charge the battery immediately.

3-76

Low Battery. Charge immediately Low Battery Temp.

Power limited

Battery Overheated!

Stop vehicle

OAEE046124L


The warning light on the instrument cluster ( ) and the power down warning light ( ) will turn ON simultaneously and the distance to empty gauge will be displayed as "---".


OAEE046128L

This warning message is displayed to protect battery and electric vehicle system when the high voltage battery temperature is too low.

NOTICE

If this warning message is still displayed even after the ambient temperature has increased, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OAEE046129L

This warning message is displayed to protect battery and electric vehicle system when the high voltage battery temperature is too high.

Turn off the POWER button and stop the vehicle so that the battery temperature decreases.

3-77

3


Power limited

NOTICE

When this warning message is displayed, do not accelerate or start the vehicle suddenly.


Stop vehicle and check power supply

OAEE046127L

In the following cases, this warning message is displayed when the vehicle’s power is limited for safety.

• When the high voltage battery is below a certain level, or voltage is decreasing.

• When the temperature of the motor or high voltage battery is too high or too low.

• When there is a problem with the cooling system or a failure that may interrupt normal driving.

3-78

OLFH044230L

This warning message is displayed when a failure occurs in the power supply system.

In this case, park the vehicle in a safe location and tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the vehicle inspected.

Check Virtual Engine Sound

System

Check electric vehicle system

OLFH044543L

This message is displayed when there is a problem with the Virtual

Engine Sound System (VESS).


OAEE046149L

This warning message is displayed when there is a problem with the electric vehicle control system.

Refrain from driving when the warning message is displayed.


3

3-79


L CD DIIS PL Y

LCD Display Control

T y p e A

T y p e B

T y p e C

The LCD display modes can be changed by using the control buttons on the steering wheel.

(1) : MODE button for changing modes changing items

(3) OK : SELECT/RESET button for setting or resetting the selected item

OAE046402

3-80

LCD Display Modes

Modes

Trip Computer

Turn By Turn (TBT)

(if equipped)

Assist

Symbol Explanation

This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, etc.

For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.

This mode displays the state of the navigation.

This mode displays the state of :

- Smart Cruise Control system

- Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system

- Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system

- Tire pressure

For more information, refer to "Smart Cruise Control with Stop & Go system",

"Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system", "Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system" in chapter 5 and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.

In this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, etc.

User Settings

Warning

This mode displays warning messages related to the Blind-spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system, etc.

The information provided differs according to the items applied to your vehicle.

3

3-81


Edit settings after shifting to P Trip computer mode Turn By Turn (TBT) mode

OAE046132L

This warning message appears if you try to adjust the User Settings while driving.

Quick guide help

Press and hold the OK button in the

User Settings Mode, the explanation about the selected item is displayed.

OAEE046191N

The trip computer mode displays information related to vehicle driving parameters including range, fuel economy, trip meter information and vehicle speed.


"Trip Computer" in this chapter.

OAEE046505N

This mode displays the state of the navigation.

3-82

Assist mode

OAEE046137R

SCC/LKA/DAW (if equipped)

This mode displays the state of the

Smart Cruise Control (SCC), Lane

Keeping Assist (LKA) system and

Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system.

For more information, refer to each system in chapter 5.

OAEE046138N

Tire Pressure

This mode displays information related to Tire Pressure.




Warning mode

If one of followings occurs, warning messages will be displayed on the

LCD display for several seconds.

- Lower washer fluid (if equipped)

- Blind-Spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system malfunction (if equipped)

- Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) malfunction (if equipped)

- High Beam Assist (HBA) malfunction (if equipped)

- Smart Cruise Control with Stop &

Go malfunction (if equipped)

- Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) malfunction (if equipped)

- Driver Attention Warning (DAW)


3

3-83


User Settings Mode

In this mode, you can change setting of the instrument cluster, doors, lamps, etc.

Driver Assistance

Items Explanation

To adjust the Lane Keeping Assist function.

- Lane Departure Warning / Standard LKA / Active LKA

Lane Safety

For more information, refer to the "Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system" in chapter 5.

Driver Attention Warning

To adjust the sensitivity of the Driver Attention Warning.

- High Sensitivity / Normal Sensitivity / Off

For more information, refer to the "Driver Attention Warning (DAW) System" in chapter 5.

SCC Reaction

To adjust the sensitivity (Slow/Normal/Fast) of the Smart Cruise Control system.

For more information, refer to "Smart Cruise Control with Stop & Go system" in chapter 5.

Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist

To activate or deactivate the FCA system.

For more information, refer to "Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system" in chapter 5.

3-84

Driver Assistance


Forward Collision Warning

To adjust the initial warning alert time for the Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system.

The option settings are Late, Normal, or Early.

For more information, refer to "Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system" in chapter 5.

Blind-Spot Collision Warning

Sound

To activate or deactivate the Blind-Spot Collision Warning Sound.

For more information, refer to "Blind-spot Collision Warning (BCW) system" in chapter 5.

Rear Cross-Traffic Collision

Warning

To activate or deactivate the Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning system.

For more information, refer to "Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning" in chapter 5.

3


3-85


Door

Items

Auto Lock

Explanation

• Disable: The auto door lock operation will be canceled.

• Enable on Speed: All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 9.3mph

(15km/h).

• Enable on Shift: All doors will be automatically locked if the gear is shifted from the P (Park) position to R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.

Auto Unlock

• Disable : The auto door unlock operation will be canceled.

• Vehicle Off: All doors will be automatically unlocked when the POWER button is set to the OFF position.

• On Shift to P: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the gear is shifted to the P (Park) position.

Two Press Unlock

• Off : The two press unlock function will be deactivated. Therefore, all doors will unlock if the door unlock button is pressed.

• On : Only the driver's door will unlock if the door unlock button is pressed. When the door unlock button is pressed again within 4 seconds, the remaining doors will unlock.


3-86

Lights

Items

One Touch Turn Signal

Headlamp Delay

Welcome Light

Explanation

• Off : The one touch turn signal function will be deactivated.

• 3, 5, 7 Flashes : The turn signal indicator will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is moved slightly.

For more information, refer to "Light" in this chapter.

To activate or deactivate the headlamp delay function.

For more information, refer to "Light" in this chapter.

To activate or deactivate the welcome light function.

For more information, refer to "Welcome System" in this chapter.

3

Sound

Items

Welcome Sound

Explanation

To activate or deactivate the welcome sound function.


3-87


Convenience

Items

Gear Position Pop-up

(if equipped)

Explanation

Seat Easy Access

• Off : The seat easy access function is deactivated.

• Normal/Extended:

- When you turn off the vehicle, the driver's seat will automatically move rearward short (Normal) or long (Extended) for you to enter or exit the vehicle more comfortably.

- If you change the POWER button from OFF position to the ACC, ON, or START position, the driver’s seat will return to the original position.

For more information, refer to "Driver Position Memory System" in this chapter.

Wireless Charging System

To activate or deactivate the wireless charging system in the front seat.

For more information, refer to "Wireless Charging System" in this chapter.

Wiper/Lights Display

To activate or deactivate the Wiper/Light mode. When activated, the LCD display shows the selected

Wiper/Light mode whenever you change the mode.

To activate or deactivate the gear position pop-up. When activated, the gear position will be displayed on the LCD display.


3-88

Service interval

Items

Service Interval

Explanation

To activate or deactivate the service interval function.

Adjust Interval If the service interval menu is activated, you may adjust the time and distance.

If the service interval is activated and the time and distance is adjusted, messages are displayed in the following situations each time the vehicle is turned on.

- Service in

: Displayed to inform the driver the remaining mileage and days to service.

- Service required

: Displayed when the mileage and days to service has been reached or passed.

If any of the following conditions occur, the mileage and number of days to service may be incorrect.

- The battery cable is disconnected.

- The fuse switch is turned off.

- The battery is discharged.

i

Information

To use the service interval menu, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.


3

3-89


Other features


To activate or deactivate the Aux. Battery Saver+ function.

Aux. Battery Saver+

When activated, the high voltage battery is used to keep the 12V battery charged.

For more information, refer to "Aux. Battery Saver+" in the Electric Vehicle Guide

Fuel Economy Auto Reset

• Off : The average fuel economy will not reset automatically whenever recharging.

• After Ignition : The average fuel economy will reset automatically whenever it has passed 4 hours after turning OFF the vehicle.

• After Recharging : The average fuel economy will reset automatically when recharging.

Fuel Economy Unit

Temperature Unit

Tire Pressure Unit

For more details, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.

To select the fuel economy unit. (km/kWh, kWh/100km, mi/kWh)

To select the temperature unit. (°C,°F)

To select the tire pressure unit. (psi, kPa, Bar)


3-90

T RIIP OM UT R

The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system that displays information related to driving.

Trip modes

• Average Fuel Economy

• Instant Fuel Economy

i

Information

Some driving information stored in the trip computer (for example

Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is disconnected.

• Tripmeter

• Average Vehicle Speed

• Timer

Digital Speedometer

Energy Flow

OAE046402

To change the trip mode, toggle the

UP/DOWN arrow switch " , " on the steering wheel.

3

3-91


Average fuel economy/

Instant fuel economy

Manual reset

To clear the average fuel economy manually, press the OK button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average fuel economy is displayed.

For more information on the OK button, refer to the "LCD Display

Control" in this chapter.

Tripmeter/Average vehicle speed/

Timer

OAEE046190N

Average Fuel Economy (1)

• The average fuel economy is calculated by the total driving distance and the high voltage battery consumption since the last average fuel economy reset.

- Fuel economy range:

0.0 ~ 99.9 MPG or L/100km or km/L

• The average fuel economy can be reset both manually and automatically.

Automatic reset

To automatically reset the average fuel economy after recharging, select the "After Recharging" mode in User

Settings menu on the LCD display

(Refer to "LCD Display" in this chapter).

Under "After Recharging" mode, the average fuel economy will be cleared to zero (----), when the driving distance exceeds 0.19 miles (300m) after recharging more than 10%.

Instant Fuel Economy (2)

This mode displays the instantaneous fuel economy while driving.

OAEE046191N

i

Information

If you press and hold the OK button when viewing the tripmeter, the mileage, the average vehicle speed, and the timer will be reset simultaneously.

3-92

Tripmeter (1)

• The tripmeter is the total driving distance since the last tripmeter reset.

• To reset the tripmeter, press the

OK button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the tripmeter is displayed.

i

Information

• The average vehicle speed is not displayed if the driving distance is less than 0.19 miles (300 meters) or the driving time is less than 10 seconds, after resetting the vehicle speed.

• The average vehicle speed will continue to be calculated and will start to decrease if the vehicle is stopped

( while the vehicle is in the ready

) mode.

Average Vehicle Speed (2)

• The average vehicle speed is calculated by the total driving distance and driving time since the last average vehicle speed reset.

• To reset the average vehicle speed, press the OK button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average vehicle speed is displayed.

Timer (3)

• The timer is the total driving time since the last timer reset.

• To reset the timer, press the OK button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the timer is displayed.

Digital speedometer

OAEE046153R

This message shows the speed of the vehicle (in mph).

i

Information

The timer will continue to be counted while the vehicle is in the ready ( mode.

)

3

3-93


Driving info display

i

Information

• If sunroof open warning is displayed in the cluster, the Driving Information message may not be displayed.

• To set the charging time and/or climate time, refer to a separately supplied Multimedia System manual for detailed information.

Energy flow

OAEE046195N

At the end of each driving cycle, the

Driving Info message is displayed.

This display shows the trip distance

(1), average fuel economy (2), remaining vehicle range (3), charging time status (4) and climate time status (5).

This information is displayed for a few seconds when you turn off the vehicle, and then goes off automatically.

The information is calculated for each time the vehicle is turned on.

OAEQ046001L

The electric vehicle system informs the drivers its energy flow in various operating modes. While driving, the current energy flow is specified in 3 modes.

For more information, refer to

"Energy Flow" in the Electric Vehicle

Guide provided in front of the owner's manual.

3-94

LIIG T

Exterior Lights

Lighting control

To operate the lights, turn the knob at the end of the control lever to one of the following positions:

Daytime running light (DRL)

(if equipped)

The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day, especially after dawn and before sunset.

OLF044084N

1. DRL (Daytime Running Lights)

OFF position

2. AUTO light position

3. Parking lamp position

4. Headlamp position

The DRL system will turn the dedicated lamp OFF when :

• The light switch is in the DRL OFF position.

• The headlights are ON.

• The vehicle is turned off.

OAEE046510N

AUTO light position (if equipped)

The parking lamp and headlamp will be turned ON or OFF automatically depending on the amount of light outside the vehicle.

Even with the AUTO light feature in operation, it is recommended to manually turn ON the lamps when driving at night or in a fog, driving in the rain, or when you enter dark areas, such as tunnels and parking facilities.

3

3-95


NOTICE

• Do not cover or spill anything on the sensor (1) located in front of the instrument panel.

• Do not clean the sensor using a window cleaner, the cleanser may leave a light film which could interfere with sensor operation.

• If your vehicle has window tint or other types of metallic coating on the front windshield, the

AUTO light system may not work properly.

OLF044086N

Parking lamp position ( )

The parking lamp, license plate lamp and instrument panel lamp are turned

ON.

OLF044087N

Headlamp position ( )

The headlamp, parking lamp, license plate lamp and instrument panel lamp are turned ON.

i

Information

The POWER button must be in the

ON position to turn on the headlamp.

3-96

High beam operation High Beam Assist (HBA)

(if equipped)

OLF044089N

To turn on the high beam headlamp, push the lever away from you. The lever will return to its original position.

The high beam indicator will light when the headlamp high beams are switched on.

To turn off the high beam headlamp, pull the lever towards you. The low beams will turn on.

WARNING

Do not use high beam when there are other vehicles approaching you. Using high beam could obstruct the other driver’s vision.

OLF044088N

To flash the high beam headlamp, pull the lever towards you, then release the lever. The high beams will remain ON as long as you hold the lever towards you.

OAE048581L

The High Beam Assist (HBA) is a system that automatically adjusts the headlamp range (switches between high beam and low beam) according to the brightness of other vehicles and road conditions.

Operating condition

1. Place the headlamp switch in the

AUTO position.

2. Turn on the high beam by pushing the lever away from you.

The High Beam Assist (HBA) ( ) indicator will illuminate.

3-97

3


3. The High Beam Assist (HBA) will turn on when vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).

• If the headlamp switch is pushed away when the High Beam Assist

(HBA) is operating, the High Beam

Assist (HBA) will turn off and the high beam will be on continuously.

• If the headlamp switch is pulled towards you when the high beam is off, the high beam will turn on without the High Beam Assist

(HBA) canceled. When you let go of the light switch, the lever will move to the middle and the high beam will turn off.

• If the headlamp switch is pulled towards you when the high beam is on by the High Beam Assist

(HBA), the low beam will be on and the High Beam Assist (HBA) will turn off.

• If the headlamp switch is placed to the headlamp ON position, the

High Beam Assist (HBA) will turn off and the low beam will be on continuously.

When the High Beam Assist (HBA) is operating, the high beam switches to low beamif any of the following conditions occur :

- When the headlamp of an on-coming vehicle is detected.

- When the tail lamp of a vehicle in front is detected.

- When the headlamp or tail lamp of a motorcycle or a bicycle is detected.

- When the surrounding ambient light is bright enough that high beams are not required.

- When streetlights or other lights are detected.

- When the headlamp switch is not in the AUTO position.

- When the High Beam Assist (HBA) is off.

- When vehicle speed is below 15 mph (24 km/h).

OAE058237L

Warning light and message

When the High Beam Assist (HBA) is not working properly, the Check High

Beam Assist warning message will come on for a few second. After the message disappears, the master warning light ( ) will illuminate. Take your vehicle to an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked.

3-98

WARNING

The driver must be cautious in the below situations may not work properly when recognition of light from on-coming or front vehicle is poor or limited:

When the light from on-coming or front vehicle is poor

•

When the light from the oncoming or front vehicle is not detected because of lamp damage, hidden from sight, etc.

•

When the lamp of the on-coming or front vehicle is covered with dust, snow or water.

•

When the front vehicle's headlamps are off but the fog lamps on and etc.

(Continued)

(Continued)

When external condition is intervened

•

When there is a similar shape lamp with the front vehicle’s lamps.

•

When the headlamp is not repaired or replaced at an authorized dealer.

•

When headlamp aiming is not properly adjusted.

•

When driving on a narrow curved road, rough road, downhill or uphill.

•

When only part of the vehicle in front is visible on a crossroad or curved road.

•

When there is a traffic light, reflecting sign, flashing sign or mirror ahead.

•

When there is a temporary reflector or flash ahead (construction area).

•

When the road conditions are bad such as being wet, iced or covered with snow.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

When a vehicle suddenly appears from a curve.

•

When the vehicle is tilted from a flat tire or being towed.

•

When the LKA (Lane Keeping

Assist) system failure indicator (yellow) illuminates (if equipped) and etc.

When front visibility is poor

•

When the lamp of the on-coming or front vehicle is covered with dust, snow or water.

•

When the light from the oncoming or front vehicle is not detected because of exhaust fume, smoke, fog, snow, etc.

•

When the front window is covered with foreign matters.

•

When it is hard to see because of fog, heavy rain or snow and etc.

(Continued)

3

3-99


(Continued)

•

Do not disassemble a front view camera temporarily for tinted window or attaching any types of coatings and accessories. If you disassemble the camera and assemble it again, take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked to need a calibration.

•

When you replace or reinstall the windshield glass, front view camera, take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked.

•

Be careful that water doesn’t get into the High Beam Assist unit and do not remove or damage related parts of the

High Beam Assist system.

•

Do not place objects on the crash pad that reflect light such as mirrors, white paper, etc. The system may malfunction if sunlight is reflected.

(Continued)

3-100

(Continued)

•

At times, the High Beam Assist may not work properly. The system is for your convenience only. It is the responsibility of the driver for safe driving practices and always check the road conditions for your safety.

•

When the system does not operate normally, change the lamp position manually between the high beam and low beam.

Turn signals and lane change signals

OLF044091N

To signal a turn, push down on the lever for a left turn or up for a right turn in position (A).

If an indicator stays on and does not flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out and will require replacement.

Onetouch turn signal function

To activate the One Touch Turn

Signal function, push the turn signal lever up or down to position (B) and then release it.

The lane change signals will blink 3,

5 or 7 times.


One Touch Turn Signal function or choose the number of blinking (3, 5, or 7) from the User Settings mode

(Light) on the LCD display.



Battery saver function

The purpose of this feature is to prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically turns off the parking lamp when the driver turns the vehicle off and opens the driver-side door.

With this feature, the parking lamps will turn off automatically if the driver parks on the side of road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lamps on when the the vehicle is turned off, perform the following:

1) Open the driver-side door.

2) Turn the parking lamps OFF and

ON again using the light switch on the steering column.

Headlamp delay function

(if equipped)

If the POWER button is placed in the

ACC position or the OFF position with the headlamps ON, the headlamps (and/or parking lamps) remain on for about 5 minutes. However, if the driver’s door is opened and closed, the headlights are turned off after 15 seconds. Also, with the vehicle off if the driver's door is opened and closed, the headlamps (and/or parking lamps) are turned off after 15 seconds.

The headlamps (and/or parking lamps) can be turned off by pressing the lock button on the smart key twice or turning the light switch to the

OFF or AUTO position.


Headlamp Delay function from the

User Settings mode (Light) on the

LCD display.



3

3-101


NOTICE

If the driver gets out of the vehicle through other doors (except driver’s door), the battery saver function does not operate and the headlamp delay function does not turn off automatically. Therefore, It causes the battery to be discharged. In this case, make sure to turn off the lamp before getting out of the vehicle.

AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting

System) a.k.a. DBL (Dynamic

Bending Light) (if equipped)

OAEE046510N

Adaptive front lighting system uses the steering angle and vehicle speed, to keep your field of vision wide by swiveling and leveling the headlamp.

Change the switch to the AUTO position when the vehicle is in the ready

( ) mode. The adaptive front lighting system will operate when the headlamp is ON. To turn off the

AFLS, change the switch to other positions. After turning the AFLS off, headlamp swiveling no longer occurs, but leveling operates continuously.

If the AFLS malfunction indicator comes on, the AFLS is not working properly. Drive to the nearest safe location and restart the vehicle ( indicator ON). If the indicator continuously remains on, have the system be checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

3-102

Interior Lights

WARNING

Do not use the interior lights when driving in the dark.The interior lights may obscure your view and cause an accident.

NOTICE

Do not use the interior lights for extended periods when the vehicle is turned off or the battery will discharge.

Interior lamp AUTO cut

The interior lamps will automatically go off approximately 20 minutes after the vehicle is turned off and the doors closed. If a door is opened, the lamp will go off 40 minutes after the vehicle is turned off. If the doors are locked by the smart key and the vehicle enters the armed stage of the theft alarm system, the lamps will go off five seconds later.

Front lamps

(1) Front Map Lamp

(2) Front Door Lamp

(3) Front Room Lamp ON

(4) Front Room Lamp OFF

OAD045405

Front Map Lamp :

Press either of these lenses to turn the map lamp on or off. This light produces a spot beam for convenient use as a map lamp at night or as a personal lamp for the driver and the front passenger.

Front Door Lamp ( ):

The front or rear room lamps come on when the front or rear doors are opened. When doors are unlocked by the smart key, the front and rear lamps come on for approximately 30 seconds as long as any door is not opened. The front and rear room lamps go out gradually after approximately 30 seconds if the door is closed. However, if the POWER button is in the ON position or all doors are locked, the front and rear lamps will turn off. If a door is opened with the POWER button in the ACC position or the OFF position, the front and rear lamps stay on for about 20 minutes.

3

3-103


Front room lamp

• :

Press the button to turn ON the room lamp for the front/rear seats.

Re-press the button to turn OFF the room lamp.

Rear lamp

■

Type A

Luggage room lamp

• :

Press the button to turn OFF the room lamp for the front/rear seats regardless of front or rear door open position.

OAE046445

■

Type B

OAEE046421

Rear Room Lamp ( ):

Press this switch to turn the room lamp on and off.

OAEE046401N

The luggage room lamp comes on when the liftgate is opened.

NOTICE

The luggage room lamp comes on as long as the liftgate is open. To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close the liftgate securely after using the luggage room.

3-104

Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)

OAD045410

Push the switch to turn the light on or off.

• : The lamp will turn on if this button is pressed.

• : The lamp will turn off if this button is pressed.

NOTICE

Always have the switch in the off position when the vanity mirror lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor is closed without the lamp off, it may discharge the battery or damage the sunvisor.

Puddle lamp (if equipped)

OAE046419

Welcome light

When all doors (and tailgate) are closed and locked, the puddle lamp will come on for 15 seconds if the door is unlocked by the smart key or outside door handle button.

For more details, refer to "Welcome

System" in this chapter.

Escort light


OFF position and the driver's door is opened, the puddle lamp will come on for 30 seconds. If the driver's door is closed within the 30 seconds, the puddle lamp will turn off after 15 seconds. If the driver's door is closed and locked, the puddle lamp will turn off immediately.

The Puddle Lamp Escort Light will turn on only the first time the driver's door is opened after the vehicle is turned off.

3

3-105


Welcome System (if equipped)

Welcome light (if equipped)

OAEE046400N

Puddle lamp (if equipped)

When all the doors (and liftgate) are closed and locked, the puddle lamp will come on for about 15 seconds if any of the below is performed.

• When the door unlock button is pressed on the smart key.

• When the button of the outside door handle is pressed with the smart key in possession.

• When the vehicle is approached with the smart key in possession.

Door handle lamp (if equipped)

When all the doors (and liftgate) are closed and locked, the door handle lamp will come on for about 15 seconds if any of the below is performed.


• When the button of the outside door handle is pressed with the smart key in possession.

• When the vehicle is approached with the smart key in possession.

Headlamp and parking lamp

When the headlamp (lamp switch in the headlamp or AUTO position) is on and all doors (and liftgate) are locked and closed, the parking lamp and headlamp will come on for 15 seconds if/or any of the below is performed.


At this time, if you press the door lock or unlock button, the parking lamp and headlamp will turn off immediately.


Welcome Light from the User

Settings mode on the LCD display.

For more details, refer to "LCD

Display" in this chapter.

3-106

Interior lamp

When the interior lamp switch is in the DOOR position and all doors (and liftgate) are closed and locked, the room lamp will come on for 30 seconds if any of the below is performed.


• When the button of the outside door handle is pressed.

At this time, if you press the door lock or unlock button, the room lamp will turn off immediately.

3-107

3


WIIP ER S A ND AS HE S

A : Wiper speed control

· MIST – Single wipe

· OFF – Off

· INT – Intermittent wipe

· LO – Low wiper speed

· HI – High wiper speed

OLF044278

Windshield Wipers

Operates as follows when the


MIST : For a single wiping cycle, push the lever upward and release. The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is held in this position.

OFF : Wiper is not in operation.

INT : Wiper operates intermittently at the same wiping intervals. To vary the speed setting, move the speed control lever. The top most setting will run the wipers most frequently (for more rain).

The bottom setting will run the wipers the least frequently (for less rain).

LO : The wiper runs at a lower speed.

HI : The wiper runs at a higher speed.

i

Information

If there is heavy accumulation of snow or ice on the windshield, defrost the windshield for about 10 minutes, or until the snow and/or ice is removed before using the windshield wipers to ensure proper operation.

If you do not remove the snow and/or ice before using the wiper and washer, it may damage the wiper and washer system.

B : Intermittent control wipe time adjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes

3-108

Windshield Washers

OLF044095N

In the OFF position, pull the lever gently toward you to spray washer fluid on the windshield and to run the wipers 1-3 cycles. The spray and wiper operation will continue until you release the lever. If the washer does not work, you may need to add washer fluid to the washer fluid reservoir.

WARNING

When the outside temperature is below freezing, ALWAYS warm the windshield using the defroster to help prevent the washer fluid from freezing on the windshield and obscuring your vision which could result in an accident and serious injury or death.

NOTICE

• To prevent possible damage to the washer pump, do not operate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty.

• To prevent possible damage to the wipers or windshield, do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

• To prevent possible damage to the wipers and washer system, use anti-freezing washer fluids in the winter season or cold weather.

3

3-109


D RIIV R A SIIS T S

Rear View Monitor

TE M

This is a supplemental system that provides a view of the area behind the vehicle through the A/V display while the vehicle is in the R (Reverse) position.

OAEE046417L

WARNING

•

Never rely solely on the Rear

View Monitor when backingup.

•

ALWAYS look around your vehicle to make sure there are no objects or obstacles before moving the vehicle in any direction to prevent a collision.

•

Always pay close attention when the vehicle is driven close to objects, particularly pedestrians, and especially children.

NOTICE

Always keep the monitor lens clean. The monitor may not work normally if the lens is covered with dirt or snow.

OAEE046416N

The Rear View Monitor will activate when the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode and when you shift to the R

(Reverse) position.

WARNING

The Rear View Monitor is not a safety device. It only serves to assist the driver in identifying objects directly behind the middle of the vehicle. The monitor does NOT cover the complete area behind the vehicle.

3-110

D EF OS R

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the conductors bonded to the inside surface of the rear window, never use sharp instruments or window cleaners containing abrasives to clean the window.

Rear Window Defroster

If you want to defrost and defog the front windshield, refer to the "Windshield Defrosting and

Defogging" section in this chapter.

OAEE046322L

The defroster heats the window to remove frost, fog and thin ice from the interior and exterior of the rear window while the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode.

• To activate the rear window defroster, press the rear window defroster button located in the center facia switch panel. The indicator on the rear window defroster button illuminates when the defroster is ON.

• To turn off the defroster, press the rear window defroster button again.

i

Information

• If there is heavy accumulation of snow on the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster.

• The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately

20 minutes or when the POWER button is in the OFF position.

Side view mirror defroster

If your vehicle is equipped with the side view mirror defrosters, they will operate at the same time you turn on the rear window defroster.

3

3-111


A UT OM AT C C LIIM TE ON RO L S YS TE M

■

Type A

■

Type B

1. Temperature control knob

2. Fan speed control knob

3. AUTO (automatic control) button

4. OFF button

5. Front windshield defrost button

6. Rear window defrost button

7. Air conditioning button

8. Air intake control button

9. Mode selection button

10. Driver only button

11. HEAT button

12. EV button

13. Climate control information screen


3-112

Automatic Heating and Air

Conditioning

OAEE046323L

The Automatic Climate Control

System is controlled by setting the desired temperature.

1. Press the AUTO button.

The modes, fan speeds, air intake and air-conditioning will be controlled automatically by the temperature setting you select.

OAEE046305

2. Turn the temperature control knob to the desired temperature. If the temperature is set to the lowest setting (Lo), the air conditioning system will operate continuously.

To turn the automatic operation off, select any button of the following:

- Mode selection button

- Front windshield defroster button

(Press the button one more time to deselect the front windshield defroster function. The 'AUTO' sign will illuminate on the information screen once again.)

- Fan speed control knob

The selected function will be controlled manually while other functions operate automatically.

For your convenience and to improve the effectiveness of the climate control, use the AUTO button and set the temperature to 73°F (23°C).



Press and hold the AUTO and OFF buttons on the climate control unit for

3 seconds.

3

3-113


OAEE046302N

NOTICE

Never place anything near the sensor to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system.

Manual Heating and Air

Conditioning

The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually by pushing buttons other than the AUTO button.

In this case, the system works sequentially according to the order of buttons selected.

When pressing any button except the

AUTO button while using automatic operation, the functions not selected will be controlled automatically.

1. Start the vehicle (

ON).

indicator

2. Set the mode to the desired position.

To improve the effectiveness of heating and cooling:

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.

7. Press the AUTO button in order to convert to full automatic control of the system.

3-114

Mode selection

OAEE046320

OAEE046303

The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system.

3

3-115


The air flow outlet direction is cycled as follows:

■

MODE DOWN ( )

■

MODE UP ( )

Floor & Defrost

(A, C, E)

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters.

Floor-Level (A, C, E)

Face-Level (B, D, F)

Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each outlet can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet.

Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defrosters.

OAEE046304

Defrost-Level (A)

Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters.

Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)

Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor.

3-116

■

Front

■

Rear

OAEE046321

Temperature control

Temperature conversion

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, the temperature mode display will reset to Fahrenheit.



- On the instrument cluster, go to

User Settings Mode

➝

Other

Features

➝

Temperature Unit.

- Press the AUTO button for 3 seconds while pressing the OFF button.

OAEE046305

Turn the knob to the right to increase the fan temperature and airflow. Turn the knob to the left to decrease fan temperature.

The temperature will increase or decrease by 1°F/0.5°C.

Both the temperature unit on the cluster LCD display and climate control information screen will change.

OAE046309

Interior panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or closed ( ) using the vent control lever.

Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivered from these vents using the vent control lever as shown.

3

3-117


Air intake control

This button is used to select the outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position.

■

Type A

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

■

Type B

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.

i

Information

Prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in excessively dry air in the passenger compartment.

OAEE046306

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

OAEE046314

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.

3-118

WARNING

•

Continued use of the climate control system operation in the recirculated air position can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, that may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. Set the air intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position as much as possible while driving.

•

Continued use of the climate control system operation in the recirculated air position

(without the air conditioning selected) may allow humidity to increase inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure visibility.

•

Do not sleep in a vehicle with the air conditioning or heating system on. It may cause serious injury or death due to a drop in the oxygen level and/or body temperature.

Fan speed control

OAEE046307

The fan speed can be set to the desired speed by turning the fan speed control knob.

The higher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered.

Pressing the OFF button turns off the fan.

i

Information

For better voice recognition, fan speed may automatically slow down for a couple of minutes when you activate voice recognition or hands free.

NOTICE

Operating the fan when the

POWER button is in the ON position could cause the battery to discharge. Operate the blower when the vehicle is in the ready

( ) mode.

3

3-119


Driver only Air conditioning HEAT button

■

Type A

OAEE046310

■

Type B

OAE046314

If you press the DRIVER ONLY button(

DRIVER

ONLY

) and the indicator light illuminates, cold air mostly blows in the direction of the driver’s seat.

However, some of the cold air may come out of other seating position ducts to keep indoor air pleasant.

If you use the button with no passenger in the front passenger seat, energy consumption will be reduced.

DRIVER ONLY button will be turned off under the following conditions:

1) Defrost on (the DRIVER ONLY button indicator is not turned off)

2) DRIVER ONLY button re-push

3-120

OAEE046308

Push the A/C button to manually turn the system on (indicator light will illuminate) and off.

OAEE046313

Push the HEAT button to turn the heater on (indicator light will illuminate).

Push the button again to turn the heater off.

Air conditioner/Heater uses energy from the battery. If you use the heater or air conditioner for too long, distance to empty can be reduced due to increased power consumption.

Turn off the heater and air conditioner if not necessary.

EV mode (if equipped) OFF mode

OAEE046311

Push the EV button to enter the EV mode on the AVN screen.

The EV mode has a total of 7 menus including Range, Nearby Stations,

Energy Information, Drive Mode,

ECO Driving, Charging/Climate

Settings and EV Settings.

For details on EV mode, refer to the Multimedia System manual that is provided separately.

OAEE046309

Push the OFF button to turn the climate control system off. You can still operate the mode and air intake buttons as long as the POWER button is in the ON position.

3

3-121


System Operation

Ventilation

1. Select the Face Level mode.




Heating

1. Select the Floor Level mode.




5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn the air conditioning system on.

If the windshield fogs up, select the

Floor & Defrost mode or press the Front Defrost mode.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the car through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. Return the control to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable.

• To prevent the inside of the windshield from fogging, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature.

Air conditioning

All HYUNDAI Air Conditioning

Systems are filled with environmentally friendly R-134a refrigerant.

1. Start the vehicle.

2. Push the air conditioning button.

3. Set the mode to the Face Level mode.

4. Set the air intake control to the recirculated air position. However, prolonged operation of the recirculated air position will excessively dry the air. In this case, change the air position.

5. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort.

When maximum cooling is desired, set the temperature control to the extreme left position then set the fan speed control to the highest speed.

3-122

Air conditioning system operation tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in direct sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle escape.

• After sufficient cooling has been achieved, switch back from the recirculated air to the fresh outside air position.

• To help reduce moisture inside of the windows on rainy or humid days, decrease the humidity inside the vehicle by operating the air conditioning system with the windows and sunroof closed.

• Use the air conditioning system every month only for a few minutes to ensure maximum system performance.

• If you operate air conditioner excessively, the difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of visibility. In this case, set the mode selection knob or button to the position and fan speed control to the lower speed.

System Maintenance

Climate control air filter

Outside air

Recirculated air

Blower

Climate control air filter

Evaporator core

Heater core

1LDA5047

This filter is installed behind the glove box. It filters the dust or other pollutants that enter the vehicle through the heating and air conditioning system.

Have the climate control air filter replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to the maintenance schedule. If the car is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty or rough roads, more frequent air conditioner filter inspections and changes are required.

If the air flow rate suddenly decreases, the system should be checked at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

3-123

3


Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also has a negative influence on the air conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, have the system inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, damage to the compressor and abnormal system operation may occur.

WARNING

Because the refrigerant is at very high pressure, the air conditioning system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. It is important that the correct type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used, otherwise damage to the vehicle and personal injury may occur.

Air conditioning refrigerant label

■

Example

POE

The air conditioning system should be serviced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

OLFP046583N

The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Each symbols and specification on air conditioning refrigerant label means as below :

1. Classification of refrigerant

2. Amount of refrigerant

3. Classification of Compressor lubricant

Refer to chapter 8 for more detail location of the air conditioning refrigerant label.

3-124

WIIN DS HIIE LD EF OS TIIN G A

WARNING

Windshield heating

Do not use the or position during cooling operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of visibility could cause an accident resulting in serious injury or death. In this case, set the mode selection knob or button to the position and fan speed control knob or button to a lower speed.

D D EF GG

• For maximum defrosting, set the temperature control to the extreme right/hot position and the fan speed control to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired while defrosting or defogging, set the mode to the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and ice from the windshield, rear window, side view mirrors, and all side windows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to improve heater and defroster efficiency and to reduce the probability of fogging up the inside of the windshield.

To Defog Inside Windshield

■ Type A

■

Type B

OAEE046317L

1. Select desired fan speed.

2. Select desired temperature.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).

4. The outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically.

If the outside (fresh) air position is not selected automatically, adjust the corresponding button manually.

If the position is selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.

3

3-125


To Defrost Outside Windshield

■

Type A

■

Type B

OAEE046318L

1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme hot (HI) position.


4. The outside (fresh) air position will be selected automatically.

If the position is selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed.

Defogging Logic

To reduce the probability of fogging up the inside of the windshield, the air intake or air conditioning are controlled automatically according to certain conditions such as or position. To cancel or return the defogging logic, do the following.

1. Turn the POWER button to the ON position.


3. While pressing the air conditioning button (A/C), press the air intake control button at least 5 times within 3 seconds.

The air intake control button indicator will blink 3 times. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic status.

Auto Defogging System

OAEE046312N

Auto defogging system reduces the possibility of fogging up the inside of the windshield by automatically sensing the moisture of inside the windshield.

The auto defogging system operates when the heater or air conditioning is on.

i

Information

The auto defogging system may not operate normally, when the outside temperature is below 50 °F (10 °C).

3-126

When the Auto Defogging

System operates, the indicator will illuminate.

If higher level of moisture are sensed in the vehicle, the Auto Defogging System will operate in the following order:

Step 1 : Outside air position

Step 2 : Operating the air conditioning

Step 3 : Blowing air toward the windshield

Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward the windshield

If the air conditioning is off or recirculated air position is manually selected while Auto Defogging System is

ON, the Auto Defogging System

Indicator will blink 3 times to signal that the manual operation has been canceled.

To cancel or reset the

Auto Defogging System

Press the front windshield defroster button for 3 seconds when the


When the Auto Defogging System is canceled, ADS OFF symbol will blink

3 times and the ADS OFF will be displayed on the climate control information screen.

When the Auto Defogging System is reset, ADS OFF symbol will blink 6 times without a signal.

i

Information

• When the air conditioning is turned on by Auto defogging system, if you try to turn off the air conditioning, the indicator will blink 3 times and the air conditioning will not be turned off.

• For efficiency, do not select recirculated air position while Auto defogging system is operating.

• When Auto defogging mode is selected, fan speed, temperature and intake mode which is adjusted manually are canceled for better defogging result.

NOTICE

Do not remove the sensor cover located on the upper end of the windshield glass.

Damage to system parts could occur and may not be covered by your vehicle warranty.

3

3-127


C LIIM TE ON RO

A DD TIIO NA FE AT RE

F E QU PE

Automatic Ventilation

(if equipped)


ON position or when the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode and temperature is below 59°F (15°C) with the recirculated air position selected more than five minutes, the air intake position will automatically change to the outside (fresh) air position.

S TO AG E C OM RT ME T

WARNING

Never store cigarette lighters, propane cylinders, or other flammable/explosive materials in the vehicle. These items may catch fire and/or explode if the vehicle is exposed to hot temperatures for extended periods.

To cancel or reset the Automatic

Ventilation

When the air conditioning system is on, select Face Level mode, press the recirculated air position button for three seconds.

WARNING

ALWAYS keep the storage compartment covers closed securely while driving. Items inside your vehicle are moving as fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, the items may fly out of the compartment and may cause an injury if they strike the driver or a passenger.

NOTICE

To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartments.

Center Console Storage

OAEE046418

To open :

Grab and hold the latch (1) on the arm rest then lift the lid.

3-128

Glove Box Sunglass Holder

To open:

Pull the lever (1).

OAEE046427

WARNING

ALWAYS close the glove box door after use.

An open glove box door can cause serious injury to the passenger in an accident, even if the passenger is wearing a seat belt.

OAD045413

To open:

Push and release the cover and the holder will slowly open. Place your sunglasses in the compartment door with the lenses facing out.

To close:

Push back into position.

Make sure the sunglass holder is closed while driving.

WARNING

•

Do not keep objects except sunglasses inside the sunglass holder. Such objects can be thrown from the holder in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle.

•

Do not open the sunglass holder while the vehicle is moving. The rear view mirror of the vehicle can be blocked by an open sunglass holder.

•

Do not put the glasses forcibly into a sunglass holder. It may cause personal injury if you try to open it forcibly when the glasses are jammed in holder.

3

3-129


Multi Box

OAEE046402L

IIN TE RIIO R F EA UR S

Cup Holder

■

Front

■

Rear

OAEE046404L

OAEE046403

Use the multi box to keep small objects.

WARNING

Do not keep objects that can be thrown from the multi box and severely injure passengers in the vehicle in the event of a sudden stop or an accident.

3-130

OAE046424

Cups or small beverages cups may be placed in the cup holders.

Rear (if equipped)

Pull the armrest down to use the cup holders.

WARNING

•

Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is in use to prevent spilling your drink. If hot liquid spills, you could be burned. Such a burn to the driver could cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

•

Do not place uncovered or unsecured cups, bottles, cans, etc., in the cup holder containing hot liquid while the vehicle is in motion. Injuries may result in the event of sudden stop or collision.

•

Only use soft cups in the cup holders. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.

WARNING

Keep cans or bottles out of direct sun light and do not put them in a hot vehicle. It may explode.

Sunvisor

NOTICE

Close the vanity mirror cover securely and return the sunvisor to its original position after use.

NOTICE

• Keep your drinks sealed while driving to prevent spilling your drink. If liquid spills, it may get into the vehicle's electrical/electronic system and damage electrical/electronic parts.

• When cleaning spilled liquids, do not dry the cup holder at high temperature. This may damage the cup holder.

WARNING

For your safety, do not block your view when using the sunvisor.

OAEE046511N

To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.

To use a sunvisor for a side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).

To use the vanity mirror, pull down the sunvisor and slide the mirror cover (3).

Adjust the sunvisor forward or backward (4) as needed (if equipped). Use the ticket holder (5) to hold tickets (if equipped).

NOTICE

Do not put several tickets in the ticket holder at one time. This could cause damage to the ticket holder.

3

3-131


Power Outlet (if equipped)

OAEE046405L

The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehicle electrical systems. The devices should draw less than 180 W

(Watts) with the vehicle in the ready

( ) mode.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the Power

Outlets :

• Use the power outlet only when the vehicle is in the ready ( mode and remove the accessory

) plug after use. Using the accessory plug for prolonged periods of time with the vehicle off could cause the battery to discharge.

• Only use 12V electric accessories which are less than 180 W

(Watts) in electric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner or heater to the lowest operating level when using the power outlet.

• Close the cover when not in use.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plugged into a vehicle’s power outlet. These devices may cause excessive audio static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used in your vehicle.

• Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat and the fuse may open.

• Plug in battery equipped electrical/electronic devices with reverse current protection. The current from the battery may flow into the vehicle's electrical/ electronic system and cause system malfunction.

WARNING

Avoid electrical shocks. Do not place your fingers or foreign objects (pin, etc.) into a power outlet or touch the power outlet with a wet hand.

3-132

Wireless Cellular Phone

Charging System (if equipped)

OAEE046407L

There is a wireless cellular phone charger inside the front console.

The system is available when all doors are closed, and when the

POWER button is in the ACC/

ON/START position.

To charge a cellular phone

The wireless cellular phone charging system charges only the Qi-enabled cellular phones ( ). Read the label on the cellular phone accessory cover or visit your cellular phone manufacturer’s website to check whether your cellular phone supports the Qi technology.

The wireless charging process starts when you put a Qi-enabled cellular phone on the wireless charging unit.

1. Remove other items, including the smart key, from the wireless charging unit. If not, the wireless charging process may be interrupted.

Place the cellular phone on the center of charging pad.

2. The indicator light is orange when the cellular phone is chargeing.

The indicator light turns green when phone charging is completed.

3. You can turn ON or OFF the wireless charging function in the user settings mode on the instrument cluster. (For further information, refer to the "LCD Display Modes" in this chapter.)

If your cellular phone is not charging:

- Slightly change the position of the cellular phone on the charging pad.

- Make sure the indicator light is orange.

The indicator light will blink orange for 10 seconds if there is a malfunction in the wireless charging system.

In this case, temporarily stop the charging process, and re-attempt to wirelessly charge your cellular phone again.

The system warns you with a message on the LCD display if the cellular phone is still on the wireless charging unit after the POWER button is in the OFF position and the front door is opened.

i

Information

For some manufacturers' cellular phones, the system may not warn you even though the cellular phone is left on the wireless charging unit. This is due to the particular characteristic of the cellular phone and not a malfunction of the wireless charging.

3-133

3


NOTICE

• The wireless cellular phone charging system may not support certain cellular phones, which are not verified for the Qi specification ( ).

• When placing your cellular phone on the charging mat, position the phone in the middle of the mat for optimal charging performance. If your cell phone is off to the side, the charging rate may be less and in some cases the cell phone may experience higher heat conduction.

• In some cases, the wireless charging may stop temporarily when the Smart Key is used, either when starting the vehicle or locking/unlocking the doors, etc.

• When charging certain cellular phones, the charging indicator may not change to green when the cell phone is fully charged.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• The wireless charging process may temporarily stop, when temperature abnormally increases inside the wireless cellular phone charging system. The wireless charging process restarts, when temperature falls to a proper level.

• The wireless charging process may temporarily stop when there is any metallic item, such as a coin, between the wireless cellular phone charging system and a cellular phone.

• For certain cellular phone with their own protection, the wireless charging speed may decrease and the wireless charging may stop.

• If the cellular phone has a thick cover, the wireless charging may not be possible.

• If the cell phone is not completely contacting the charging pad, wireless charging may not operate properly.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Some magnetic items like credit cards, phone cards or rail tickets may be damaged if left with the cellular phone during the charging process.

• If the cellular phone without the wireless charging function or the metallic items are placed on the charging pad, it may cause slight noise. This noise does not affect the cellular phone and the vehicle, because this noise is an operating sound during determining the item on the charging pad.

• If the POWER button is in the

OFF position, the charging also stops.

3-134

Clock

WARNING

Do not adjust the clock while driving, you may lose your steering control and cause an accident that results in severe personal injury or death.

Vehicles with Audio system

Select the [SETUP] button on the audio system

➟

Select [Date/Time].

• Set time : Set the time displayed on the audio screen.

• Time format : Choose between 12hour and 24-hour time formats.

Clothes Hanger (if equipped)

Vehicles with Navigation system

Select the Settings menu on the

Navigation system

➟

Select

[Date/Time].

• GPS time : Displays time according to the received GNSS time.

• 24-hour : Switches to 12 hour or 24 hour.

OAEE046434

These hangers are not designed to hold large or heavy items.

3

3-135


WARNING

Floor Mat Anchor(s)

OGSB047265L

Do not hang other objects such as hangers or hard objects except clothes. Also, do not put heavy, sharp or breakable objects in the clothes pockets.

In an accident or when the curtain air bag is inflated, it may cause vehicle damage or personal injury.

OAE046430

ALWAYS use the Floor Mat Anchors to attach the front floor mats to the vehicle. The anchors on the front floor carpet keep the floor mats from sliding forward.

WARNING

Do not overlay additional mats or liners over the floor mats. If using All Weather mats, remove the carpeted floor mats before installing them. Only use floor mats designed to connect to the anchors.

WARNING

The following must be observed when installing ANY floor mat to the vehicle.

•

Ensure that the floor mats are securely attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchor(s) before driving the vehicle.

•

Do not use ANY floor mat that cannot be firmly attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchors.

•

Do not stack floor mats on top of one another (e.g. all-weather rubber mat on top of a carpeted floor mat). Only a single floor mat should be installed in each position.

IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was manufactured with driver’s side floor mat anchors that are designed to securely hold the floor mat in place. To avoid any interference with pedal operation, HYUNDAI recommends that the HYUNDAI floor mat designed for use in your vehicle be installed.

3-136

Cargo Security Screen

(if equipped)

To use the cargo security screen When the cargo security screen is not in use:

1. Pull the cargo security screen backward and up to release it from the guides.

2. The cargo security screen will automatically slide back in.

OAEE046422

Use the cargo security screen to hide items stored in the cargo area.

OAEE046423

1. Pull the cargo security screen towards the rear of the vehicle by the handle (1).

2. Insert the guide pin into the guide

(2).

NOTICE

The cargo security screen may not automatically slide back in if the cargo security screen is not fully pulled out. Fully pull it out and then let go.

NOTICE

Pull out the cargo security screen with the handle in the center to prevent the guide pin from falling out of the guide.

3

3-137


To remove the cargo security screen

OAEE046409N

1. Push out the lower part of guide pins in both sides.

2. While pushing in one side of the guide pin, pull out the cargo security screen.

OAEE046424L

3. Open the luggage tray and keep the cargo security screen in the tray.

3-138

Multimedia System

Multimedia System.................................................4-2

AUX, USB and iPod ® port ...............................................4-2

Antenna ...............................................................................4-2

Steering Wheel Audio Controls......................................4-3

Bluetooth

® Wireless Technology Hands-Free...........4-4

Audio (Display Audio) / Video /

Navigation System (AVN).................................................4-5

How Vehicle Audio Works ...............................................4-5

Features of Your Vehicle.................................................4-7

Audio (with Touch Screen) .................................4-10

Feature of Your Audio ...................................................4-11

Radio...................................................................................4-16

SiriusXM ............................................................................4-18

Media..................................................................................4-19

Phone .................................................................................4-32

Setup ..................................................................................4-41

Declaration of Conformity..................................4-44

FCC .....................................................................................4-44

4

Multimedia System

M UL TIIM ED

NOTICE

SY ST M

• If you install an aftermarket HID head lamp, your vehicle's audio and electronic devices may not function properly.

• Prevent chemicals such as perfume, cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and air freshener from contacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discoloration.

AUX, USB and iPod

®

Port

Antenna

Shark fin antenna

OAEE046411N

You can use an AUX port or USB cable to connect audio devices to the vehicle AUX or USB port.

OAEE046410/Q

The shark fin antenna will receive the transmit data (example: AM/FM,

SXM signal, GPS).

i

Information

When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet, noise may occur during playback. If this happens, use the power source of the portable audio device.

❈ iPod

® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

4-2

Roof antenna

■

Type A

■

Type B

OAE046481L

NOTICE

• Before entering a place with a low height clearance or a car wash, remove the antenna by rotating it counterclockwise. If not, the antenna may be damaged.

• When reinstalling your antenna, it is important that it is fully tightened and adjusted to the upright position to ensure proper reception.

Steering Wheel Audio Control

OAE046438

NOTICE

Do not operate multiple audio remote control buttons simultaneously.

4

OAE048481N

The roof antenna receives both AM and FM broadcast signals, SXM signals (only type B). Rotate the roof antenna in a counterclockwise direction to remove it. Rotate it in a clockwise direction to reinstall it.

4-3

Multimedia System

VOLUME (VOL + / - ) (1)

• Press the VOLUME switch up to increase volume.

• Press the VOLUME switch down to decrease volume.

SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)

If the SEEK/PRESET switch is pressed up or down and held for 0.8

second or more, it will function in the following modes:

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK select button. It will SEEK until you release the button.

MEDIA mode

It will function as the FF/RW button.

If the SEEK/PRESET switch is pressed up or down, it will function in the following modes:

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STA-

TION UP/DOWN button.

MEDIA mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/

DOWN button.

4-4

MODE (3)

Press the MODE button to toggle through Radio, SXM, or AUX modes.

MUTE ( ) (4)

• Press the MUTE button to mute the sound.

• Press the MUTE button again to activate the sound.

i

Information

Detailed information for audio control buttons is described later in this chapter or in the Car Multimedia User's

Manual that was supplied with this vehicle

Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology Hands-Free

OAE046440

OAE046447

You can use the phone wirelessly by using the Bluetooth ® Wireless

Technology.

(1) Call / Answer button

(2) Call end button

(3) Microphone

Detailed information for the

Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology hands-free is described later in this chapter or in the Car Multimedia

User's Manual.

How Vehicle Audio Works

FM reception

Audio (Display Audio) / Video /

Navigation System (AVN)

(if equipped)

Detailed information for the AVN system is described in the Car

Multimedia User's Manual.

JBM001

AM and FM radio signals are broadcasted from transmitter towers located around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal is then processed by the radio and sent to your vehicle speakers.

When a strong radio signal has reached your vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio system ensures the best possible quality reproduction. However, in some cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear.

This can be due to factors, such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in the area.

4

4-5

Multimedia System

AM reception FM radio station

JBM002

AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long distance, low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than travelling straight. In addition, they curve around obstructions resulting in better signal coverage.

JBM003

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth's surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade within short distances from the station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains, and obstructions. This can lead to undesirable or unpleasant listening conditions which might lead you to believe a problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not indicate radio trouble:

JBM004

• Fading - As your vehicle moves away from the radio station, the signal will weaken and sound will begin to fade. When this occurs, we suggest that you select another stronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.

4-6

Features of Your Vehicle

Satellite radio reception

You may experience difficulties in receiving SiriusXM ® satellite radio signals in the following situations.

• If you are driving on a mountain road where is the signal blocked by mountains.

• If you are driving in an area with tall trees that block the signal (30 ft.

/10m or more), for example on an road that goes through a dense forest.

JBM005

• Station Swapping - As an FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may begin to play. This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being received from several directions can cause distortion or fluttering. This can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by signals from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select another station until the condition has passed.

SATELLITE1

• If you are driving in a tunnel or a covered parking area.

• If you are driving beneath the top level of a multi-level freeway.

• If you are driving under a bridge.

• If you are driving next to a tall vehicle (such as a truck or a bus) that blocks the signal.

• If you are driving in a valley where the surrounding hills or peaks block the signal from the satellite.

SATELLITE2

• The signal can become weak in some areas that are not covered by the SiriusXM ® repeater network.

4-7

4

Multimedia System

i

Information

There may also be additional unforeseen circumstances leading to reception problems with the SiriusXM ® satellite radio signal.

Advisory Messages, such as 'CH

Unavailable' may occur when starting

SiriusXM

®

Radio.

Using a cellular phone or a twoway radio

When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, noise may be produced from the audio system. This does not mean that something is wrong with the audio equipment. In such a case, try to operate mobile devices as far from the audio equipment as possible.

CAUTION

When using a communication system such as a cellular phone or a radio set inside the vehicle, a separate external antenna must be fitted. When a cellular phone or a radio set is used with an internal antenna alone, it may interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and adversely affect safe operation of the vehicle.

WARNING

Do not use a cellular phone while driving. Stop at a safe location to use a cellular phone or set up the hands-free calling feature.

NOTE:

Order of playing files (folders) :

1. Song playing order : sequentially.

to

2. Folder playing order :

❋

If no song file is contained in the folder, that folder is not displayed.

4-8

iPod

®

iPod

®

is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth

®

word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by HYUNDAI is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

Pandora

®

Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora

Media, Inc. Used with permission.

Pandora is only available in certain countries. Please visit http://www.pandora.com/legal for more information.

4

4-9

Multimedia System

A UD h T ou h S crre n))

■

Type A

■

Type B

(With

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology)

G2H4G0000EU/G2H4G0001EU

4-10

Feature of Your Audio

Head unit

■

Type A

■

Type B

❈

The actual features in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

(1) LCD screen

• Tap the screen to select a button.

(2) POWER/VOL knob

• Turn to adjust the volume.

• Press to turn the device on or off.

(5) SEEK/TRACK

• Search for next station in FM or AM radio mode.

• Search for next station in SiriusXM* radio mode.

• Change the current song in media mode.

* if equipped

(6) RESET

• Shutdown and restart the system.

(3) RADIO

• Start FM, AM and SiriusXM*.

* if equipped

(4) MEDIA

• Select USB(iPod

®

), Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology(BT) Audio,

AUX and My Music or Pandora.

• Display the media menu when two or more media are connected or when the [MEDIA] button is pressed in media mode.

4

4-11

Multimedia System

■

Type A

■

Type B

(7) PHONE

• Start

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology

Phone mode.

(8) SETUP

• Access Display, Sound, Date/Time,

Bluetooth, System, Screen Saver and Display Off settings.

(9) TUNE knob

• Turn to navigate through the stations/songs list.

• Press to select an item.

4-12

Steering wheel remote control

(3) MUTE

• Press to mute audio output.

(4) VOLUME

• Press to adjust the volume.

❈

The actual features in the may differ from the illustration.

(1) VOICE

• Pressing the button

- If Siri is not active: Starts Siri.

- If Siri is active: Re-starts Siri.

• Pressing and holding the button:

Siri is deactivated.

(2) MODE

• Press the button to change the mode in the following order: Radio

➟

Media.

• Press and hold the button to turn off.

(5) SEEK/TRACK

• Press the button in radio mode to search Presets.

• Press and hold the button in radio mode to search frequencies.

• Press the button in media mode to change the current song.

• Press and hold the button in media mode to quick search through songs.

(6) CALL

• Pressing the button

- If not in

Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology Handsfree mode or receiving a phone call.

First press: Display Dial Number screen.

Second press: Automatically display the most recently Dialed

Call number.

Third press: Dial the phone number entered.

- Press in the Incoming Call notification screen to accept the phone call.

- Press in Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology Handsfree mode to switch to the waiting call.

• Pressing and holding the button

- If not in Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology Handsfree mode or receiving a phone call, the most recently Dialed Call number is dialed.

- Press in Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology Handsfree mode to transfer the call to your cell phone.

- Press in cell phone mode to switch to Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology Handsfree mode.

(7) END

• Press in Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology Handsfree mode to end the phone call.

• Press in the incoming call screen to reject the call.

4-13

4

Multimedia System

WARNING

•

Do not stare at the screen while driving. Staring at the screen for prolonged periods of time could lead to traffic accidents.

•

Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify the audio system.

Such acts could result in accidents, fire, or electric shock.

•

Using the phone while driving may lead to a lack of attention of traffic conditions and increase the likelihood of accidents. Use the phone feature after parking the vehicle.

•

Exercise caution not to spill water or introduce foreign objects into the device. Such acts could lead to smoke, fire, or product malfunction.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

Please refrain from use if the screen is blank or no sound can be heard as these signs may indicate product malfunction. Continued use in such conditions could lead to accidents (fires, electric shock) or product malfunctions.

•

Do not touch the antenna during thunder or lightening as such acts may lead to lightning induced electric shock.

•

Do not stop or park in parking-restricted areas to operate the product. Such acts could lead to traffic accidents.

WARNING

Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver’s primary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver’s eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permissible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle.

4-14

i

Information

• If you want to change the position of device installation, please inquire with your place of purchase or service maintenance center. Technical expertise is required to install or disassemble the device.

• Turn on the car ignition before using this device. Do not operate the audio system for long periods of time with the ignition turned off as such operations may lead to battery discharge.

NOTICE

• Do not subject the device to severe shock or impact. Direct pressure onto the front side of the monitor may cause damage to the LCD or touch screen.

• When cleaning the device, make sure to turn off the device and use a dry and smooth cloth.

Never use tough materials, chemical cloths, or solvents

(alcohol, benzene, thinners, etc.)

As such materials may damage the device panel or cause color/quality deterioration.

• Do not place beverages close to the audio system. Spilling beverages may lead to system malfunction.

• Placing the audio system within an electromagnetic environment may result in noise interference.

i

Information

In this case of product malfunction, please contact your dealer or vehicle service center.

Information on status icons

Icons showing audio status are shown in the upper-right corner of the screen.

Icon Description

Mute Mute engaged

Battery

Remaining battery life of a connected Bluetooth

®

device

Handsfree +

Audio streaming connection

Handsfree connection

Bluetaooth

®

audio streaming

Bluetooth

®

Handsfree call and audio streaming available

Bluetooth

®

call available

Handsfree

Bluetooth

®

audio streaming available

Downloading contacts

Downloading call history

Downloading contacts through Bluetooth

®

wireless communications

Downloading call history through Bluetooth

®

wireless communications

Line busy Phone call in progress

Mute mic

Phone signal strength

Mic muted during a call

(caller cannot hear your voice)

Display the phone signal strength for a cell phone connected by Bluetooth

®

4-15

4

Multimedia System

Radio

(5) Presets 1~40

Save or listen to favorite stations.

You can listen to FM, AM and

SiriusXM* radio.

Switching between FM, AM and

SiriusXM*

• Press the [RADIO] button on the audio system to switch between

FM, AM and SiriusXM*.

• Select [Band] on the screen to switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM*.

* if equipped

(1) Band

Switch between FM, AM and

SiriusXM*.

* if equipped

Searching stations

Searching stations by pressing the

[SEEK/TRACK] button on the product.

(2) Presets

Change the preset number on the main screen.

< Presets >

By selecting [< Presets >], the buttons for Presets 1~40 displayed on the screen can be changed.

(3) List

Display all available stations.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

4-16

Presets 1~40

Press the button to listen to a preset.

Press and hold the button number to save the current station. If the slot is empty, simply pressing saves the station to the slot.

List

A list of all available stations is displayed. Press the desired station.

Favorite stations can be saved to

[Presets] by selecting the [+].

Menu

Select [Menu], and select the desired function.

• Presets: Save up to 40 frequently used stations.

To listen to a preset, press the desired station.

Press and hold the desired slot from 1 through 40. This saves the current station in the selected slot.

If the slot is empty, simply pressing saves the station to the slot.

• Scan: All stations available in the current location of the vehicle are played for five seconds each.

• Information: View detailed station information.

• Sound Settings: Audio sound settings can be changed.

• Station Info: Set whether to receive station information such as Station

Name, Program Type or Information.

i

Information -

SiriusXM ®

Satellite Radio information

(if equipped)

• Satellite Radio channels:

Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a

3-month trial subscription to the

Sirius Select package. You’ll get over variable channels, including commercial free music, plus all your favorite sports, exclusive talk, entertainment, and a selection of premium programming. For more information and a complete list of SiriusXM channels, visit siriusxm.com in the United States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call

SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

• Satellite Radio reception factors:

To receive the satellite signal, your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed, open view of the sky, a requirement of a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception performance:

(Continued)

(Continued)

- Antenna obstructions: For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible.

• SiriusXM Satellite Radio service:

SiriusXM is a subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and entertainment programming to radio receivers, which are available for installation in motor vehicles or factory installed, as well as for the home, portable and wireless devices, and through an Internet connection on a personal computer.

Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SiriusXM Satellite

Radio system include:

- Hardware and an introductory trial subscription term, which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle.

- For a small upgrade fee, access to

SiriusXM music channels, and other select channels over the

Internet using any computer connected to the Internet (U.S. customers only).

(Continued)

(Continued)

• SiriusXM services require a subscription sold separately, or as a package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If you decide to continue service after your trial, the subscription plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you will be charged according to your chosen payment method at then-current rates. Fees and taxes apply. To cancel you must call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349.

See SiriusXM Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data services are available only in the 48 contiguous states, DC and

Puerto Rico (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM satellite service is also available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and programming subject to change. Sirius,

XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio

Inc.

4-17

4

Multimedia System

SiriusXM

(1) Band

Switch between FM, AM and

SiriusXM.

(2) Presets

Change the preset number on the main screen.

(3) List

Display all channels.

(5) Presets 1~40

Save or listen to favorite channels.

(6) Play Live

Switches to the live broadcast mode.

Switching between FM, AM and

SiriusXM

• Press the [RADIO] button on the audio system to switch between

FM, AM and SiriusXM.

• Select [Band] on the screen to switch between FM, AM and SiriusXM.

(7) Skip Backward

Repeats the previously broadcasted program.

- Holding for less than 0.8 seconds:

Moves to the previous segment.

- Holding for more than 0.8 seconds:

Moves to the previous 5 seconds.

(8) Play/Pause

Pauses/plays the current broadcasting program.

Searching channels

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to search channels.

< Presets >

By selecting [< Presets >], the buttons for Presets 1~40 displayed on the screen can be changed.

(9) Skip Forward

Moves to the next segment.

Presets 1~40

Press the button to listen to a preset.

Press and hold the button number to save the current channel.

(4) Menu


List

A list of all channels is displayed.

Press the desired channel.

Favorite channels can be saved to

[Presets] by selecting the [+].

4-18

Menu


• Presets: Save up to 40 frequently used channels.

To listen to a preset, press the desired channel.

Press and hold the desired slot from 1 through 40. This saves the current channel in the selected slot.

If the slot is empty, simply pressing saves the channel to the slot.

• Categories: Channels can be searched by category.

• Direct Tune: The desired channel can be selected by entering numbers.


• Tag Song: Tag the current song information.

When an Apple device (iPhone

®

, iPod

®

) is connected, tagged song information is sent automatically to the connected device.

i

Information

Up to 50 songs can be tagged.

Media

• Scan: All channels available in the vehicle's current location are played for ten seconds each.

• Program Schedule: View the

Program schedule.

• Featured Favorites: The Featured

Favorites feature allows SiriusXM™ to broadcast additional presets.

- Example 1: During holidays,

"Holiday Music" might include all

SiriusXM™ channels that are playing holiday music for easy access by users.

Multiple sets of Featured Favorites data can be broadcast by SiriusXM™ and can change from time to time.

• Information: View detailed channel information.

• Category Lock: Search or scan channels in the current category only.

i

Information -

Using MP3

Supported audio formats

MPEG1 Audio Layer3

Compressed audio formats

MPEG2 Audio Layer3

MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3

Windows Media Audio Ver 7.X

& 8.X

File formats other than the formats above may not be recognized or playable. Information such as file name may not be displayed.

4

4-19

Multimedia System

Range of supported compressed file types

1. Bitrate range (Kbps)

80

96

112

128

160

192

MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2.5

WMA

Layer3 High Range

32

40

8

16

8

16

48

64

48

56

64

24

32

40

24

32

40

80

96

128

160

192

48

56

64

80

96

112

48

56

64

80

96

112

224

256

320

128

144

160

128

144

160

2. Sampling frequency (Hz)

MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2.5

44100 22050 11025

48000

32000

24000

16000

12000

8000

WMA

32000

44100

48000

• The sound quality of MP3/WMA compressed files may vary depending on the bitrate. (A higher bitrate can have better sound quality.)

• The product only recognizes files with the MP3 or WMA extension.

Files without one of these extensions are not recognized.

Languages supported (Unicode support)

• Korean: 2,604 characters

• English: 94 characters

• Common Chinese characters: 4,888 characters

• Special symbols: 986 characters

Japanese/Simplified Chinese characters are not supported.

3. Number of recognizable folders and files

• Folders: 2,000 for USB

• Files: 6,000 for USB

• No recognition limit for folder hierarchies

4. Character display range (Unicode)

• Filenames: Up to 64 English characters (64 Korean characters)

• Foldername: Up to 32 English characters (32 Korean characters)

4-20

i

Information

-

Using the USB Devices

• Starting the vehicle while a USB device is connected can damage the device. Please disconnect USB devices before starting the vehicle.

• Starting the vehicle or stopping the engine while an external USB device is connected can result in failure of the external USB device to operate.

• Be cautious of static electricity when connecting/disconnecting external

USB devices.

• An encrypted MP3 player is not recognized when connected as an external device.

• External USB devices may not be recognized, depending on the state of the external USB device.

• Only products with byte/sectors formatted at 4 KB or lower are recognized.

• Only USB devices in FAT12/16/32 format are recognized; NTFS and

ExFAT file systems are not recognized.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Some USB devices are not recognized due to compatibility issues.

• Do not touch the USB connections.

• Connecting and disconnecting USB devices rapidly over a short period of time can cause equipment failure.

• Abnormal sounds may be audible when the USB device is disconnected.

• Turn the audio off before connecting or disconnecting external USB devices.

• Recognition may take longer depending on the type, capacity or file format of the external USB device. This is not a product malfunction.

• Use of USB devices for purposes other than playing music files is prohibited.

• Image display and video playback are not supported.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• Use of USB accessories, including charge and heat though the USB I/F, can lead to reduced product performance or malfunctions. Do not use USB devices or accessories for these purposes.

• Use of aftermarket USB hubs and extension cables can result in the vehicle’s audio system failing to recognize your USB device. Connect the USB device directly to the multimedia port of your vehicle.

• When using high-capacity USB devices with logical drive divisions, only files saved on the highest level logical drive can be played.

If applications are loaded on a USB drive, file playback may fail.

• Some MP3 players, cell phones, digital cameras, etc. (USB devices that are not recognized as mobile storage) may not operate normally when connected.

• USB charging may not be supported by some mobile devices.

(Continued)

4

4-21

Multimedia System

(Continued)

• Operation is guaranteed only for standard (Metal Cover Type) USB

Memory drives.

• Operation of HDD, CF, SD and memory stick devices is not guaranteed.

• DRM (Digital Rights Management) files cannot be played.

• SD-type USB memory, CF-type

USB memory, and other USB memory devices that require adapters for connection are not supported.

• Proper operation of USB HDDs or

USB drives with connectors that loosen due to vehicle vibrations is not guaranteed. (iStick, etc.)

• USB products that are used as key chains or cell phone accessories may damage the USB jack and affect proper file playback. Please refrain from use. Use only products with plug connectors, as shown in the following illustration.

• When MP3 devices or cell phones are connected simultaneously through AUX, BT Audio and USB modes, a popping noise or malfunction may occur.

4-22

USB

(1) Repeat

Enable/disable repeat.

(2) Shuffle

Enable/disable shuffle play.

(3) List

View a list of all songs.

(4) Menu


(5) Album Image

View song info.

(6) Pause

Pause or play music.

(7) Playback progress

Press to skip to the desired location.

Playback

• Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [USB].

• Connect a USB drive to the USB port to automatically play files on the USB drive.

Changing songs

• Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to play the previous or next song.

• Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK] button to rewind or fast forward the currently playing song.

• Search songs by turning TUNE knob, and press the knob to play.

i

Information

The repeat folder function is available only when songs are playing from the

[File] category under [List].

Menu


Selecting songs from a list

Select [List] to see a list of songs available for play.

Select and play the desired song.

•

•

•

•

Repeat play

Select [Repeat] to enable or disable

‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current song’,

‘Repeat folder’ or ‘Repeat category’.

Repeat all: All songs in the playlist are repeated.

Repeat current song: The currently playing song is repeated.

Repeat folder: All songs in the current folder are repeated.

Repeat category: Repeat all songs in the current category.

•

•

•

Shuffle play

Select [Shuffle] to enable/disable

‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle folder’ or ‘Shuffle category’ play.

Shuffle: Songs are played in random order.

Shuffle folder: Songs within the current folder are played in random order.

Shuffle category: Songs within the current category are played in random order.

• Save to My Music: Songs on your

USB device can be saved to My

Music.

(1) File: Select a file to save

.

(2) Mark All: Select all files

.

(3) Unmark All: Deselect all files.

4

4-23

Multimedia System

(4) Save: Save the selected file(s)

.

- Select the files you want to save, and select [Save]. This saves the selected files to My Music.

- Saving is canceled if phone calls are received or made while saving.

- If Siri is activated, phone calls are received or made while saving, saving will be canceled.

- Up to 6,000 files can be saved.

- The currently playing file on the

USB device cannot be changed while saving.

- My Music cannot be used while saving.

- Up to 700 MB can be saved.

• Information: Detailed information on the currently playing song is displayed.


i

Information

-

Using the iPod ® Devices

• To use the audio system’s iPod

® control function, use the dedicated cable provided with your iPod ® .

• Connecting the iPod ® to the vehicle during play may result in a loud noise that lasts about one to two seconds. Connect the iPod ® to the vehicle after stopping or pausing play.

• Connect the iPod ® with the vehicle in the ACC ON state to begin charging.

• When connecting the iPod

® cable, be sure to fully push the cable into the port.

• When EQ effects are enabled simultaneously on external devices, such as iPod

® s and the audio system, the

EQ effects may overlap, causing sound quality deterioration or distortion. Deactivate the EQ function for all external devices, if possible.

• Noise may occur when your iPod

® or the AUX port is connected.

Disconnect and store separately when not in use.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• There may be noise if the audio system is used with an iPod

® or AUX external device connected to the power jack. In these cases, disconnect the iPod ® or external device from the power jack.

• Play may be interrupted, or device malfunctions may occur depending on the characteristics of your iPod ® /iPhone ® .

• Play may fail if your iPhone ® is connected through both

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology and USB. In this case, select Dock connector or

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology on your iPhone

® to change the sound output settings.

• If your software version does not support the communication protocol or your iPod ® is not recognized due to device failure, anomalies or defects, iPod

® mode cannot be used.

• iPod

® nano (5th generation) devices may not be recognized if the battery is low. Charge sufficiently before use.

(Continued)

4-24

(Continued)

• The search and song play order in the iPod

® device may be different from the search order in the audio system.

• If the iPod ® has failed due to an internal defect, please reset the iPod

®

(consult your iPod

® manual).

• Depending on the software version, the iPod

® may fail to sync with the system. If the media is removed or disconnected before recognition, the previous mode may not be restored

(iPad

® cannot be charged).

• Cables other than the 1-meter cable provided with iPod ® /iPhone ® products may not be recognized.

• When other music apps are used on your iPod

®

, the system sync function may fail due to malfunction of the iPod ® application.

iPod

®

(1) Repeat


(2) Shuffle


(3) List


(4) Menu


(5) Album Image

View song info.

(6) Pause




Playback

• Connect your iPod

®

to the audio

USB port, press the [MEDIA] button, and select [iPod].

Changing songs



• Search songs by turning the TUNE knob, and press the knob to play.




4

4-25

Multimedia System

•

•

Repeat play


‘Repeat category’, ‘Repeat current song’.



•

Shuffle play


‘Shuffle category’ play.


Menu


• Information: Detailed info on the currently playing song is displayed.


When other music programs are running

When songs saved on your iPod

®

are playing through a separate music app, the following screen is displayed.

(1) Play/Pause: Pause or play music

.

(2) Play iPod Files: Play music saved on your iPod

®

.

(3) Album Image: View playback info

.

i

Information

Operation cannot be carried out correctly due to iPod

® application malfunction.

Play iPod Files

• Select [Play iPod Files] to play songs saved on your iPod

®

.

If there are no songs saved on your iPod

®

, the [Play iPod Files] is disabled.

4-26

i

Information

-

Using Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology Audio

•

Bluetooth ®


Audio mode can only be used if a

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology enabled phone is connected. Only devices that support

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology audio can be used.

• If the

Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology-enabled phone is disconnected during play, the music stops.

• When the TRACK UP/DOWN buttons are used during

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology audio streaming, a popping noise or sound interruptions may occur, depending on the cell phone device.

• Depending on the cell phone model, the audio streaming function may not be supported.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If a phone call is made or received when music is playing in

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology Audio mode, the call may mix with the music.

• When returning to

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology Audio mode after ending a call, play might not resume automatically for some cell phone models.

NOTICE

• Bluetooth ® Wireless Technology

Handsfree is a feature that enables drivers to practice safe driving. Connecting the car audio system with a Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology phone allows the user to conveniently make calls, receive calls, and manage the phone book. Before using the Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology, carefully read the contents of this user’s manual.

• Excessive use or operations while driving may lead to negligent driving practices and be the cause of accidents.

• Do not operate the device excessively while driving.

• Viewing the screen for prolonged periods of time is dangerous and may lead to accidents.

• When driving, view the screen only for short periods of time.

4

4-27

Multimedia System

Bluetooth

®


(BT) Audio

(1) Repeat


(2) Shuffle


(3) Menu


(4) Play/Pause


i

Information

• Some cell phone models may not support particular functions.

•

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology audio volume is synced with cell phone media volume.

Playback

• Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [BT Audio].

Changing songs


i

Information

Some cell phones may not support this function.

•

•

•

Repeat play


‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current song’ or

‘Repeat category’.




i

Information

The repeat play function is engaged, depending on the operation of the connected

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology device.

•

•

Shuffle play


‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle category’ play.



4-28

i

Information

The shuffle function is engaged, depending on the operation of the connected

Bluetooth ®


AUX My Music

Menu


• Connections: The currently connected

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device can be changed.

• Information: Detailed information on the currently playing song is displayed.


Running AUX

• Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [AUX].

• Connect the external device connection jack to the AUX terminal to run AUX.

(1) Sound Settings: Audio sound settings can be changed.

(1) Repeat


(2) Shuffle


(3) List


(4) Menu


(5) Album Image

View song info.

4-29

4

Multimedia System

(6) Pause




Playback

Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [My Music].

• My Music cannot be selected if it does not contain music.

• Check the content of your USB drive before saving music to My

Music.

Changing songs

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to play the previous or next song.


• Search songs by turning the TUNE knob and press the knob to play.




•

•

•

Repeat play


‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current song’ or

‘Repeat category’.




•

•

Shuffle play


‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle category’ play.



Menu


• Delete Files: You can delete files from My Music.

(1) File: Select saved file

.

(2) Mark All: Select all files.

(3) Unmark All: Deselect all files.

4-30

(4) Delete: Delete the selected file(s)

.

- Select the file to delete, then select [Delete] to delete it.

- If Siri is activated, phone calls are received or made during delete, delete will be canceled.

• Add to Playlist: Frequently played songs can be paired in a [Playlist].

- Songs can be played from the

[Playlist].



Pandora

Delete from Playlist

When a song in the playlist is playing, select [Menu] and select [Delete from Playlist].

Select the song to delete, then select

[Delete].

(1) Thumbs Down

If you don’t like the song that is currently playing, press this button to skip to the next song and to minimize the number of songs from similar genres.

i

Information

Pandora

® limits the number of times that you can skip to the next song.

(2) Thumbs Up

If you like the song that is currently playing, press this button. Pandora

®

will play more songs from the same genre.

i

Information

The settings of this function cannot be reset.

(3) Skip

Skip to the next song.

i

Information

Pandora

® limits the number of times that you can skip to the next song.

(4) Stations

Display the station list.

(5) Menu


(6) Album Image

View song info.

4

4-31

Multimedia System

(7) Pause


(8) Shared Station

Indicate that the station is already shared.

i

Information

Thumbs Up/Down is not available for shared stations.

Playback

Press the [MEDIA] button, and select [Pandora].

i

Information

• Pandora ® : Connect a smartphone to listen to Pandora

®

Radio

• Apple devices must be connected via

USB cable and Android devices must be connected via

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology in order to run

Pandora

®

.

Menu

Select [Menu] and select the desired function.

• Bookmark: Add the song that is currently playing to your bookmarks list.

i

Information

• You can view your bookmarked songs on your online Pandora ® profile. Go to pandora.com, then go to

[Your profile] above the player. That will bring up a page with your stations and bookmarked songs.

• The settings of this function cannot be reset.

• Quit: Exit Pandora

®

mode and return to previous audio mode.



Phone

i

Information

-

Using the Bluetooth ®


Cellular Phone

•

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology is a near-field wireless networking technology that uses the 2.4 GHz frequency to connect various devices within a certain distance wirelessly.

• The technology is used in PCs, peripherals,

Bluetooth ®

Wireless

Technology phones, tablet PCs, household appliances and automobiles. Devices supporting

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology can exchange data at high speeds without physical cable connections.

•

Bluetooth

®


Handsfree devices enable convenient access to phone functions through cell phones equipped with

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology.

• Some

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology devices may not be supported by the

Bluetooth ®


Handsfree function.

(Continued)

4-32

(Continued)

• When

Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology is connected and calls are attempted through a connected cell phone from outside the vehicle, the call is connected through the

Bluetooth

®


Handsfree function of the vehicle.

• Please be sure to disconnect the

Bluetooth ®


Handsfree function through your

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device or the audio screen.

• See https://www.hyundaiusa.com/

BlueTooth/ for a list of supported

Bluetooth devices.

Safety precautions

• The Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology

Handsfree function helps drivers to drive safely. By connecting a

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technologyenabled phone to the vehicle’s audio system, phone calls can be made and received through the audio system and contacts can be managed. Consult the user manual before use.

• Excessive manipulation of controls while driving, making it difficult to pay attention to the road ahead, can lead to accidents. Do not operate the device excessively while driving.

• Looking at the screen for a prolonged time increases the risk of accidents. Keep time spent looking at the screen to a minimum.

Precautions when connecting

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology devices

• The vehicle supports the following

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology functions. Some

Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology devices may not support some functions.

1) Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology

Handsfree phone calls

2) Operations during a call (Private,

Switch, Mic Vol. controls)

3) Download call history saved to the

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device

4) Download contacts saved to the

Bluetooth

®


5) Automatic contacts/call history download when Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology is connected

6) Automatic Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology device connection when the vehicle is started

7)

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology audio streaming playback

• Before connecting the audio system to your device, make sure your device supports Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology.

4-33

4

Multimedia System

• Even if your device supports

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology, a

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology connection cannot be established if the device’s Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology function is switched off.

Search and connect with the

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology function enabled.

• Pair or connect Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology devices to the audio system with the vehicle at a standstill.

• If a Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology connection is lost due to abnormal conditions while a Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device is connected (communication range exceeded, device power OFF, communication errors, etc.), the disconnected Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology device is searched for and automatically reconnected.

• If you want to disable the Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device autoconnect function, turn the Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology function OFF on your device. Consult the user manuals for individual devices to see whether Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology is supported.

4-34

• Handsfree call quality and volume may vary depending on the type of

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device.

• Some Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology devices are subject to intermittent Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology connection failures. In this case, use the following method.

1) Turn the

Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology function off on your

Bluetooth

®


➟

Turn it on and try again.

2) Delete the paired device from both the audio system and

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device, then pair again.

3) Power down your Bluetooth

®


➟

Turn it on and try again.

4) Completely remove the battery from your Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology device; reinsert it, reboot, and attempt connection.

5) Restart the vehicle and reattempt connection.

Pairing a Bluetooth

Technology device

®

Wireless

Information on pairing

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology devices

• Pairing Bluetooth

®

device is not allowed while vehicle is moving.

®

• Pairing refers to the process of pairing Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology cell phones or devices with the system prior to connection. This is a necessary procedure for

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology connection and usage.

• Up to five devices can be paired.

Pairing the first

Bluetooth

®

Wireless


Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system or the [CALL] button on the steering wheel remote control

➟

Search for the vehicle from the

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device, and pair

➟

Enter the passkey on the Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device or approve passkey

➟

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology pairing completed.

1. When the [PHONE] button on the audio or the [CALL] button on the steering wheel remote control is pressed, the following screen is displayed. Devices can now be paired.

3. Confirm that the vehicle name in your

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device matches the vehicle name shown on the audio screen, then select it.

i

Information

The 6-digit passkey in the image above is an example. Refer to your vehicle for the actual passkey.

Pairing a second

Bluetooth ®

Wireless


Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system

➟

Select [Bluetooth]

➟

Select [Connections]

➟

Select [Add

New].

4

(1) Vehicle Name: Searched name in

Bluetooth

®


i

Information

The vehicle name in the image above is an example. Refer to your device for the actual name of your device.

2. Search for available Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology devices in the

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology menu of your Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology device (cell phone, etc.).

4. For devices that require passkey confirmation, the following screen is shown on the audio system. A

6-digit passkey input screen is shown in the Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology device.

- After confirming that the 6-digit passkey on the audio screen and the

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device are identical, select [OK] in your Bluetooth

®


- The pairing procedure from this point is identical to [Pairing the first

Bluetooth device].

4-35

Multimedia System

i

Information

•

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology standby mode lasts for three minutes. If a device is not paired within three minutes, pairing is canceled.

Start over from the beginning.

• For most

Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology devices, a connection is established automatically after pairing. Some devices, however, require separate confirmation when connecting after pairing. Be sure to check your

Bluetooth ®

Wireless

Technology device after pairing to confirm that it has connected.

Connecting Bluetooth

Technology devices

®

Wireless

If there are no connected devices

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system or the [CALL] button in the steering wheel remote control

➟

List of paired Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology devices

➟

Select the desired

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device from the list

➟

Connect

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology.

If there are connected devices

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio system

➟

Select [Settings]

➟

Select [Connections]

➟

Select

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device to connect

➟

Select [Connect]

➟

Connect

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology.

i

Information

• Only one

Bluetooth ®

Wireless

Technology device can be connected at a time.

• When a

Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology device is connected, other devices cannot be paired.

4-36

Accepting/rejecting phone calls

Receiving phone calls with Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology connected.

i

Information

• When the incoming call screen is displayed, audio mode and the settings screen cannot be shown. Only call volume control is supported.

• Some

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology devices may not support the call reject function.

• Some

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology devices may not support the phone number display function.

Operation during calls

Incoming call with Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology connected

➟

Select

[Accept].

(1) Caller name: If the caller number is in your contacts, the corresponding name is displayed.

(2) Incoming phone number: Incoming phone number is displayed.

(3) Accept: Accept call.

(4) Reject: Reject call.

(1) Call duration: Call duration display.

(2) Caller name: If the caller number is in your contacts, the corresponding name is displayed.

(3) Incoming phone number: Incoming phone number is displayed.

(4) Keypad: Number keypad for

Automatic Response Service input is displayed.

(5) Private: Call is transferred to a cell phone.

(6) Outgoing Volume:Adjust outgoing voice volume.

(7) End: End call.

4-37

4

Multimedia System

i

Information

• Some

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology devices may not support the Private function.

• The outgoing voice volume may vary depending on the type of Bluetooth ® device. If the outgoing voice volume is too high or low, adjust the Outgoing

Volume.

Favorites


➟

Select [Favorites]

➟

Favorites list displayed.

(1) Favorites list: A list of paired favorites is displayed.

Connect a call when selected.

(2) Add to Favorites: Add a downloaded phone number to favorites.

(3) Delete: Delete a saved favorite.

i

Information

• Up to 20 favorites can be paired for each paired

Bluetooth ®

Wireless

Technology device.

• Favorites can be accessed when the

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device they were paired from is connected.

• The audio system does not download favorites from

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology devices.

Favorites must be newly saved before use.

• To add to favorites, contacts must be downloaded first.

• Saved favorites are not updated even if the contacts of the connected

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device are changed. In this case, favorites need to be deleted and added again.

4-38

Call history


➟

Select [Call history]

➟

Call history is displayed.

Contacts


➟

Select [Contacts]

➟

Select letter (ABC)

➟

Contacts displayed.

i

Information

• Up to 2,000 contacts can be saved.

• In some cases, additional confirmation from your

Bluetooth ®

Wireless

Technology device is necessary when downloading contacts. If downloading of contacts unsuccessful, consult your

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology device’s settings or the audio screen to approve the download.

• Contacts without phone numbers are not displayed.

(1) Call history: Display the downloaded call history list.


(2) Sort by: Sort by all calls, dialed calls, received calls or missed calls.

(3) Download: Download call history from connected Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology devices.

i

Information

• Up to 50 dialed, received and missed calls are saved.

• When the latest call history is received, the existing call history is deleted.

(1) Contacts: Display downloaded contacts.


(2) Download: Download contacts from connected Bluetooth

®

Wireless

Technology devices.

4-39

4

Multimedia System

Dial

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio

➟

Select [Dial].

(5) Call

- Enter and select a phone number to call.

- Select without entering a phone number to see the most recent dialed call.

(1) Phone number entry window: The phone number entered using the keypad is displayed.

(2) Clear

- Press to delete individual digits.

- Press and hold to delete the entire phone number.

(3) Keypad: Enter phone number.

(4) Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology

Phone name

- The name of the connected

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device is displayed.

- Contacts matching the keypad number/letter input are displayed.

4-40

Settings

Press the [PHONE] button on the audio

➟

Select [Settings].

- For phone Setup, refer to Setup page

➟

Select [Bluetooth].

Siri

i

Information -

Using Siri

• If you want to use Siri, you have to connect your iOS device to multimedia system through

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology. (Please check whether your iOS device supports

Siri and turning Siri On)

• If the iOS version is changed, the functions and response may be different according to the iOS device and the latest version.

• Siri automatically stops in the following events.

1)Outgoing and incoming phone calls.

2)Media (USB, etc.) is connected.

(Siri mode is maintained when iPod ® s are connected)

3)Rear view monitor is activated

(option).

4)Vehicle is started or engine is turned off.

5)Screen transition buttons, such as

RADIO or MEDIA, are selected.

(Continued)

(Continued)

6)When a pop-up message is displayed on the screen due to accidental execution of Siri.

• The microphone is located above the driver’s seat. To ensure proper Siri, state your voice while maintaining proper driving posture.

Starting Siri

Press the [VOICE] button on the steering wheel remote control to start Siri and see the screen.

Setup

(1) Speak: Re-start Siri.

(2) Exit: End Siri.

i

Information

• Functions and feedbacks from voice commands via Siri are executed in the iOS device.

• The Audio system only supports

“Phone” related functions, other functions will be performed in your iOS device.

Access Display, Sound, Date/Time,

Bluetooth, System, Screen Saver and Display Off settings.

Press the [SETUP] button on the audio system.

Display


➟

Select [Display].

• Mode: Audio screen brightness can be adjusted to the time of day.

• Illumination: The brightness of the audio screen can be changed.

4

4-41

Multimedia System

Sound


➟

Select [Sound].

• Position: Sound balance and panning can be adjusted.

• Tone: Sound tone color can be adjusted.

• Speed dependent volume:

Automatically adjust volume based on vehicle speed.

• Beep: Select whether to play a beep sound when the screen is touched.

Date/Time


➟

Select [Date/Time].

• Set Time: Set the time displayed on the audio screen.

• Time Format: Choose between 12hour and 24-hour time formats.

• Set Date: Set the date displayed on the audio screen.

Bluetooth


➟

Select [Bluetooth].

• Connections: Control pairing, deletion, connection and disconnection of Blluetooth

®

Wireless Technology devices.

• Auto Connection Priority: Set the connection priority of Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology devices when the vehicle is started.

• Download Contacts: Contacts can be downloaded from connected

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology devices.

• Bluetooth Voice Prompts*: Play or mute voice prompts for Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology device pairing, connection and errors.

* if equipped

i

Information

• When paired devices are deleted, the call history and contacts of the device saved to the audio system are deleted.

• For

Bluetooth

®

Wireless Technology connections with low connection priority, some time may be required for the connection to be established.

• Contacts can be downloaded only from the currently connected

Bluetooth

®


• If no

Bluetooth ®

Wireless Technology device is connected, the Download

Contacts button is disabled.

• If the language setting is Korean,

Bluetooth voice prompts are not supported.

4-42

System


➟

Select [System].

• Memory Information: View My

Music memory usage.

• Language: Change the user language.

• System Information: At the System

Information screen, Software version information, updates are available.

- System Update: At the System

Information screen, insert the

USB memory with the latest file downloaded, and then select the

[Update] to begin updating. The system with then reboot automatically.

i

Information

• This product needs supplemented software updates and additional functions, which collectively may take some time to complete, depending on the amount of data.

• If the Power is disconnected or the

USB is removed during an update, the data might be damaged. Please wait until the update is complete while engine is on.

Screen Saver

Set the information displayed when the audio system is switched off or the screen is turned off.


➟

Select [Screen Saver].

• Analog: An analog clock is displayed.

• Digital: A digital clock is displayed.

• None: No information is displayed.

Display Off

To prevent glare, the screen can be turned off with the audio system in operation.


➟

Select [Display Off].

i

Information

Use ‘Screen Saver’ to set the information to be displayed when the screen is turned off.

4

4-43

Multimedia System

D ec

FCC

attiio n o nffo

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Caution: Any changes or modifications to this device not explicitly approved by manufacturer could void your authority to operate this equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum 20cm between the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter unless authorized to do so by the FCC.

4-44

Driving your vehicle

Before Driving ........................................................5-3

Before Entering the Vehicle ...........................................5-3

Before Starting ..................................................................5-3

Power Button..........................................................5-5

POWER Button Positions.................................................5-6

Starting the Vehicle ..........................................................5-8

Turning Off the Vehicle ...................................................5-9

Reduction Gear.....................................................5-10

Reduction Gear Operation ............................................5-10

Parking...............................................................................5-12

LCD Display Messages ...................................................5-12

Good Driving Practices ..................................................5-15

Paddle Shifter (Regenerative Braking

Control)..................................................................5-16

Braking System ....................................................5-17

Power Brakes ...................................................................5-17

Disc Brake Wear Indicator ............................................5-18

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB)...................................5-18

Auto Hold ..........................................................................5-23

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ....................................5-27

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................................5-29

Vehicle Stability Management (VSM).........................5-33

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) ....................................5-34

Good Braking Practices.................................................5-35

Drive Mode Integrated Control System ............5-36

Blind-spot Collision Warning (BCW) system ...5-38

BCW (Blind-spot Collision Warning)...........................5-39

RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning ..........5-41

Detecting Sensor.............................................................5-43

Limitations of the System.............................................5-44

Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system....................................................................5-46

System Setting and Activation.....................................5-46

FCA Warning Message and System Control ............5-48

FCA Sensor .......................................................................5-50

System Malfunction .......................................................5-52


Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system ...................5-59

LKA System Operation...................................................5-60

Warning Light and Message.........................................5-64

Driver's attention ............................................................5-65

LKA System Function Change......................................5-67

Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system .........5-68

System Setting and Activation.....................................5-68

Resetting the System .....................................................5-70

System Standby...............................................................5-70

System Malfunction .......................................................5-71

Cruise control .......................................................5-73

Cruise Control Operation...............................................5-73

5

5

Smart Cruise Control with Stop & Go system....................................................................5-78

Smart Cruise Control Speed .........................................5-79

Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance...5-84

Sensor to Detect Distance to the Vehicle Ahead ...5-87

To Adjust the Sensitivity of Smart Cruise Control...5-88

To Convert to Cruise Control Mode............................5-89


Special Driving Conditions ..................................5-95

Hazardous Driving Conditions......................................5-95

Rocking the Vehicle ........................................................5-95

Smooth Cornering ...........................................................5-96

Driving at Night................................................................5-96

Driving in the Rain ..........................................................5-96

Driving in Flooded Areas...............................................5-97

Highway Driving...............................................................5-97

Winter Driving ......................................................5-98

Snow or Icy Conditions..................................................5-98

Winter Precautions.......................................................5-100

Vehicle Load Limit..............................................5-102

Tire Loading Information Label.....................................5-102

Trailer Towing.....................................................5-106

WARNING


WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit harmful chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

B EF RE RIIV G

Before Entering the Vehicle

• Be sure all windows, outside mirror(s), and outside lights are clean and unobstructed.

• Remove frost, snow, or ice.

• Visually check the tires for uneven wear and damage.

• Check under the vehicle for any sign of leaks.

• Be sure there are no obstacles behind you if you intend to back up.

Before Starting

• Make sure the hood, the liftgate, and the doors are securely closed and locked.

• Adjust the position of the seat and steering wheel.

• Adjust the inside and outer side view mirrors.

• Verify all the lights work.

• Fasten your seat belts. Check that all passengers have fastened their seat belts.

• Check the gauges and indicators in the instrument panel and the messages on the instrument display when the POWER button is in the

ON position.

• Check that any items you are carrying are stored properly or fastened down securely.

5

5-3


WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH, take the following precautions:

•

ALWAYS wear your seat belt.

All passengers must be properly belted whenever the vehicle is moving. For more information, refer to "Seat Belts" in chapter 2.

•

Always drive defensively.

Assume other drivers or pedestrians may be careless and make mistakes.

•

Stay focused on the task of driving. Driver distraction can cause accidents.

•

Leave plenty of space between you and the vehicle in front of you.

WARNING

NEVER drink or take drugs and drive.

Drinking or taking drugs and driving is dangerous and may result in an accident and SERI-

OUS INJURY or DEATH.

Drunk driving is the number one contributor to the highway death toll each year. Even a small amount of alcohol will affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. Just one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions and emergencies and your reaction time gets worse with each additional drink.

Driving while under the influence of drugs is as dangerous or more dangerous than driving under the influence of alcohol.

(Continued)

(Continued)

You are much more likely to have a serious accident if you drink or take drugs and drive. If you are drinking or taking drugs, don't drive. Do not ride with a driver who has been drinking or taking drugs. Choose a designated driver or call a taxi.

5-4

P OW R B TT N

WARNING


INJURY or DEATH, take the following precautions:

•

NEVER allow children or any person who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch the

POWER button or related parts. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur.

•

NEVER reach through the steering wheel for the POWER button or any other control, while the vehicle is in motion.

The presence of your hand or arm in this area may cause a loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

OAEE056019

Whenever the front door is opened, the POWER button will illuminate and will go off 30 seconds after the door is closed.

WARNING

To turn the vehicle off in an emergency:

Press and hold the POWER button for more than two seconds

OR Rapidly press and release the POWER button three times

(within three seconds).

(Continued)

(Continued)

If the vehicle is still moving, you can restart the vehicle without depressing the brake pedal by pressing the POWER button with the gear in the N (Neutral) position.

WARNING

•

NEVER press the POWER button while the vehicle is in motion except in an emergency. This will result in the vehicle turning off and loss of power assist for the steering and brake systems. This may lead to loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.

•

Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the gear is in the P (Park) position, set the parking brake, press the

POWER button to the OFF position, and take the Smart Key with you. Unexpected vehicle movement may occur if these precautions are not followed.

5-5

5


POWER Button Positions

Button Position

OFF

Action

To turn off the vehicle, press the POWER button with the gear in P (Park).

Also, the vehicle will turn off when the

POWER button is pressed with the gear in D

(Drive) or R (Reverse) because the gear automatically shifts to the P (Park) position.

But, when it is pressed in N (Neutral), the

POWER button will go to the ACC position.

ACC

Press the POWER button when the button is in the OFF position without depressing the brake pedal.

Some electrical accessories are usable.

Notice

5-6

Button Position

ON

Action

Press the POWER button while it is in the

ACC position without depressing the brake pedal.

The warning lights can be checked before the vehicle is started.

Notice

Do not leave the POWER button in the ON position when the vehicle is not in the ready

( ) mode to prevent the battery from discharging.

START

To start the vehicle, depress the brake pedal and press the POWER button with the gear in the P (Park) position.

If you press the POWER button without depressing the brake pedal, the vehicle does not start and the POWER button changes as follows:

OFF

→

ACC

→

ON

→

OFF or ACC

5

5-7


Starting the Vehicle

WARNING

•

Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle.

Unsuitable shoes, such as high heels, ski boots, sandals, flipflops, etc., may interfere with your ability to use the brake and accelerator pedals.

•

Do not start the vehicle with the accelerator pedal depressed.

The vehicle can move and lead to an accident.

i

Information

• The vehicle will start by pressing the

POWER button, only when the smart key is in the vehicle.

• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle, and when it is far away from the driver, the vehicle may not start.

• When the POWER button is in the

ACC or ON position, any door is open, the system checks for the smart key. When the smart key is not in the vehicle, the " " indicator will blink and the warning "Key not in vehicle" will come on. When all doors are closed, the chime will also sound for about 5 seconds.

Keep the smart key in the vehicle when in the ACC position or if the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode.

1. Always carry the smart key with you.

2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

3. Make sure the gear is in P (Park).

4. Depress the brake pedal.

5. Press the POWER button. If the vehicle starts, the " " indicator will come on.

i

Information

• Always start the vehicle with your foot on the brake pedal.

• If ambient temperature is low, the

" " indicator may remain illuminated longer than the normal amount of time.

5-8

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the vehicle:

If the " " indicator turns off while you are in motion, do not attempt to shift to the P (Park) position.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the vehicle:

When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you cannot normally start the vehicle. Replace the fuse with a new one. If you are not able to replace the fuse, you can start the vehicle by pressing and holding the POWER button for 10 seconds with the POWER button in the ACC position.

Do not press the POWER button for more than 10 seconds except when the stop lamp fuse is blown.

For your safety always depress the brake pedal before starting the vehicle.

OAEE056024

i

Information

If the smart key battery is weak or the smart key does not work correctly, you can start the vehicle by pressing the POWER button with the smart key in the direction of the picture above.

Turning Off the Vehicle

1. Depress the brake pedal fully.

2. Shift to P (Park).

3. Apply the parking brake.

4. Press the POWER button to turn the vehicle off.

5. Make sure the " " indicator light on the instrument cluster is turned off.

CAUTION

If the " " indicator light on the instrument cluster is still on, the vehicle is not turned off and can move when the gear is in any position except P (Park).

5

5-9


R ED TIIO GE R

Reduction Gear Operation

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious injury or death:

•

ALWAYS check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before shifting a vehicle into

D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

•

Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the gear is in the P (Park) position, then set the parking brake, and place the POWER button in the OFF position.

Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur if these precautions are not followed.

Gear position

OAEE056001L

Select gear positions by pressing the shift button.

For your safety, always depress the brake pedal while shifting to another gear.

OAEE046103

The indicator in the instrument cluster displays the gear position when the POWER button is in the ON position.

5-10

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P (Park).

To shift the gear from R (Reverse), N

(Neutral) or D (Drive) to P (Park), press the [P] button.

If you turn off the vehicle in D (Drive) or R (Reverse), the gear automatically shifts to P (Park).

WARNING

•

Shifting into P (Park) while the vehicle is in motion may cause you to lose control of the vehicle.

•

After the vehicle has stopped, always make sure the gear is in P (Park), apply the parking brake, and turn the vehicle off.

•

Do not use the P (Park) position in place of the parking brake.

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle backward.

To shift to R (Reverse), press the [R] button while depressing the brake pedal.

When the driver’s door is opened within 3 minutes with the POWER button in the ACC position and the gear in N (Neutral), the vehicle is automatically turned OFF and shifted to the P (Park) position.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and gear are not engaged.

To shift to N (Neutral), press the [N] button while depressing the brake pedal.

Always depress the brake pedal when you are shifting from N

(Neutral) to another gear.

In N (Neutral), if the driver attempts to turn off the vehicle, the gear remains in N (Neutral) and the

POWER button will be in the ACC position.

To turn off the vehicle from the ACC position, press the [P] button within 3 minutes. The vehicle will shift to P

(Park) and turn off.

D (Drive)

This is the normal driving position.

To shift to D (Drive), press the [D] button while depressing the brake pedal.

5

5-11


Shift-lock system

For your safety, your vehicle has a shift-lock system which prevents shifting the gear from P (Park) or N

(Neutral) into R (Reverse) or D

(Drive) unless the brake pedal is depressed.

To shift from P (Park) or N (Neutral) into R (Reverse) or D (Drive) :

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the vehicle or place the

POWER button in the ON position.

3. Press the R (Reverse) or D (Drive) button.

Parking

Always come to a complete stop and continue to depress the brake pedal.

Shift to the P (Park) position, apply the parking brake, and place the

POWER button in the OFF position.

Take the Key with you when exiting the vehicle.


Shifting conditions not met

When the battery (12 V) is discharged

You cannot shift the gear when the battery is discharged.

Jump start your vehicle (refer to

“Jump Starting” in chapter 6) or contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OAEE056103L

The message appears on the LCD display when driving speed is too fast to shift the gear.

Decrease the vehicle speed or slow down before shifting the gear.

5-12

Press brake pedal to change gear

Shift to P after stopping PARK engaged

OAEE056104L

The message appears on the LCD display, when the brake pedal is not depressed while shifting the gear.

Depress the brake pedal and then shift the gear.

OAEE056105L

The message appears on the LCD display when the gear is shifted to P

(Park) while the vehicle is moving.

Stop the vehicle before shifting to P

(Park).

OAEE056111L

The message appears on the LCD display when the P (Park) position is engaged.

5

5-13


Gear already selected Shift button held down Check shift controls

OAEE056110L

The message appears on the LCD display when the selected gear button is pressed again.

OAEE056109L

The message appears on the LCD display when the shift button is continuously pressed or there is problem with the button.

Make sure that there is no object over the shift button. If the problem persists, immediately have the vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer

OAEE056106L

The message appears on the LCD display when there is problem with the shift buttons.

Immediately have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

5-14

Good Driving Practices

• Never shift to P (Park) or N

(Neutral) to any other position with the accelerator pedal depressed.

• Never shift to P (Park) when the vehicle is in motion.

Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Do not shift to N (Neutral) when driving. Doing so may result in an accident.

• Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. Even light, but consistent pedal pressure can result in the brakes overheating, brake wear and possibly even brake failure.

• Always apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle. Do not depend on placing the gear in P

(Park) to keep the vehicle from moving.

• Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident

• Optimum vehicle performance and economy is obtained by smoothly depressing and releasing the accelerator.

WARNING


INJURY or DEATH:

•

ALWAYS wear your seat belt.

In a collision, an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a properly belted occupant.

•

Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns.

•

The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds.

•

Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver over steers to reenter the roadway.

•

In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.

•

HYUNDAI recommends you follow all posted speed limits.

5

5-15


P AD LE HIIF TE R ((R GE ER TIIV E B RA KIIN G C NT RO L))

i

Information

The paddle shifter does not operate when:

• Both Paddle shifters are pulled at the same time.

• The Cruise Control system or Smart

Cruise Control system is activated.

• The vehicle is shifted to P (Park),

R(Reverse) and N (Neutral).

OAEE056003

The paddle shifter is used to adjust the regenerative braking rate from 0 to 3 during decelerating or braking.

• Left side ( ): Increases regenerative braking and deceleration.

• Right side ( ): Decreases regenerative braking and deceleration.

• Pull and hold the left side paddle shifter to change to 0.

• Pull and hold the left side paddle shifter to change to 3.

OAEE056100L

The selected regenerative braking rate is displayed on the instrument cluster.

What Does Regenerative

Braking Do?

It uses the electric motor when decelerating or braking which transforms vehicle motion (kinetic energy) to electrical energy to charge the high voltage batteries.

5-16

B RA KIIN G S ST M

Power Brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes that adjust automatically through normal usage.

If the vehicle is not in the ready

( ) mode or the vehicle is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. You can still stop your vehicle by applying greater force to the brake pedal than typical.

The stopping distance, however, will be longer than with power brakes.

When the vehicle is not in the ready

( ) mode, the reserve brake power is partially depleted each time the brake pedal is applied. Do not pump the brake pedal when the power assist has been interrupted.

Pump the brake pedal only when necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.

WARNING

Take the following precautions:

•

Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal.

This will create abnormal high brake temperatures, excessive brake lining and pad wear, and increased stopping distances.

•

When descending down a long or steep hill, use the paddle shifter (left side lever) to increase regenerative braking control in order to control your speed without using the brake pedal excessively.

Applying the brakes continuously will cause the brakes to overheat and could result in a temporary loss of braking performance.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

Wet brakes may impair the vehicle's ability to safely slow down; the vehicle may also pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Applying the brakes lightly will indicate whether they have been affected in this way. Always test your brakes in this fashion after driving through deep water. To dry the brakes, lightly tap the brake pedal to heat up the brakes while maintaining a safe forward speed until brake performance returns to normal. Avoid driving at high speeds until the brakes function correctly.

5

5-17


NOTICE

• Do not continue depressing the brake pedal if the "

" indicator is OFF. The battery may be discharged.

• Noise and vibration generated during braking is normal.

• Under normal operation, electric brake pump noise and motor vibration may occur temporarily in below cases.

- When the pedal is depressed suddenly.

- When the pedal is repeatedly depressed in short intervals.

- When the ABS function is activated while braking.

Disc Brake Wear Indicator

When your brake pads are worn and new pads are required, you will hear a high pitched warning sound from your front or rear brakes. You may hear this sound come and go or it may occur whenever you depress the brake pedal.

Note that some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when you first apply (or lightly apply) the brakes. This is normal and does not indicate a problem with your brakes.

NOTICE

To avoid costly brake repairs, do not continue to drive with worn brake pads.

i

Information

Always replace brake pads as complete front or rear axle sets.

Electronic Parking Brake

(EPB)

Applying the parking brake

OAEE056004

To apply the EPB (Electronic

Parking Brake):

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Pull the EPB switch upwards.

Make sure the Parking Brake

Warning Light comes on.

With the AUTO HOLD feature enabled, the EPB is automatically applied when the vehicle is shut off.

5-18

However, if the EPB switch is pressed within 1 second after the vehicle is turned off, the EPB will not be applied.

WARNING


INJURY or DEATH, do not operate the parking brake while the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation. It could damage the brake system and lead to an accident.

Releasing the parking brake

OAEE056005

To release the EPB (Electronic

Parking Brake), press the EPB switch in the following condition:

• Have the POWER button in the ON position.

• Depress the brake pedal.

Make sure the Parking Brake

Warning Light goes off.

To release EPB (Electronic Parking

Brake) automatically:

• Shifted to P (Park)

With the vehicle in the ready ( ) mode depress the brake pedal and shift out of P (Park) to R (Reverse),

D (Drive).

• Shifted to N (Neutral)

With the vehicle in the ready ( ) mode depress the brake pedal and shift out of N (Neutral) to R

(Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Under the following conditions

1. Start the vehicle.

2. Fasten the driver's seat belt.

3. Close the driver's door, hood and liftgate.

4. Depress the accelerator pedal while the gear is in D (Drive) or

R (Reverse).

The Parking Brake Warning Light should be turned off when the EPB is released.

5

5-19


i

Information

• For your safety, you can engage the

EPB even though the POWER button is in the OFF position, but you cannot release it.

• For your safety, depress the brake pedal and release the parking brake manually with the EPB switch when you drive downhill or when backing up the vehicle.

EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) may be automatically applied when:

• Requested by other systems

• The vehicle is turned off with the

Auto Hold operating

Warning messages

NOTICE

• If the parking brake warning light is still on even though the EPB has been released, have the system checked an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not drive your vehicle with the EPB applied. It may cause excessive brake pad and brake rotor wear.

i

Information

If the driver turns the vehicle off while

Auto Hold is operating, EPB will be automatically applied. However, if you press the EPB switch within one second after the vehicle is turned off, the EPB will not be applied.

OAEE056115N

To release EPB, fasten seatbelt and close door, hood and tailgate

• If you try to drive with the EPB applied, a warning will sound and a message will appear.

• If the driver's seat belt is not fastened and the hood or liftgate is opened, a warning will sound and a message will appear.

• If there is a problem with the vehicle, a warning may sound and a message may appear.

If the situation occurs, depress the brake pedal and release EPB by pressing the EPB switch.

5-20

WARNING

•

To prevent unintentional movement when stopped and leaving the vehicle, do not use the

P (Park) position in place of the parking brake. Set the parking brake and make sure the vehicle is securely positioned in P

(Park).

•

Never allow anyone who is unfamiliar with the vehicle to touch the parking brake. If the parking brake is released unintentionally, serious injury may occur.

•

All vehicles should always have the parking brake fully engaged when parking to avoid inadvertent movement of the car which can injure occupants or pedestrians.

NOTICE

• A click sound may be heard while operating or releasing the

EPB, but these conditions are normal and indicate that the

EPB is functioning properly.

• When leaving your keys with a parking lot attendant or valet, make sure to inform him/her how to operate the EPB.

• The EPB may malfunction if you drive with the EPB applied.

• When you automatically release

EPB by depressing the accelerator pedal, depress it slowly.

OAEE056117L

AUTO HOLD deactivating.

Press brake pedal

When the conversion from Auto Hold to EPB is not working properly a warning will sound and a message will appear.

5

5-21


EPB malfunction indicator

The EPB malfunction indicator may illuminate when the ESC (Electronic

Stability Control) indicator comes on to indicate that the ESC is not working properly, but it does not indicate a malfunction of the EPB.

OAEE056101L

Parking brake automatically locked

If the EPB is applied while Auto Hold is activated, a warning will sound and a message will appear.

OAEE056006

This warning light illuminates if the

POWER button is changed to the ON position and goes off in approximately 3 seconds if the system is operating normally.

If the EPB malfunction indicator remains on, comes on while driving, or does not come on when the

POWER button is changed to the ON position, this indicates that the EPB may have malfunctioned.

If this occurs, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

• If the EPB warning light is still on, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• If the parking brake warning light does not illuminate or blinks even though the EPB switch was pulled up, the EPB may not be applied.

• If the parking brake warning light blinks when the EPB warning light is on, press the switch, then pull it up. Once more press it back to its original position and pull it back up. If the EPB warning does not go off, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

5-22

Emergency braking

If there is a problem with the brake pedal while driving, emergency braking is possible by pulling up and holding the EPB switch. Braking is possible only while you are holding the EPB switch.

NOTICE

If you continuously notice a noise or burning smell when the EPB is used for emergency braking, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Auto Hold

The Auto Hold maintains the vehicle in a standstill even though the brake pedal is not depressed after the driver brings the vehicle to a complete stop by depressing the brake pedal.

WARNING

Do not operate the parking brake while the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation.

When the EPB (Electronic Parking

Brake) does not release

If the EPB does not release normally, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer by loading the vehicle on a flatbed tow truck and have the system checked.

i

Information

During emergency braking by the

EPB, the parking brake warning light will illuminate to indicate that the system is operating.

5

5-23


Set up

W h ii ii tt tt e

OAEE056007

1. With the driver's door and hood closed, fasten the driver's seat belt or depress the brake pedal and then press the [AUTO HOLD] switch. The white AUTO HOLD indicator will come on and the system will be in the standby position.

W h ii ii tt tt e

G rr e e n

OAEE056008

2. When you stop the vehicle completely by depressing the brake pedal, the AUTO HOLD indicator changes from white to green.

3. The vehicle will remain stationary even if you release the brake pedal.

4. If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be released.

Leaving

• If you press the accelerator pedal with the gear in D (Drive) or N

(Neutral), the Auto Hold will be released automatically and the vehicle will start to move. The

AUTO HOLD indicator changes from green to white.

• If the vehicle is restarted using the cruise control toggle switch (RES+ or SET-) while Auto Hold and cruise control is operating, the Auto Hold will be released regardless of accelerator pedal operation. The

AUTO HOLD indicator changes from green to white. (if equipped with cruise control system)

WARNING

When driving off from Auto

Hold by depressing the accelerator pedal, always check the surrounding area near your vehicle.

Slowly depress the accelerator pedal for a smooth start.

5-24

Cancel

L ii ii g h tt tt o ff ff ff ff

OAEE056007

To cancel the Auto Hold operation, press the [AUTO HOLD] switch. The

AUTO HOLD indicator will turn off.

To cancel the Auto Hold operation when the vehicle is at a standstill, press the [AUTO HOLD] switch while depressing the brake pedal.

i

Information

• The Auto Hold does not operate when:

- The driver's seat belt is unfastened and driver's door is opened

- The hood is opened

- The gear is in P (Park) or R

(Reverse)

- The EPB is applied

• For your safety, the Auto Hold automatically switches to EPB in such cases:

- The driver's seat belt is unfastened and driver's door is opened

- The hood is opened while the gear is in D (Drive)

- The vehicle is in a standstill for more than 10 minutes

- The vehicle is standing on a steep slope

- The vehicle moved several times

(Continued)

(Continued)

In these cases, the parking brake warning light comes on, the AUTO

HOLD indicator changes from green to white, and a warning sounds and a message will appear to inform you that EPB has been automatically engaged. Before driving again, depress the brake pedal, check the surrounding area near your vehicle and release the parking brake manually with the EPB switch.

• If the AUTO HOLD indicator lights up yellow, the Auto Hold is not working properly. Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• While operating Auto Hold, you may hear mechanical noise. However, it is normal operating noise.

5

5-25


Warning messages

WARNING

•

Depress the accelerator pedal slowly when you start the vehicle.

•

For your safety, cancel the

Auto Hold when you drive downhill, back up the vehicle or park the vehicle.

NOTICE

If there is a malfunction with the driver's door or hood open detection system, the Auto Hold may not work properly. Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OAEE056101L

Parking brake automatically locked

When the EPB is applied from Auto

Hold, a warning will sound and a message will appear.

OAEE056117L

AUTO HOLD deactivating.

Press brake pedal

When the conversion from Auto Hold to EPB is not working properly a warning will sound and a message will appear.

Depress the brake pedal when the above message appears for the Auto

Hold and EPB may not activate.

5-26

OAEE056116L

Press brake pedal to deactivate

AUTO HOLD

If you did not apply the brake pedal when you release the Auto Hold by pressing the [AUTO HOLD] switch, a warning will sound and a message will appear.

OAEE056118N

AUTO HOLD conditions not met.

Fasten seatbelt and close door, hood and tailgate

When you press the [AUTO HOLD] switch, if the driver's door, hood and liftgate are not closed or the driver’s seat belt is unfastened, a warning will sound and a message will appear on the LCD display.

Press the [AUTO HOLD] switch after closing the driver’s door, hood and liftgate and fastening the seat belt.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

WARNING

An Anti-Lock Braking System

(ABS) or an Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) system will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers. Even though vehicle control is improved during emergency braking, always maintain a safe distance between you and objects ahead of you. Vehicle speeds should always be reduced during extreme road conditions. The braking distance for cars equipped with ABS or ESC may be longer than for those without these systems in the following road conditions.

Drive your vehicle at reduced speeds during the following conditions:

•

Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.

(Continued)

5

5-27


(Continued)

•

On roads where the road surface is pitted or has different surface height.

•

Tire chains are installed on your vehicle.

The safety features of an ABS or ESC equipped vehicle should not be tested by high speed driving or cornering. This could endanger the safety of yourself or others.

ABS is an electronic braking system that helps prevent a braking skid.

ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same time.

Using ABS

To obtain the maximum benefit from your ABS in an emergency situation, do not attempt to modulate your brake pressure and do not try to pump your brakes. Depress your brake pedal as hard as possible.

When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear sounds from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ABS is active.

ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes to stop the vehicle.

Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you.

ABS will not prevent a skid that results from sudden changes in direction, such as trying to take a corner too fast or making a sudden lane change. Always drive at a safe speed for the road and weather conditions.

ABS cannot prevent a loss of stability. Always steer moderately when braking hard. Severe or sharp steering wheel movement can still cause your vehicle to veer into oncoming traffic or off the road.

On loose or uneven road surfaces, operation of the anti-lock brake system may result in a longer stopping distance than for vehicles equipped with a conventional brake system.

The ABS warning light ( ) will stay on for several seconds after the


During that time, the ABS will go through self-diagnosis and the light will go off if everything is normal. If the light stays on, you may have a problem with your ABS. Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

5-28

WARNING

If the ABS warning light ( ) is on and stays on, you may have a problem with the ABS. Your power brakes will work normally. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death, contact your

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

NOTICE

When you drive on a road having poor traction, such as an icy road, and apply your brakes continuously, the ABS will be active continuously and the ABS warning light ( ) may illuminate. Pull your car over to a safe place and turn the vehicle off.

Restart the vehicle. If the ABS warning light is off, then your ABS system is normal.

Otherwise, you may have a problem with your ABS system.

Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

i

Information

When you jump start your vehicle because of a drained battery, the ABS warning light ( ) may turn on at the same time. This happens because of the low battery voltage. It does not mean your ABS is malfunctioning.

Have the battery recharged before driving the vehicle.

Electronic Stability Control

(ESC)

OAEE056025

The Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) system helps to stabilize the vehicle during cornering maneuvers.

ESC checks where you are steering and where the vehicle is actually going. ESC applies braking pressure to any one of the vehicle's brakes and intervenes in the electric vehicle control system to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle on the intended path. It is not a substitute for safe driving practices. Always adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions.

5

5-29


WARNING

Never drive too fast for the road conditions or too quickly when cornering. The ESC system will not prevent accidents.

Excessive speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers, and hydroplaning on wet surfaces can result in severe accidents.

ESC operation

ESC ON condition


ON position, the ESC and the ESC

OFF indicator lights illuminate for approximately three seconds. After both lights go off, the ESC is enabled.

When operating

When the ESC is in operation, the ESC indicator light blinks:

• When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear sounds from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ESC is active.

• When the ESC activates, the vehicle may not respond to the accelerator as it does under routine conditions.

• If the Cruise Control was in use when the ESC activates, the Cruise

Control automatically disengages.

The Cruise Control can be reengaged when the road conditions allow. See "Cruise Control System"

later in this chapter. (if equipped)

5-30

ESC OFF condition

To cancel ESC operation :

• State 2

• State 1

Indicator lights

■

ESC indicator light (blinks)

■

ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)

OAE056018L

Press the ESC OFF button briefly.

The ESC OFF indicator light and message "Traction Control disabled" will illuminate. In this state, the traction control function of ESC is disabled, but the brake control function of ESC still operates.

OAE056020L

Press and hold the ESC OFF button continuously for more than 3 seconds. The ESC OFF indicator light and message "Traction & Stability

Control disabled" illuminates and a warning chime sounds. In this state, both the traction control function of

ESC and the brake control function of ESC are disabled.

If the POWER button is placed to the

OFF position when ESC is off, ESC remains off. Upon restarting the vehicle, the ESC will automatically turn on again.

When the POWER button is pressed to the ON position, the ESC indicator light illuminates, then goes off if the

ESC system is operating normally.

The ESC indicator light blinks whenever the ESC is operating.

If the ESC indicator light stays on, your vehicle may have a malfunction with the ESC system. When this warning light illuminates, have the vehicle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

The ESC OFF indicator light comes on when the ESC is turned off with the button.

5

5-31


WARNING

When the ESC is blinking, this indicates the ESC is active:

Drive slowly and NEVER attempt to accelerate. NEVER turn the

ESC off while the ESC indicator light is blinking or you may lose control of the vehicle resulting in an accident.

NOTICE

Driving with wheels and tires with different sizes may cause the ESC system to malfunction. Before replacing tires, make sure all four tires and wheels are the same size. Never drive the vehicle with different sized wheels and tires installed.

ESC OFF usage

When Driving

The ESC OFF mode should only be used briefly to help free the vehicle if stuck in snow or mud, by temporarily stopping operation of the ESC, to maintain wheel torque.

To turn ESC off while driving, press the ESC OFF button while driving on a flat road surface.

NOTICE

• Do not allow wheel(s) of one axle to spin excessively while the ESC, ABS, and parking brake warning lights are displayed.

The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.

Reduce vehicle power and do not spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights are displayed.

• When operating the vehicle on a dynamometer, make sure the

ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light illuminated).

i

Information

Turning the ESC off does not affect

ABS or standard brake system operation.

5-32

Vehicle Stability Management

(VSM)

The Vehicle Stability Management

(VSM) is a function of the Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system. It helps ensure the vehicle stays stable when accelerating or braking suddenly on wet, slippery and rough roads where traction over the four tires can suddenly become uneven.

VSM operation

VSM ON condition

The VSM operates when:

• The Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) is on.

• Vehicle speed is approximately above 9 mph (15 km/h) on curve roads.

• Vehicle speed is approximately above 12 mph (20 km/h) when the vehicle is braking on rough roads.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when using the Vehicle Stability

Management (VSM):

•

ALWAYS check the speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead.The VSM is not a substitute for safe driving practices.

•

Never drive too fast for the road conditions. The VSM system will not prevent accidents. Excessive speed in bad weather, slippery and uneven roads can result in severe accidents.

When operating

When you apply your brakes under conditions which may activate the

ESC, you may hear sounds from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your VSM is active.

i

Information

The VSM does not operate when:

• Driving on a banked road such as a gradient or incline.

• Driving in reverse.

• The ESC OFF indicator light is on.

• The EPS (Electric power steering) warning light ( ) is on or blinks.

5

5-33


VSM OFF condition

To cancel VSM operation, press the

ESC OFF button. ESC OFF indicator light ( ) will illuminate.

To turn on VSM, press the ESC OFF button again. The ESC OFF indicator light will go out.

NOTICE

Driving with wheels and tires with different sizes may cause the VSM system to malfunction. Before replacing tires, make sure all four tires and wheels are the same size. Never drive the vehicle with different sized tires and wheels installed.

WARNING

If the ESC indicator light ( ) or

EPS warning light ( ) stays on or blinks, your vehicle may have a malfunction with the

VSM system. When the warning light illuminates, have the vehicle checked by an authorized


Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)

The Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) helps prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. The system operates the brakes automatically for approximately 2 seconds and releases the brake after 2 seconds or when the accelerator pedal is depressed.

WARNING

Always be ready to depress the accelerator pedal when starting off on a incline. The HAC activates only for approximately 2 seconds.

i

Information

• The HAC does not operate when the gear is in P (Park) or N (Neutral).

• The HAC activates even when the

ESC (Electronic Stability Control) is off. However, it does not activate, when the ESC does not operate normally.

5-34

Good Braking Practices

WARNING

Whenever leaving the vehicle or parking, always come to a complete stop and continue to depress the brake pedal. Shift to the P (Park) position, then apply the parking brake, and place the POWER button in the

OFF position.

Vehicles parked with the parking brake not applied or not fully engaged may roll inadvertently and may cause injury to the driver and others. ALWAYS apply the parking brake before exiting the vehicle.

Wet brakes can be dangerous! The brakes may get wet if the vehicle is driven through standing water or if it is washed. Your vehicle will not stop as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicle to pull to one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakes lightly until the braking action returns to normal. If the braking action does not return to normal, stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

DO NOT drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. Even light, but constant pedal pressure can result in the brakes overheating, brake wear, and possibly even brake failure.

If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply the brakes gently and keep the vehicle pointed straight ahead while you slow down. When you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull off the road and stop in a safe location.

Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped to prevent the vehicle from rolling forward.

5-35

5


D RIIV E M OD E IIN TE AT ED CO NT OL YS EM

ECO

F E QU PE

The mode changes, as below, whenever the DRIVE MODE button is pressed.

NORMAL SPORT

When NORMAL mode is selected, it is not displayed on the instrument cluster.

ECO mode

ECO mode improves battery charge use efficiency for eco-friendly driving.

• When ECO mode is selected by pressing the DRIVE MODE button, the ECO indicator (green color) will illuminate.

• If the vehicle is set to ECO mode, when the vehicle is turned OFF and restarted the Drive Mode setting will remain in ECO mode.

OAEE056010N

The drive mode may be selected according to the driver's preference or road condition.

The system resets to be in the NOR-

MAL mode (except if it is in ECO mode), when the vehicle is restarted.

i

Information

Battery charge use efficiency depends on the driver's driving habit and road condition.

i

Information

If there is a problem with the instrument cluster, the drive mode will be in

NORMAL mode and may not change to ECO mode or SPORT mode.

5-36

When ECO mode is activated:

• The acceleration response may be slightly reduced as the accelerator pedal is depressed moderately.

• The air conditioner performance may be limited.

• The shift pattern of the gear may change.

The above situations are normal conditions when ECO mode is activated to improve fuel efficiency.

SPORT mode

SPORT mode provides sporty but firm riding.

• When SPORT mode is selected by pressing the DRIVE MODE button, the SPORT indicator (orange color) will illuminate.

• Whenever the vehicle is restarted, the Drive Mode will revert back to

NORMAL mode. If SPORT mode is desired, re-select SPORT mode from the DRIVE MODE button.

i

Information

In SPORT mode, the fuel efficiency may decrease.

5

5-37


B LIIN -S OT OL

Blind spot area

SIIO N W RN

Closing at high speed

OAE056106

The Blind-spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system uses radar sensors in the rear bumper to monitor and warn the driver of an approaching vehicle in the driver's blind spot area.

The system monitors the rear area of the vehicle and provides information to the driver with an audible alert and an indicator on the outer side view mirrors.

G ((B CW YS TE M ((IIF EQ UIIP D))

(1) Blind-spot Collision Warning

(BCW)

The Blind-spot Collision Warning

(BCW) range varies relative to vehicle speed. Note that if your vehicle is traveling much faster than the vehicles around you, the warning will not occur.

(2) BCW : Closing at high speed

The BCW-Closing at high speed feature will help alert you when a vehicle is approaching in an adjacent lane at a high rate of speed.

If the driver activates the turn signal when the system detects an oncoming vehicle, the system sounds an audible alert.

The time of alert varies according to the speed difference between you and the approaching vehicle.

(3) RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic

Collision Warning)

The RCCW feature monitors approaching cross traffic from the left and right side of the vehicle when your vehicle is in reverse.

The feature will operate when the vehicle is moving in reverse below about 6 mph (10 km/h).

If oncoming cross traffic is detected a warning chime will sound.

The time of alert varies according to the speed difference between you and the approaching vehicle.

WARNING

•

Always be aware of road conditions while driving and be alert for unexpected situations even though the Blindspot Collision Warning (BCW) system is operating.

•

The Blind-spot Collision

Warning (BCW) system is not a substitute for proper and safe driving. Always drive safely and use caution when changing lanes or backing up the vehicle. The Blind-spot

Collision Warning (BCW) system may not detect every object alongside the vehicle.

5-38

Blind-spot Collision Warning

(BCW) (if equipped)

Operating conditions

OAEE056026

To operate:

Press the BCW switch with the

POWER button in the ON position.

The indicator on the BCW switch will illuminate.

When the system is not used, turn the system off by turning off the switch.

To cancel:

Press the BCW switch again. The indicator on the switch will go off.

When the system is not used, turn the system off by turning off the switch.

The function will activate when:

1. The system is on.

2. The vehicle speed is above approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

3. An oncoming vehicle is detected in the blind spot area.

i

Information

• If the vehicle is turned off then on again, the BCW system returns to the previous state.

• When the system is turned on, the warning light will illuminate for 3 seconds on the outer side view mirror.

5

5-39


■

Left side

■

Left side

■

Right side

■

Right side

OAEE056031L

First stage alert

If a vehicle is detected within the boundary of the system, a warning light (yellow) will illuminate on the outer side view mirror.

Once the detected vehicle is no longer within the blind spot area, the warning will turn off depending on the driving conditions of the vehicle.

OAEE056028L OAEE056029

Second stage alert

A warning chime to alert the driver will activate when:

1. A vehicle has been detected in the blind spot area by the radar system

(the warning light will illuminate on the outer side view mirror) (i.e., in the first stage alert) AND

2. The turn signal is applied (same side as where the vehicle is being detected).

When this alert is activated, the warning light on the outer side view mirror will also blink.

If you turn off the turn signal indicator, the second stage alert (warning chime and blinking warning light on the outer side view mirror) will be deactivated.

5-40

• The second stage alarm may be deactivated.

- To deactivate the warning chime:

Go to the 'User Settings

→

Driver

Assistance and deselect Blind-

Spot Collision Warning sound' on the LCD display.

- To activate the warning chime:


→

Driver

Assistance and select Blind-Spot

Collision Warning sound' on the

LCD display.

i

Information

The warning chime function helps alert the driver. Deactivate this function only when it is necessary.


"LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.

Rear Cross-Traffic Collision

Warning (RCCW)

(if equipped)

The Rear Cross-Traffic Collision

Warning function monitors approaching cross traffic from the left and right side of the vehicle when your vehicle is in reverse.

Operating conditions

To operate:


→

Driver

Assistance and select Rear Cross-

Traffic Collision Warning' on the LCD display. For more information, refer

to "LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.

The system will turn on and standby to activate. The system will activate when vehicle speed is below 6 mph

(10 km/h) and with the gear in R

(Reverse).

i

Information

• The last selected setting (ON or

OFF) of the RCCW is remained in the system.

• The system will activate when vehicle speed is below 6.2 mph (10 km/h) and with the gear shifted to R

(Reverse).

• The RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic

Collision Warning) detecting range is approximately 1 ft ~ 65 ft (0.5 m ~

20 m) in the direction of both lateral sides of the vehicle.

An approaching vehicle will be detected if their vehicle speed is within 2.5 ~ 22.5 mph (4 km/h ~36 km/h).

Note that the detecting range may vary under certain conditions. As always, use caution and pay close attention to your surroundings when backing up your vehicle.

If the function is deselected from the instrument cluster, the function will deactivate.

5

5-41


Warning type

■

Left

■

Right

OAE058046/OAE058047

If the vehicle detected by the sensors approaches your vehicle, the warning chime will sound, the warning light on the outer side view mirror will blink and a message will appear on the LCD display.

i

Information

• The warning chime will turn off when:

- The detected vehicle moves out of the sensing area or

- when the vehicle is right behind your vehicle or

- when the vehicle is not approaching your vehicle or

- when the other vehicle slows down.

• The system may not operate properly due to other factors or circumstances. Always pay attention to your surrounding.

• If the sensing area near the rear bumper is blocked by either a wall or barrier or by a parked vehicle, the system sensing area may be reduced.

WARNING

•

With the system activated, the warning light on the outer side view mirror will illuminate whenever a vehicle is detected at the rear side by the system.

To avoid accidents, do not focus only on the warning light and neglect to see the surrounding of the vehicle.

•

Drive safely even though the vehicle is equipped with a

Blind-spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system and Rear

Cross-Traffic Collision

Warning (RCCW). Do not solely rely on the system but check your surrounding before changing lanes or backing the vehicle up.

The system may not alert the driver in some conditions so always check your surroundings while driving.

(Continued)

5-42

(Continued)

•

The Blind-spot Collision

Warning (BCW) system and

Rear Cross-Traffic Collision

Warning (RCCW) are not a substitute for proper and safe driving practices.

Always drive safely and use caution when changing lanes or backing up your vehicle. The Blindspot Collision Warning (BCW) system may not detect every object alongside the vehicle.

Detecting sensor

Warning message

NOTICE

• The system may not work properly when the bumper has been damaged, or if the rear bumper has been replaced or repaired.

• The sensing range differs somewhat according to the width of the road. When the road is narrow, the system may detect other vehicles in the next lane.

• The system may turn off due to strong electromagnetic waves.

OAEE056012N

The sensors are located inside the rear bumper.

Always keep the rear bumper clean for proper operation of the system.

OAEE058241L

Blind-Spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system disabled.

Radar blocked

This warning message may appear when :

- One or both of the sensors on the rear bumper is blocked by dirt or snow or a foreign object.

- Driving in rural areas where the

BCW sensor does not detect another vehicle for an extended period of time.

- When there is inclement weather such as heavy snow or rain.

5

5-43


- A trailer or carrier is installed. (To use the BCW system, remove the trailer or carrier from your vehicle.)

If any of these conditions occur, the light on the BCW switch and the system will turn off automatically.

When the BCW canceled warning message is displayed in the cluster, check to make sure that the rear bumper is free from any dirt or snow in the areas where the sensor is located. Remove any dirt, snow, or foreign material that could interfere with the radar sensors.

After any dirt or debris is removed, the BCW system should operate normally after about 10 minutes of driving the vehicle.

If the system still does not operate normally have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OAEE058242L

Check Blind-Spot Collision

Warning (BCW) system

If there is a problem with the BCW system, a warning message will appear and the light on the switch will turn off. The system will turn off automatically. Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Limitations of the system

The driver must be cautious in the below situations, because the system may not detect other vehicles or objects in certain circumstances.

• When a trailer or carrier is installed.

• The vehicle drives in inclement weather such as heavy rain or snow.

• The sensor is polluted with rain, snow, mud, etc.

• The rear bumper where the sensor is located is covered with a foreign object such as a bumper sticker, a bumper guard, a bike rack, etc.

• The rear bumper is damaged, or the sensor is out of the original default position.

• The vehicle height gets lower or higher due to heavy loading in the luggage compartment, abnormal tire pressure, etc.

• When the temperature near the rear bumper area is high or low.

5-44

• When the sensors are blocked by other vehicles, walls or parking-lot pillars.

• The vehicle drives on a curved road or through a tollgate.

• The vehicle is driven near areas containing metal substances such as a construction zone, railroad, etc.

• There is a fixed object near the vehicle, such as a guardrail, person, animal, etc.

• While going down or up a steep road where the height of the lane is different.

• When driving through a narrow road with many trees or bushes.

• When driving on wet surfaces.

• When driving through a large area with few vehicles or structures around, such as a desert, rural area, etc.

• A big vehicle is near such as a bus or truck.

• When other vehicles are close to your vehicle.

• When the other vehicle approaches very close.

• When the detected vehicle also moves back, as your vehicle drives back.

• While changing lanes.

• The vehicle is turning left or right at a crossroad.

• If the vehicle has started at the same time as the vehicle next to you and has accelerated.

• When the other vehicle passes at a very fast speed.

• When the vehicle in the next lane moves two lanes away from you

OR when the vehicle two lanes away moves to the next lane to you.

• A motorcycle or bicycle is near.

• A flat trailer is near.

• If there are small objects in the detecting area such as a shopping cart or a baby stroller.

• If there is a low height vehicle such as a sports car.

Non-operating condition

The BCW indicator on the outer side view mirror may not illuminate properly when:

• The outer side view mirror housing is damaged.

• The mirror is covered with dirt, snow, or debris.

• The window is covered with dirt, snow, or debris.

• The window is tinted.

i

Information


Operation is subject to the following two conditions:



5-45

5


F OR AR CO LL SIIO NVO

The Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) system is designed to help detect and monitor the vehicle ahead or detect a pedestrian (if equipped) in the roadway through radar signals and camera recognition to warn the driver that a collision is imminent, and if necessary, apply emergency braking.

AN E A SIIS T ((F A)) S ST F E QU PE

System Setting and Activation

WARNING

System setting

Take the following precautions when using the Forward

Collision-Avoidance Assist

(FCA) system:

•

This system is only a supplemental system and it is not intended to, nor does it replace the need for extreme care and attention of the driver. The sensing range and objects detectable by the sensors are limited. Pay attention to the road conditions at all times.

•

NEVER drive too fast in accordance with the road conditions or while cornering.

•

Always drive cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring. FCA does not stop the vehicle completely and is not a collision avoidance system.

OAEE058243L

The driver can activate the FCA by placing the POWER button to the ON position and by selecting:

'User Settings

→

Driver Assistance

→

Forward-Collision Avoidance

Assist'

The FCA deactivates, when the driver deselects the system setting.

5-46

The warning light illuminates on the LCD display, when you cancel the FCA system. The driver can monitor the FCA ON/OFF status on the LCD display. Also, the warning light illuminates when the ESC

(Electronic Stability Control) is turned off (Traction & Stability control disabled).

If the warning light remains ON when the FCA is activated, have the system checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

OAEE058023L

The driver can select the initial warning activation time on the LCD display.


→

Driver

Assistance

→

Forward Collision

Warning

→

Early/Noramal/Late'.

• Normal:

When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision Warning is activated normally. This setting allows for a nominal amount of distance between the vehicle or pedestrian ahead before the initial warning occurs.

• Late:

When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision Warning is activated later than normal. This setting reduces the amount of distance between the vehicle or pedestrian ahead before the initial warning occurs.

The options for the initial Forward

Collision Warning includes the following:

• Early:

When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision Warning is activated earlier than normal. This setting maximizes the amount of distance between the vehicle or pedestrian ahead before the initial warning occurs.

5-47

5


Prerequisite for activation

The FCA system is on and ready when FCA is selected on the LCD display and when the following prerequisites are satisfied:

Control) is activated.

- Driving speed exceeds approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). (The FCA is only activated within a certain speed range.)

- The system detects a pedestrian or a vehicle in front, which may collide with your vehicle. (The FCA may not be activated or may sound a warning alarm in accordance with the driving situation or vehicle condition.)

WARNING

•

Completely stop the vehicle on a safe location before operating the switch on the steering wheel to activate/ deactivate the FCA system.

•

The FCA automatically activates when the POWER button is in the ON position. The driver can deactivate the FCA by canceling the system setting on the LCD display.

•

If you cancel the ESC

(Electronic Stability Control) when the FCA system is turned on the FCA automatically deactivates and the FCA warning light illuminates.

When the ESC is cancelled the FCA cannot be activated on the LCD display.

FCA Warning Message and

System Control

The FCA produces warning messages and warning alarms in accordance with the collision risk levels, such as abrupt stopping of the vehicle in front, insufficient braking distance, or pedestrian detection. Also, it controls the brakes in accordance with the collision risk levels.

5-48

The driver can select the initial warning activation time in the User

Settings in the LCD display. The options for the initial Forward

Collision Warning include Early,

Normal or Late initial warning time.

Collision Warning

(2

nd

warning) - Red

Collision Warning

(1

st

warning) - Yellow

Emergency braking

(3

rd

warning)

OAEE058244L

This initial warning message appears on the LCD display with a warning chime.

OAEE058244L

This warning message appears on the LCD display with a warning chime. Additionally, some vehicle system intervention occurs to help decelerate the vehicle.

- Your vehicle speed may decelerate moderately.

- The FCA system limitedly controls the brakes to preemptively mitigate impact in a collision.

OAE058030L

This warning message appears on the LCD display with a warning chime.

Additionally, some vehicle system intervention occurs to help decelerate the vehicle.

- The FCA system limitedly controls the brakes to preemptively mitigate impact in a collision. The brake control is maximized just before a collision.

5

5-49


Brake operation

• In an urgent situation, the braking system enters into the ready status for prompt reaction against the driver's depressing the brake pedal.

• The FCA provides additional braking power for optimum braking performance, when the driver depresses the brake pedal.

• The braking control is automatically deactivated, when the driver sharply depresses the accelerator pedal, or when the driver abruptly operates the steering wheel.

• The FCA brake control is automatically canceled, when risk factors disappear.

CAUTION

The driver should always use extreme caution while operating the vehicle, whether or not there is a warning message or alarm from the FCA system.

WARNING

The braking control cannot completely stop the vehicle nor avoid all collisions. The driver should hold the responsibility to safely drive and control the vehicle.

WARNING

The FCA system logic operates within certain parameters, such as the distance from the vehicle or pedestrian ahead, the speed of the vehicle ahead, and the driver's vehicle speed. Certain conditions such as inclement weather and road conditions may affect the operation of the

FCA system.

FCA Sensor

OAEE056011N

In order for the FCA system to operate properly, always make sure the radar sensor cover is clean and free of dirt, snow, and debris. Dirt, snow, or foreign substances on the lens may adversely affect the sensing performance of the sensor.

5-50

NOTICE

• Do not apply license plate frame or foreign objects such as a bumper sticker or a bumper guard near the radar sensor.

Doing so may adversely affect the sensing performance of the radar.

• Always keep the radar sensor and cover clean and free of dirt and debris.

• Use only a soft cloth to wash the vehicle. Do not spray pressurized water directly on the sensor or sensor cover.

• Be careful not to apply unnecessary force on the radar sensor or sensor cover. If the sensor is forcibly moved out of proper alignment, the FCA system may not operate correctly. In this case, a warning message may not be displayed. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

(Continued)

• If the front bumper becomes damaged in the area around the radar sensor, the FCA system may not operate properly. Have the vehicle inspected by authorized HYUNDAI.

• Use only genuine parts to repair or replace a damaged sensor or sensor cover. Do not apply paint to the sensor cover.

NOTICE

• NEVER install any accessories or stickers on the front windshield, nor tint the front windshield.

• NEVER locate any reflective objects (i.e. white paper, mirror) over the dashboard. Any light reflection may cause a malfunction of the system.

• Pay extreme caution to keep the camera out of water.

• NEVER arbitrarily disassemble the camera assembly, nor apply any impact on the camera assembly.

• Playing the vehicle audio system at high volume may offset the system warning sounds.

i

Information

Have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer when:

• The windshield glass is replaced.

• The front bumper is replaced.

• The radar sensor or cover gets damaged or replaced.

5-51

5


Warning message and warning light

System Malfunction

OAEE058245L

Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist

(FCA) system disabled.

Radar blocked

When the sensor cover is blocked with dirt, snow, or debris, the FCA system operation may stop temporarily. If this occurs, a warning message will appear on the LCD display.

Remove any dirt, snow, or debris and clean the radar sensor cover before operating the FCA system.

The FCA may not properly operate in an area (e.g. open terrain), where any substances are not detected after turning ON the vehicle.

5-52

OAEE058246L

Check Forward Collision Avoidance

Assist system

• When the FCA is not working properly, the FCA warning light ( ) will illuminate and the warning message will appear for a few seconds. After the message disappears, the master warning light

( ) will illuminate. In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• The FCA warning message may appear along with the illumination of the ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) warning light.

WARNING

•

The FCA is only a supplemental system for the driver's convenience. The driver should hold the responsibility to control the vehicle operation. Do not solely depend on the FCA system. Rather, maintain a safe braking distance, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce the driving speed.

•

In certain instances and under certain driving conditions, the FCA system may unintentionally activate. This initial warning message appears on the LCD display with a warning chime.

Also, in certain instances the front radar sensor or camera recognition system may not detect the vehicle or pedestrian ahead. The FCA system may not activate and the warning message will not be displayed.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•


FCA system, the Forward


(FCA) system is not applied even though the braking system is operating normally.

•

If the vehicle in front stops suddenly, you may have less control of the brake system.

Therefore, always keep a safe distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.

•

The FCA system may activate during braking and the vehicle may stop suddenly shifting loose objects toward the passengers.

Always keep loose objects secured.

•

The FCA system may not activate if the driver applies the brake pedal to avoid a collision.

•

The brake control may be insufficient, possibly causing a collision, if a vehicle in front abruptly stops. Always pay extreme caution.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

Occupants may get injured, if the vehicle abruptly stops by the activated FCA system. Pay extreme caution.

WARNING

•

The FCA system operates only to help detect vehicles or pedestrians in front of the vehicle.

•

The FCA system does not operate when the vehicle is in reverse.

•

The FCA system is not designed to detect other objects on the road such as animals.

•

The FCA system does not detect vehicles in the opposite lane.

•

The FCA system does not detect cross traffic vehicles that are approaching.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

The FCA system cannot detect the driver approaching the side view of a parked vehicle (for example on a dead end street.)

In these cases, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce the driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

5

5-53


Limitations of the System

The Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) system is designed to help monitor the vehicle ahead or a pedestrian in the roadway through radar signals and camera recognition to warn the driver that a collision is imminent, and if necessary, apply emergency braking.

In certain situations, the radar sensor or the camera may not be able to detect the vehicle or pedestrian ahead. In these cases, the FCA system may not operate normally. The driver must pay careful attention in the following situations where the

FCA operation may be limited.

Detecting vehicles

The sensor may be limited when:

• The radar sensor or camera is blocked with a foreign object or debris

• Inclement weather such as heavy rain or snow obscures the field of view of the radar sensor or camera

• There is interference by electromagnetic waves

• There is severe irregular reflection from the radar sensor

• The radar/camera sensor recognition is limited

• The vehicle in front is too small to be detected (for example a motorcycle or a bicycle, etc.)

• The vehicle in front is an oversize vehicle or trailer that is too big to be detected by the camera recognition system (for example a tractor trailer, etc.)

• The driver's field of view is not well illuminated (either too dark or too much reflection or too much backlight that obscures the field of view)

• The vehicle in front does not have their rear lights properly turned ON

• The outside brightness changes suddenly, for example when entering or exiting a tunnel

• Light coming from a street light or an oncoming vehicle is reflected on a wet road surface such as a puddle in the road

• The field of view in front is obstructed by sun glare

• The windshield glass is fogged up; a clear view of the road is obstructed

• The vehicle in front is driving erratically

• The vehicle is on unpaved or uneven rough surfaces, or roads with sudden gradient changes

• The adverse road conditions cause excessive vehicle vibrations while driving

• The vehicle is moving under ground level or inside a building

• The vehicle is driven near areas containing metal substances such as a construction zone, railroad, etc.

5-54

• The vehicle in front is moving vertically to the driving direction

• The vehicle in front is stopped vertically

• The vehicle in front is driving towards your vehicle or reversing

OAE056100

- Driving on a curve

The performance of the FCA system may be limited when driving on a curved road.

In certain instances on a curved road, the FCA system may activate prematurely.

Also, in certain instances the front radar sensor or camera recognition system may not detect the vehicle traveling on a curved road.

In these cases, the driver must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

OAE056101

The FCA system may recognize a vehicle in the next lane when driving on a curved road.

In this case, the system may unnecessarily alarm the driver and apply the brake.

Always pay attention to road and driving conditions, while driving. If necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

Also, when necessary depress the accelerator pedal to prevent the system from unnecessarily decelerating your vehicle.

Check the surrounding traffic conditions before use.

5-55

5


OAE056102

- Driving on a slope

The performance of the FCA decreases while driving upward or downward on a slope, not recognizing the vehicle in front in the same lane. It may unnecessarily produce the warning message and the warning alarm, or it may not produce the warning message and the warning alarm at all.

When the FCA suddenly recognizes the vehicle in front while passing over a slope, you may experience sharp deceleration.

Always keep your eyes forward while driving upward or downward on a slope, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain distance.

5-56

OAE056103

- Changing lanes

When a vehicle changes lanes in front of you, the FCA system may not immediately detect the vehicle, especially if the vehicle changes lanes abruptly. In this case, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

OAE056109

When driving in stop-and-go traffic, and a stopped vehicle in front of you merges out of the lane, the FCA system may not immediately detect the new vehicle that is now in front of you. In this case, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

OAE056105

- Detecting the vehicle in front of you

If the vehicle in front of you has cargo that extends rearward from the cab, or when the vehicle in front of you has higher ground clearance, additional special attention is required.

The FCA system may not be able to detect the cargo extending from the vehicle. In these instances, you must maintain a safe braking distance from the rearmost object, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain distance.

Detecting pedestrians

(if equipped)

The sensor may be limited when:

• The pedestrian is not fully detected by the camera recognition system, for example, if the pedestrian is leaning over or is not fully walking upright

• The pedestrian is moving very quickly or appears abruptly in the camera detection area

• The pedestrian is wearing clothing that easily blends into the background, making it difficult to be detected by the camera recognition system

• It is difficult to detect and distinguish the pedestrian from other objects in the surroundings, for example, when there is a group of pedestrians or a large crowd

• There is an item similar to a person’s body structure

• The pedestrian is small

• The pedestrian has impaired mobility

• The sensor recognition is limited

• The radar sensor or camera is blocked with a foreign object or debris

• Inclement weather such as heavy rain or snow obscures the field of view of the radar sensor or camera

• The outside lighting is too bright

(e.g. when driving in bright sunlight or in sun glare) or too dark (e.g.

when driving on a dark rural road at night)

• When light coming from a street light or an oncoming vehicle is reflected on a wet road surface such as a puddle in the road

• The field of view in front is obstructed by sun glare

• The windshield glass is fogged up; a clear view of the road is obstructed

• The adverse road conditions cause excessive vehicle vibrations while driving

5

5-57


WARNING

•

Do not use the Forward


(FCA) system when towing a vehicle. Application of the

FCA system while towing may adversely affect the safety of your vehicle or the towing vehicle.

•

Use extreme caution when the vehicle in front of you has cargo that extends rearward from the cab, or when the vehicle in front of you has higher ground clearance.

•

The FCA system is designed to help detect and monitor the vehicle ahead or help detect a pedestrian in the roadway through radar signals and camera recognition. It is not designed to detect bicycles, motorcycles, or smaller wheeled objects such as luggage bags, shopping carts, or strollers.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

Never try to test the operation of the FCA system. Doing so may cause severe injury or death.

i

Information

In some instances, the FCA system may be cancelled when subjected to electromagnetic interference.

i

Information





5-58

L AN E K EE PIIN G A SIIS T ((L A)) S YS EM F E QU PE

WARNING

The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system is not a substitute for safe driving practices, but a convenience function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always be aware of the surrounding and steer the vehicle.

OAEE056013N

The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system helps detect lane markers on the road with a camera at the front windshield, and assists the driver's steering to help keep the vehicle between lanes.

When the system detects the vehicle straying from its lane, it alerts the driver with a visual and audible warning, while applying a slight countersteering torque, to try to prevent the vehicle from moving out of its lane.

WARNING

Take the following precautions when using the Lane Keeping

Assist (LKA) system:

•

Do not steer the steering wheel suddenly when the steering wheel is being assisted by the system.

•

LKA system helps to prevent the driver from moving out of the lane unintentionally by assisting the driver's steering.

However, the driver should not solely rely on the system but always pay attention on the steering wheel to stay in the lane.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

The operation of the LKA system can be canceled or not work properly according to road condition and surroundings.

Always be cautious when driving.

•

Do not disassemble the LKA system camera temporarily to tint the window or attach any types of coatings and accessories. If you disassemble the camera and assemble it again, take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked for calibration.

•

When you replace the windshield glass, LKA system camera or related parts of the steering wheel, take your vehicle to an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked for calibration.

(Continued)

5

5-59


(Continued)

•

The system detects lane markers and controls the steering wheel by a camera, therefore, if the lane markers are hard to detect, the system may not work properly.

Please refer to "Limitations of the system".

•

Do not remove or damage the related parts of LKA system.

•

You may not hear a warning sound of LKA system because of excessive audio sound.

•

If any other warning sound such as seat belt warning chime is already generated, the Lane Keeping Assist

(LKA) system warning may not sound.

•

Do not place objects on the dashboard that reflects light such as mirrors, white paper, etc. The system may malfunction if the sunlight is reflected.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

Always have your hands on the steering wheel while the

LKA system is activated. If you continue to drive with your hands off the steering wheel after the "Keep hands on steering wheel" warning message appears, the system will turn off automatically.

After then, if you drive with your hands on the steering wheel, the control will be activated again.

•

The steering wheel is not continuously controlled so if the vehicle speed is at a higher speed when leaving a lane the vehicle may not be able to be controlled by the system. The driver must always follow the speed limit when using the system.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

If you attach objects to the steering wheel, the system may not assist steering or the hands off alarm may not work properly.

5-60

LKA System Operation

i

Information

If the indicator (white) is activated from the previous ignition cycle, the system will turn ON without any additional control. If you press the LKA button again, the indicator on the cluster goes off.

LKA system activation

OAEE057144N

To activate/deactivate the LKA system:

With the POWER button in the ON position, press the LKA system button located on the instrument panel on the left hand side of the steering wheel. The indicator in the cluster display will initially illuminate white.

This indicates the LKA system is in the READY but NOT ENABLED state.

The color of indicator will change depending on the condition of LKA system.

- White : Sensor does not detect lane markers or vehicle speed is under 40 mph (64 km/h).

- Green : Sensor detects lane markers and the system is able to control vehicle steering.

OAEE058247L

• To see the LKA system screen on the LCD display in the cluster, select ASSIST mode ( ). For more information, refer to "LCD

Display Modes" in chapter 3.

• When both lane markers are detected and all the conditions to activate the LKA system are satisfied, a green steering wheel indicator will illuminate and the LKA system indicator light will change from white to green. This indicates that the LKA system is in the

ENABLED state and the steering wheel will be able to be controlled.

5

5-61


WARNING

The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system is a system to prevent the driver from leaving the lane.

However, the driver should not solely rely on the system but always check the road conditions when driving.

■

Lane marker undetected

■

Lane marker detected

• If your vehicle speed exceeds 40 mph (64 km/h) and the LKA system button is ON, the system is enabled. If your vehicle departs from the projected lane in front of you, the LKA system operates as follows:

■

Left lane marker

■

Right lane marker

OAEE058248L/OAEE058249L

• If vehicle speed is over 40 mph (64 km/h) and the system detects lane markers, the color changes from gray to white.

• If the system detects the left lane marker, the left lane marker color will change from gray to white.

• If the system detects the right marker line, the right lane marker color will change from gray to white.

• Both lane markers must be detected for the system to fully activate.

OAEE058250L/OAEE058251L

When the conditions below are met,

LKA will be enable to assist steering.

• Vehicle speed is above 40 mph (64 kph).

• Both lane markers are detected by

LKA.

• The vehicle is between the lane markers.

5-62

If LKA can assist steering, a green steering wheel indicator will illuminate.

A visual warning appears on the cluster LCD display. Either the left lane marker or the right lane marker in the cluster LCD display will blink depending on which direction the vehicle is veering.

If the steering wheel appears, the system will control the vehicle's steering to prevent the vehicle from crossing the lane marker.

OAEE056129L

Keep hands on steering wheel

If the driver takes their hands off the steering wheel for several seconds while the LKA system is activated, the system will warn the driver.

i

Information

If the steering wheel is held very lightly the message may still appear because the LKA system may not recognize that the driver has their hands on the wheel.

WARNING

The warning message may appear late according to road conditions. Therefore, always have your hands on the steering wheel while driving.

5

5-63


Warning Light and Message

WARNING

•

The driver is responsible for accurate steering.

•

Turn off the system in below situations.

- In bad weather

- In bad road condition

OAEE058252L

Driver's grasp not detected.

LKA system will be disabled temporarily

If the driver still does not have their hands on the steering wheel after the message "Keep hands on steering wheel", the system will not control the steering wheel and warn the driver only when the driver crosses the lane markers.

However, if the driver has their hands on the steering wheel again, the system will start controlling the steering wheel.

needs to be controlled by the driver frequently.

i

Information

• Even though the steering is assisted by the system, the driver can still steer to control the steering wheel.

• The steering wheel may feel heavier when the steering wheel is assisted by the system than when it is not.

OAEE058253L

Check Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system

If there is a problem with the system a message will appear for a few seconds. If the problem continues the

LKA system failure indicator will illuminate.

5-64

LKA system failure indicator

The LKA system failure indicator (yellow) will illuminate if the LKA system is not working properly.

Have your vehicle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

The system will be cancelled when:

• You change lanes with the turn signal.

- Using the turn signal to change lanes.

- If you change lanes without the turn signal on, the steering wheel might be controlled.

• LKA system can transit to steering assist mode when the car is near to middle of the lane after system on or the lane was changed. LKA system can not assist steering if the vehicle follows lane marker too close continuously before transition to steering assist mode.

• The control of ESC (Electronic

Stability Control) or VSM (Vehicle

Stability Management) is activated.

• The steering will not be assisted when your drive fast on a sharp curve.

• The steering will not be assisted when vehicle speed is below 40 mph (64 kph) and over 110 mph

(177 kph).

• The steering will not be assisted when you change lanes fast.

• The steering will not be assisted when you brake suddenly.

• The steering will not be assisted when the lane is very wide or narrow.

• The steering will not be assisted when only one side lane marker is detected.

• There are more than two lane markers such as a construction area.

• Radius of a curve is too small.

• When you turn steering wheel suddenly, the LKA system will be disabled temporarily.

• Driving on a steep slope or hill.

DRIVER'S ATTENTION

The driver must be cautious in the below situations may not work properly when recognition of the lane marker is poor or limited :

When lane and road condition is poor

• It is difficult to distinguish the lane marker from road when the lane marker is covered with dust or sand.

• It is difficult to distinguish the color of the lane marker from road.

• There is something looks like a lane marker.

• The lane marker is indistinct or damaged.

• The number of lanes increases/ decreases or the lane lines are crossing (Driving through a toll plaza/toll gate, merged/divided lane).

• There are more than two lane markers.

• The lane marker is very thick or thin.

5

5-65


• The lane marker is not visible due to snow, rain, stain, a puddle or other factors.

• A shadow is on the lane marker because of a median strip, guardrail, noise barriers and others.

• When the lane markers are complicated or a structure substitutes for the lines such as a construction area.

• There are crosswalk signs or other symbols on the road.

• The lane suddenly disappears such as at the intersection.

• The lane marker in a tunnel is covered with dirt or oil and etc.

• The lane is very wide or narrow.

When external condition is intervened

• The brightness of outside changes suddenly when entering/existing a tunnel or passing under a bridge.

• The headlamps are not on at night or in a tunnel, or light level is low.

• There is a boundary structure in the roadway.

• The light of street, sun, oncoming vehicle and so on reflects from the water on the road.

• When light shines brightly in the reverse direction you drive.

• The distance from the vehicle ahead is very short or the vehicle ahead drives hiding the lane line.

• You drive on a steep grade or a sharp curve.

• The vehicle vibrates heavily.

• The temperature near inside mirror is very high due to direct sun light and etc.

When front visibility is poor

• The lens or windshield is covered by strange materials.

• The sensor cannot detect the lane because of fog, heavy rain or snow.

• The windshield is fogged by humid air in the vehicle.

• Putting something on the crash pad and etc.

WARNING

The Lane Keeping Assist

System is a system to help prevent the driver from leaving the lane. However, the driver should not solely rely on the system but always take the necessary actions for safe driving practices.

5-66

LKA System Function Change

Active LKA

The Active LKA mode provides more frequent steering wheel control in comparison with the Standard LKA mode. Active LKA can reduce the driver’s fatigue to assist the steering for maintaining the vehicle in the middle of the lane.

OAE058268N

The driver can change LKA to Lane Departure Warning (LDW) System or change the LKA system mode between Active LKA and Standard LKA from the User Settings Mode on the LCD display.

Lane Departure Warning

LDW alerts the driver with a visual and acoustic warning when the system detects the vehicle leaving the lane. In this mode, the steering wheel will not be controlled. When the vehicle’s front wheel contacts the inside edge of lane line, LKA issues the lane departure warning.

i

Information





Standard LKA

The Standard LKA mode guides the driver to help keep the vehicle within the lanes. It rarely controls the steering wheel, when the vehicle drives well inside the lanes. However, it starts to control the steering wheel, when the vehicle is about to deviate out of the lanes.

5

5-67


D RIIV R A TE TIIO N W AR NIIN G ((D W)) S TE M ((IIF UIIP PE

The Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system is designed as a safety feature to help reduce drowsy or inattentive driving. The DAW displays a bar graph that is intended to represent the driver's attention and fatigue level while driving.

System Setting and Activation

System setting

• To turn ON the Driver Attention

Warning (DAW) system, turn on the vehicle, and then select 'User

Settings

→

Driver Assistance

→

Driver Attention Warning

→

High

Sensitivity/Normal Sensitivity' in the LCD display.

• The driver can select the mode of the Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system.

- High Sensitivity : The Driver

Attention Warning (DAW) system helps alert the driver of his/her fatigue level or inattentive driving practices faster than Normal mode.

- Normal Sensitivity : The Driver

Attention Warning (DAW) system helps alert the driver of his/her fatigue level or inattentive driving practices.

- Off : The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system is deactivated.

• The set-up of the Driver Attention

Warning (DAW) system will be maintained, as selected, when the vehicle is re-started.

Driver's attention level

■

System off

■

Attentive driving

OAEE058254L

OAEE058256L

5-68

OAEE058257L

• The driver can monitor their driving conditions on the LCD display.

The DAW screen will appear when you select the Assist mode tab ( ) on the LCD display if the system is activated. (For more information, refer to "LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.)

• The driver's attention level is displayed on the scale of 1 to 5. The lower the number is, the more inattentive the driver is.

• The number decreases when the driver does not take a break for a certain period of time.

• The number increases when the driver attentively drives for a certain period of time.

• When the driver turns on the system while driving, it displays 'Last

Break time' and level.

Take a break

OAEE058258L

• The "Consider taking a break" message appears on the LCD display and a warning sounds in order to suggest the driver to take a break, when the driver’s attention level is below 1.

• The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system does not suggest the driver to take a break, when the total driving time is shorter than 10 minutes.

5-69

5


CAUTION

If any other warning sound such as seat belt warning chime is already generated, the Driver

Attention Warning (DAW) system warning may not sound.

Resetting the System

• The last break time is set to 00:00 and the driver's attention level is set to 5 (very attentive) when the driver resets the Driver Attention

Warning (DAW) system.


(DAW) system resets in the following situations.

- The vehicle is turned OFF.

- The driver unfastens the seat belt and then opens the driver's door.

- The vehicle is stopped for more than 10 minutes.


(DAW) system operates again, when the driver restarts driving.

System Standby

OAEE058259L

The Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system enters the ready status and displays the 'Standby' screen in the following situations.

- The camera does not detect the lanes.

- Driving speed remains under 40 mph (64 km/h) or over 110 mph

(177 km/h).

5-70

System Malfunction

OAEE058240L

Check Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system

When the warning message appears, the system is not working properly. In this case, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

•

The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system is not a substitute for safe driving practices, but a convenience function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always drive cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring. Pay attention to the road conditions at all times.

•

The system may suggest a break according to the driver's driving pattern or habits even if the driver doesn't feel fatigue.

•

The driver, who feels fatigued, should take a break, even though there is no break suggestion by the Driver Attention

Warning (DAW) system.

NOTICE

The Driver Attention Warning system utilizes the camera sensor on the front windshield for its operation. To keep the camera sensor in the best condition, you should observe the followings:

• Do not disassemble the camera temporarily to tint the window or to attach any types of coatings and accessories. If you disassemble a camera and assemble it again, take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked for calibration.

• NEVER locate any reflective objects (i.e. white paper, mirror) over the dashboard. Any light reflection may cause a malfunction of the Driver Attention Alert

(DAW) system.

• Pay extreme caution to keep the camera sensor out of water.

• NEVER arbitrarily disassemble the camera assembly, nor apply any impact on the camera assembly.

5

5-71


CAUTION

The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system may not properly operate with limited alerting in the following situations:

•

The lane detection performance is limited. (For more information, refer to "Lane Keeping

Assist (LKA) system" in this chapter.)

•

The vehicle is violently driven or is abruptly turned for obstacle avoidance (e.g. construction area, other vehicles, fallen objects, bumpy road).

•

Forward drivability of the vehicle is severely undermined

(possibly due to wide variation in tire pressures, uneven tire wear-out, toe-in/toe-out alignment).

•

The vehicle drives on a curvy road.

•

The vehicle drives on a bumpy road.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

The vehicle drives through a windy area.

•

The vehicle is controlled by the following driving assist systems:

- Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system

- Forward Collision-avoidance

Assist (FCA) system

- Smart Cruise Control (SCC) system

CAUTION

Playing the vehicle audio system at high volume may offset the Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system warning sounds.

5-72

C RU E C NT OL F E QU PE

Cruise Control Operation

OAEE056018

1. Cruise indicator

2. SET indicator

The Cruise Control system allows you to drive at speeds above 20 mph

(30 km/h) without depressing the accelerator pedal.

WARNING

Take the following precautions:

•

Always set the vehicle speed under the speed limit.

•

If the Cruise Control is left on,

(cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated) the Cruise Control can be activated unintentionally.

Keep the Cruise Control system off (cruise indicator light

OFF) when the Cruise Control is not in use, to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.

•

Use the Cruise Control system only when traveling on open highways in good weather.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

Do not use the Cruise Control when it may be unsafe to keep the vehicle at a constant speed:

- When driving in heavy traffic or when traffic conditions make it difficult to drive at a constant speed

- When driving on rainy, icy, or snow-covered roads windy roads

- When driving in windy areas

- When driving with limited view (possibly due to bad weather such as fog, snow, rain and sandstorm)

5

5-73


i

Information

• During normal cruise control operation, when the SET switch is activated or reactivated after applying the brakes, the cruise control will energize after approximately 3 seconds.

This delay is normal.

• Before activating the cruise control function, the system will check to verify that the brake switch is operating normally. Depress the brake pedal at least once after turning ON the POWER button or starting the vehicle.

To set Cruise Control speed

OAE056068

1. Press the CRUISE button on the steering wheel to turn the system on. The cruise indicator will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which must be more than 20 mph

(30 km/h).

OAE056069

3. Push the toggle switch (1) down

(SET-), and release it. The SET indicator light will illuminate.

4. Release the accelerator pedal.

i

Information

On a steep slope, the vehicle may slightly slow down or speed up, while driving uphill or downhill.

5-74

To increase Cruise Control speed

• Depress the accelerator pedal.

When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the toggle switch (1) down (SET-).

To decrease Cruise Control speed

OAE056070

• Push the toggle switch (1) up

(RES+) and release it immediately.

The cruising speed will increase 1 mph (2.0 km/h) each time the toggle switch is operated in this manner.

• Push the toggle switch (1) up

(RES+) and hold it, while monitoring the SET speed on the instrument cluster.

Release the toggle switch when the desired speed is shown and the vehicle will accelerate to that speed.

OAE056069

• Push the toggle switch (1) down

(SET-) and release it immediately.

The cruising speed will decrease 1 mph (2.0 km/h) each time the toggle switch is operated in this manner.

• Push the toggle switch (1) down

(SET-) and hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow down. Release the toggle switch at the speed you want to maintain.

• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the toggle switch (1) down (SET-).

5-75

5


To temporarily accelerate with the Cruise Control ON

Depress the accelerator pedal. When you take your foot off the accelerator, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

If you push the toggle switch down

(SET-) at the increased speed, the

Cruise Control will maintain the increased speed.

Cruise Control will be canceled when:

OAE056071

• Depressing the brake pedal.

• Pressing the CANCEL button located on the steering wheel.

• The vehicle is shifted into N

(Neutral).

• Decreasing the vehicle speed to less than approximately 20 mph

(30 km/h).

• The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) is operating.

i

Information

Each of the above actions will cancel

Cruise Control operation (the SET indicator light in the instrument cluster will go off), but only pressing the

CRUISE button will turn the system off. If you wish to resume Cruise

Control operation, push the toggle switch up (RES+) located on your steering wheel. You will return to your previously preset speed, unless the system was turned off using the

CRUISE button.

5-76

To resume preset Cruising speed

To turn Cruise Control off

OAE056070

Push the toggle switch (1) up

(RES+). If the vehicle speed is over

20 mph (30 km/h), the vehicle will resume the preset speed.

OAE056068

• Press the CRUISE button (the cruise indicator light will go off).

5

5-77


S MA T C UIIS E C NT RO L W H S TO P & O S ST F E QU PE

The Smart Cruise Control System will automatically adjust your vehicle speed to maintain your programmed speed and following distance without requiring you to depress the accelerator or brake pedals.

OAE056097N

➀

Cruise indicator

➁

Set speed

➂

Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

To see the SCC screen on the LCD display in the cluster, select ASSIST mode ( ). For more information, refer to "LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.

The Smart Cruise Control System allows you to program the vehicle to maintain constant speed and minimum distance between the vehicle ahead.

WARNING

For your safety, please read the owner's manual before using the

Smart Cruise Control system.

WARNING

The Smart Cruise Control

System is not a substitute for safe driving practices, but a convenience function only. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check the speed and distance to the vehicle ahead.

WARNING

Take the following precautions :

•

Always set the vehicle speed under the speed limit in your country.

•

If the Smart Cruise Control is left on, (cruise ( ) indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated) the Smart Cruise Control can be activated unintentionally.

Keep the Smart Cruise

Control System off (cruise

( ) indicator light

OFF) when the Smart Cruise

Control is not in use, to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.

•

Use the Smart Cruise Control

System only when traveling on open highways in good weather.

(Continued)

5-78

(Continued)

•

Do not use the Smart Cruise

Control when it may not be safe to keep the vehicle at a constant speed:

- When driving in heavy traffic or when traffic conditions make it difficult to drive at a constant speed

- When driving on rainy, icy, or snow-covered roads

- When driving on a steep downhill or uphill

- When driving in windy areas

- When driving in parking lots barriers

- When driving on a sharp curve

- When driving with limited view (possibly due to bad weather, such as fog, snow, rain or sandstorm)

- When the vehicle sensing ability decreases due to vehicle modification resulting level difference of the vehicle's front and rear

Smart cruise control switch

Smart Cruise Control speed

To set Smart Cruise Control speed

OAEE057169N

CANCEL : Cancels cruise control operation.

CRUISE : Turns cruise control system on or off.

RES+: Resumes or increases cruise control speed.

SET-: Sets or decreases cruise control speed.

: Sets vehicle-to-vehicle distance.

OAE056068

1. Push the CRUISE button on the steering wheel to turn the system on. The cruise ( ) indicator will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed.

The Smart Cruise Control speed can be set as follows:

• 20 ~ 110 mph (30 ~ 180 km/h) : when there is no vehicle in front

• 0 ~ 110 mph (0 ~ 180 km/h) : when there is a vehicle in front

5

5-79


OAE056069

3. Push the toggle switch down

(SET-). The Set Speed and

Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance on the

LCD display will illuminate.

4. Release the accelerator pedal.

The desired speed will automatically be maintained.

If there is a vehicle in front of you, the speed may decrease to maintain the distance to the vehicle ahead.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow down or speed up slightly while going uphill or downhill.

i

Information

Vehicle speed may decrease on an upward slope and increase on a downward slope.

To increase Smart Cruise

Control set speed

CAUTION

When vehicle speed is under 6 mph (10 km/h), the Smart Cruise

Control is cancelled. The driver must adjust the vehicle speed by depressing the accelerator or brake pedal according to the road condition ahead and driving condition.

OAE056070

Follow either of these procedures:

• Push the toggle switch up (RES+), and release it immediately. The cruising speed will increase by 1 mph (1 km/h) each time you move the toggle switch up in this manner.

• Push the toggle switch up (RES+), and hold it. Your vehicle set speed will increase by 5 mph (10 km/h).

Release the toggle switch at the speed you want.

• You can set the speed to 110 mph

(180 km/h).

5-80

CAUTION

Check the driving condition before using the toggle switch.

Driving speed sharply increases, when you push up and hold the toggle switch.

To decrease the Smart Cruise

Control set speed

To temporarily accelerate with the Smart Cruise Control on

If you want to speed up temporarily when the Smart Cruise Control is on, depress the accelerator pedal.

Increased speed will not interfere with Smart Cruise Control operation or change the set speed.

To return to the set speed, take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

If you push the toggle switch down

(SET-) at increased speed, the cruising speed will be set again.

OAE056069

Follow either of these procedures:

• Push the toggle switch down (SET-), and release it immediately. The cruising speed will decrease by 1 mph (1 km/h) each time you move the toggle switch down in this manner.

• Push the toggle switch down (SET-), and hold it. Your vehicle set speed will decrease by 5 mph (10 km/h).

Release the toggle switch at the speed you want.

• You can set the speed to 20 mph

(30 km/h).

i

Information

Be careful when accelerating temporarily, because the speed is not controlled automatically at this time even if there is a vehicle in front of you.

5

5-81


Smart Cruise Control will be temporarily cancelled when:

OAE056071

Cancelled manually

• Depressing the brake pedal.

• Pressing the CANCEL button located on the steering wheel.

The Smart Cruise Control turns off temporarily when the Set Speed and

Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance indicator on the LCD display turns off.

The cruise ( illuminated continuously.

) indicator is

Cancelled automatically

• The driver's door is opened.

• The vehicle is shifted to N

(Neutral), R (Reverse) or P (Park).

• The EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) is applied.

• The vehicle speed is over 120 mph

(190 km/h).

• The vehicle stops on a steep incline.

• The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control), TCS (Traction Control

System) or ABS is operating.

• The ESC is turned off.

• The sensor or the cover is dirty or blocked with foreign matter.

• The vehicle is stopped for more than 5 minutes.

• The vehicle stops and goes repeatedly for a long period of time.

• The driver starts driving by pushing the toggle switch up (RES+)/down

(SET-) or depressing the accelerator pedal, approximately 3 minutes after the vehicle is stopped by the

Smart Cruise Control System with no other vehicle ahead.

• The driver starts driving by pushing the toggle switch up (RES+)/down

(SET-) or depressing the accelerator pedal, after stopping the vehicle with a vehicle stopped far away in front.

• The accelerator pedal is continuously depressed for more than one minute.

• The FCA is activated.

Each of these actions will cancel the Smart Cruise Control operation. The Set Speed and Vehicle-to-

Vehicle Distance on the LCD display will go off.

In a condition the Smart Cruise

Control is cancelled automatically, the Smart Cruise Control will not resume even though the RES+ or

SET- toggle switch is pushed.

i

Information

If the Smart Cruise Control is canceled by other than the reasons mentioned, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

5-82

OAEE056165N

Smart Cruise Control canceled

If the system is cancelled, the warning chime will sound and a message will appear for a few seconds.

You must adjust the vehicle speed by depressing the accelerator or brake pedal according to the road condition ahead and driving condition.

Always check the road conditions.

Do not rely on the warning chime.

To resume Smart Cruise Control set speed

If any method other than the cruise toggle switch was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activated, the cruising speed will automatically resume when you push the toggle switch up (RES+) or down (SET-).

If you push the toggle switch up

(RES+), the speed will resume to the recently set speed. However, if vehicle speed drops below 20 mph (30 km/h), it will resume when there is a vehicle in front of your vehicle.

To turn Cruise Control off

OAE056068

• Press the CRUISE button (the cruise ( will go off).

) indicator light

i

Information

Always check the road conditions when you push the toggle switch up

(RES+) to resume speed.

5

5-83


Smart Cruise Control Vehicleto-Vehicle Distance

To set Vehicle-to-Vehicle

Distance

Each time the button is pressed, the vehicle to vehicle distance changes as follows:

Distance 4 Distance 3 Distance 2

When the lane ahead is clear:

Distance 1

For example, if you drive at 56 mph

(90 km/h), the distance is maintained as follows:

OAE056076

When the Smart Cruise Control

System is ON, you can set and maintain the distance from the vehicle ahead of you without pressing the accelerator or brake pedal.

Distance 4 - approximately 172 feet




i

Information

The distance is set to the last set distance when the system is used for the first time after the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode.

OAE056177N

The vehicle speed will maintain the set speed.

5-84

When there is a vehicle ahead of you in your lane:

WARNING

Distance 4 Distance 3

Distance 2 Distance 1

OAE056184N/OAE056183N/

OAE056186N/OAE056185N

• Your vehicle speed will slow down or speed up to maintain the selected distance.

• If the vehicle ahead speeds up, your vehicle will travel at a steady cruising speed after accelerating to the set speed.

OAEE056140R

When using the Smart Cruise

Control System:

•

The warning chime sounds and the Vehicle-to Vehicle

Distance indicator blinks if the vehicle is unable to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle ahead.

•

If the warning chime sounds, depress the brake pedal or use the steering wheel to actively adjust the vehicle speed, and the distance to the vehicle ahead.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

Even if the warning chime is not activated, always pay attention to the driving conditions to prevent dangerous situations from occurring.

•

Playing the vehicle audio system at high volume may offset the system warning sounds.

5

5-85


CAUTION

In traffic situation

OAE056168L

If the vehicle ahead (vehicle speed: less than 20 mph

(30km/h)) disappears to the next lane, the warning chime will sound and a message "Watch for surrounding vehicles" will appear. Adjust your vehicle speed for vehicles or objects that can suddenly appear in front of you by depressing the brake pedal.

Always pay attention to the road condition ahead.

OAEE046473L

Use switch or pedal to accelerate

• In traffic, your vehicle will stop if the vehicle ahead of you stops. Also, if the vehicle ahead of you starts moving, your vehicle will start as well. However, if the vehicle stops for more than 3 seconds, you must depress the accelerator pedal or push up the toggle switch (RES+) to start driving.

• If you push the smart cruise control toggle switch (RES+ or SET-) while

Auto Hold and smart cruise control is operating the Auto Hold will be released regardless of accelerator pedal operation and the vehicle will start to move. The AUTO HOLD indicator changes from green to white.

5-86

Sensor to detect distance to the vehicle ahead

Warning message

OAEE056011N

The Smart Cruise Control uses a sensor to detect distance to the vehicle ahead.

OAEE058260L

Smart Cruise Control disabled.

Radar blocked

When the sensor lens cover is blocked with dirt, snow, or debris, the

Smart Cruise Control System operation may stop temporarily. If this occurs, a warning message will appear on the LCD display. Remove any dirt, snow, or debris and clean the radar sensor lens cover before operating the Smart Cruise Control

System. The Smart Cruise Control system may not properly activate, if the radar is totally contaminated, or if any substance is not detected after the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode

(e.g. in an open terrain).

i

Information

For the SCC operation is temporarily stopped if the radar is blocked, but you wish to use cruise control mode

(speed control function), you must convert to the cruise control mode

(refer to "To convert to Cruise

Control mode" in the following page.

CAUTION

•

Do not apply license plate frame or foreign objects such as a bumper sticker or a bumper guard near the radar sensor. Doing so may adversely affect the sensing performance of the radar.

•

Always keep the radar sensor and lens cover clean and free of dirt and debris.

•

Use only a soft cloth to wash the vehicle. Do not spray pressurized water directly on the sensor or sensor cover.

(Continued)

5-87

5


(Continued)

•

Be careful not to apply unnecessary force on the radar sensor or sensor cover. If the sensor is forcibly moved out of proper alignment, the Smart

Cruise Control System may not operate correctly. In this case, a warning message may not be displayed. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

•

If the front bumper becomes damaged in the area around the radar sensor, the Smart

Cruise Control System may not operate properly. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

•

Use only genuine HYUNDAI parts to repair or replace a damaged sensor or sensor cover. Do not apply paint to the sensor cover.

OAE056167L

Check Smart Cruise Control System

The message will appear when the vehicle to vehicle distance control system is not functioning normally.

Take your vehicle to an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked.

To adjust the sensitivity of

Smart Cruise Control

The sensitivity of vehicle speed when following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance can be adjusted. Go to the 'User Settings

→

Driving Assist

→

Smart Cruise

Control Speed

→

Slow/Normal/Fast' on the LCD display. You may select one of the three stages you prefer.

- Slow:

Vehicle speed following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance is slower than normal speed.

- Normal:

Vehicle speed following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance is normal.

- Fast:

Vehicle speed following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance is faster than normal speed.

i

Information

The last selected speed sensitivity of the smart cruise control is remained in the system.

5-88

To convert to Cruise Control mode

The driver may choose to switch to use the conventional Cruise Control mode (speed only control function) by following these steps:

1. Push the CRUISE button on the steering wheel to turn the system on. The cruise ( cator will illuminate.

) indi-

2. Push and hold the Vehicle-to-

Vehicle Distance button for more than 2 seconds.

3. Choose between "Smart Cruise

Control" and "Cruise Control".

When the system is cancelled using the CRUISE button or the CRUISE button is used after the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode, the Smart

Cruise Control mode will turn on.

WARNING

When using the conventional

Cruise Control mode, you must manually adjust the distance to other vehicles by depressing the accelerator or brake pedal.

The system does not automatically adjust the distance to vehicles in front of you.

Limitations of the system

The Smart Cruise Control System may have limits to its ability to detect distance to the vehicle ahead due to road and traffic conditions.

On curves

OAE056100

• The Smart Cruise Control System may not detect a moving vehicle in your lane, and then your vehicle could accelerate to the set speed.

Also, the vehicle speed will decrease when the vehicle ahead is recognized suddenly.

• Select the appropriate set speed on curves and apply the brakes or accelerator pedal if necessary.

5-89

5


On inclines Lane changing

OAE056101

Your vehicle speed can be reduced due to a vehicle in the adjacent lane.

Apply the accelerator pedal and select the appropriate set speed.

Check to be sure that the road conditions permit safe operation of the

Smart Cruise Control.

OAE056102

• During uphill or downhill driving, the Smart Cruise Control System may not detect a moving vehicle in your lane, and cause your vehicle to accelerate to the set speed.

Also, the vehicle speed will rapidly decrease when the vehicle ahead is recognized suddenly.

• Select the appropriate set speed on inclines and apply the brake or accelerator pedal if necessary.

OAE056103

• A vehicle which moves into your lane from an adjacent lane cannot be recognized by the sensor until it is in the sensor's detection range.

• The radar may not detect immediately when a vehicle cuts in suddenly. Always pay attention to the traffic, road and driving conditions.

• If a slower vehicle moves into your lane, your speed may decrease to maintain the distance to the vehicle ahead.

• If a faster vehicle which moves into your lane, your vehicle will accelerate to the set speed.

5-90

Vehicle recognition

OAE056104

Some vehicles in your lane cannot be recognized by the sensor:

- Narrow vehicles such as motorcycles or bicycles

- Vehicles offset to one side

- Slow-moving vehicles or suddendecelerating vehicles

- Stopped vehicles

- Vehicles with small rear profile such as trailers with no loads

A vehicle ahead cannot be recognized correctly by the sensor if any of following occurs:

- When the vehicle is pointing upwards due to overloading in the luggage compartment

- While the steering wheel is operating

- When driving to one side of the lane

- When driving on narrow lanes or on curves

Apply the brake or accelerator pedal if necessary.

OAE056108

• Your vehicle may accelerate when a vehicle ahead of you disappears.

• When you are warned that the vehicle ahead of you is not detected, drive with caution.

5

5-91


OAE056109

• When driving in stop-and-go traffic, and a stopped vehicle in front of you merges out of the lane, the system may not immediately detect the new vehicle that is now in front of you. In this case, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to reduce your driving speed in order to maintain a safe distance.

OAE056110

• Always look out for pedestrians when your vehicle is maintaining a distance with the vehicle ahead.

OAE056105

• Always be cautious for vehicles with higher height or vehicles carrying loads that sticks out from the back of the vehicle.

5-92

WARNING

When using the Smart Cruise

Control take the following precautions:

•

If an emergency stop is necessary, you must apply the brakes. The vehicle cannot be stopped at every emergency situation by using the Smart

Cruise Control System.

•

Keep a safe distance according to road conditions and vehicle speed. If the vehicle to vehicle distance is too close during a high-speed driving, a serious collision may result.

•

Always maintain sufficient braking distance and decelerate your vehicle by applying the brakes if necessary.

•


System cannot recognize a stopped vehicle, pedestrians or an oncoming vehicle. Always look ahead cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

Vehicles moving in front of you with a frequent lane change may cause a delay in the system's reaction or may cause the system to react to a vehicle actually in an adjacent lane. Always drive cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring.

•

Always be aware of the selected speed and vehicle to vehicle distance.

The driver should not solely rely on the system but always pay attention to driving conditions and control your vehicle speed.

•


System may not recognize complex driving situations so always pay attention to driving conditions and control your vehicle speed.

NOTICE

The Smart Cruise Control System may not operate temporarily due to:

• Electrical interference

• Modifying the suspension

• Differences of tire abrasion or tire pressure

• Installing different type of tires

5

5-93


i

Information





3. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

i

Information

Radio frequency radiation exposure information:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 8 in. (20 cm) between the radiator

(antenna) and your body.

This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

5-94

S PE CIIA L D VIIN G C ND TIIO

Hazardous Driving Conditions

S

When hazardous driving elements are encountered such as water, snow, ice, mud and sand, take the bellow suggestions:

• Drive cautiously and keep a longer braking distance.

• Avoid abrupt braking or steering.

• When your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, or sand, use second gear.

Accelerate slowly to avoid unnecessary wheel spin.

• Put sand, rock salt, tire chains or other non-slip materials under the wheels to provide additional traction while the vehicle becomes stuck in ice, snow, or mud.

Rocking the Vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around your front wheels. Then, shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a forward gear.

Try to avoid spinning the wheels, and do not race the vehicle.

To prevent reduction gear wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal while the reduction gear is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that may free the vehicle.

WARNING

If the vehicle is stuck and excessive wheel spin occurs, the temperature in the tires can increase very quickly. If the tires become damaged, a tire blow out or tire explosion can occur.

This condition is dangerous you and others may be injured.

Do not attempt this procedure if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle.

If you attempt to free the vehicle, the vehicle can overheat quickly, possibly causing an motor compartment fire or other damage. Try to avoid spinning the wheels as much as possible to prevent overheating of either the tires or the vehicle.

DO NOT allow the vehicle to spin the wheels above 56 km/h

(35 mph).

5

5-95


i

Information

The ESC system (if equipped) must be turned OFF before rocking the vehicle.

NOTICE

If you are still stuck after rocking the vehicle a few times, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid vehicle overheating, possible damage to the reduction gear and tire damage.

See

"Towing" in chapter 6.

Smooth Cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration.

Driving at Night

Night driving presents more hazards than driving in the daylight. Here are some important tips to remember:

• Slow down and keep more distance between you and other vehicles, as it may be more difficult to see at night, especially in areas where there may not be any street lights.

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare from other driver's headlamps.

• Keep your headlamps clean and properly aimed. Dirty or improperly aimed headlamps will make it much more difficult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the headlamps of oncoming vehicles. You could be temporarily blinded, and it will take several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the darkness.

Driving in the Rain

Rain and wet roads can make driving dangerous. Here are a few things to consider when driving in the rain or on slick pavement:

• Slow down and allow extra following distance. A heavy rainfall makes it harder to see and increases the distance needed to stop your vehicle.

• Turn OFF your Cruise Control. (if equipped)

• Replace your windshield wiper blades when they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield.

• Be sure your tires have enough tread. If your tires do not have enough tread, making a quick stop on wet pavement can cause a skid and possibly lead to an accident.

See "Tire Tread" in chapter 7.

• Turn on your headlamps to make it easier for others to see you.

• Driving too fast through large puddles can affect your brakes. If you must go through puddles, try to drive through them slowly.

5-96

• If you believe your brakes may be wet, apply them lightly while driving until normal braking operation returns.

Hydroplaning

If the road is wet enough and you are going fast enough, your vehicle may have little or no contact with the road surface and actually ride on the water. The best advice is SLOW

DOWN when the road is wet.

The risk of hydroplaning increases as the depth of tire tread decreases, refer to "Tire Tread" in chapter 7.

Driving in Flooded Areas

Avoid driving through flooded areas unless you are sure the water is no higher than the bottom of the wheel hub. Drive through any water slowly.

Allow adequate stopping distance because brake performance may be reduced.

After driving through water, dry the brakes by gently applying them several times while the vehicle is moving slowly.

Highway Driving

Tires

Adjust the tire inflation, as specified.

Under-inflation may overheat or damage the tires.

Do not install worn-out or damaged tires, which may reduce traction or fail the braking operation.

i

Information

Never over-inflate your tires above the maximum inflation pressure, as specified on your tires.

Coolant and high voltage battery

Be sure to check both the coolant level and the high voltage battery level before driving.

5

5-97


WIIN TE R D VIIN G

The severe weather conditions of winter quickly wear out tires and cause other problems. To minimize winter driving problems, you should take the following suggestions:

Snow or Icy Conditions

You need to keep sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.

Apply the brakes gently. Speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications, and sharp turns are potentially very hazardous practices.

During deceleration, use regenerative braking to the fullest extent.

Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause the vehicle to skid.

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be necessary to use snow tires or to install tire chains on your tires.

Always carry emergency equipment.

Some of the items you may want to carry include tire chains, tow straps or chains, a flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

5-98

Snow tires

WARNING

Snow tires should be equivalent in size and type to the vehicle's standard tires. Otherwise, the safety and handling of your vehicle may be adversely affected.

If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure to use radial tires of the same size and load range as the original tires. Mount snow tires on all four wheels to balance your vehicle’s handling in all weather conditions.

The traction provided by snow tires on dry roads may not be as high as your vehicle's original equipment tires. Check with the tire dealer for maximum speed recommendations.

i

Information

Do not install studded tires without first checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.

Tire chains

OAEE056015

Since the sidewalls of radial tires are thinner than other types of tires, they may be damaged by mounting some types of tire chains on them.

Therefore, the use of snow tires is recommended instead of tire chains.

Do not mount tire chains on vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels; if unavoidable use a wire type chain. If tire chains must be used, use genuine HYUNDAI parts and install the tire chain after reviewing the instructions provided with the tire chains.

Damage to your vehicle caused by improper tire chain use is not covered by your vehicle manufacturer’s warranty.

WARNING

The use of tire chains may adversely affect vehicle handling:

•

Drive less than 20 mph (30 km/h) or the chain manufacturer's recommended speed limit, whichever is lower.

•

Drive carefully and avoid bumps, holes, sharp turns, and other road hazards, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.

•

Avoid sharp turns or locked wheel braking.

i

Information

• Install tire chains only in pairs and on the front tires. It should be noted that installing tire chains on the tires will provide a greater driving force, but will not prevent side skids.

• Do not install studded tires without first checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.

Chain Installation

When installing tire chains, follow the manufacturer's instructions and mount them as tightly possible. Drive slowly (less than 20 mph (30 km/h)) with chains installed. If you hear the chains contacting the body or chassis, stop and tighten them. If they still make contact, slow down until the noise stops. Remove the tire chains as soon as you begin driving on cleared roads.

When mounting snow chains, park the vehicle on level ground away from traffic. Turn on the vehicle

Hazard Warning Flasher and place a triangular emergency warning device behind the vehicle (if available).

Always place the vehicle in P (Park), apply the parking brake and turn off the vehicle before installing snow chains.

5

5-99


NOTICE

When using tire chains:

• Wrong size chains or improperly installed chains can damage your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body and wheels.

• Use SAE "S" class or wire chains.

• If you hear noise caused by chains contacting the body, retighten the chain to prevent contact with the vehicle body.

• To prevent body damage, retighten the chains after driving

0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).

• Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels. If unavoidable, use a wire type chain.

• Use wire chains less than 0.47 in

(12 mm) thick to prevent damage to the chain's connection.

Winter Precautions

Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high quality ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. It is the only type of coolant that should be used because it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water pump and prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish your coolant in accordance with the maintenance schedule in chapter 7. Before winter, have your coolant tested to assure that its freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures anticipated during the winter.

Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary

In some climates it is recommended that a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be used during cold weather. See chapter 8 for recommendations. If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use, consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Check battery and cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the battery system. Visually inspect the battery and cables as described in chapter 7. The level of charge in your battery can be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a service station.

5-100

Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system

To keep the water in the window washer system from freezing, add an approved window washer anti-freeze solution in accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is available from an authorized HYUNDAI dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do not use coolant or other types of anti-freeze as these may damage the paint finish.

Do not let ice and snow accumulate underneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. When driving in severe winter conditions where this may happen, you should periodically check underneath the car to be sure the movement of the front wheels and the steering components is not obstructed.

Do not let your parking brake freeze

Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you shift to P (Park) and block the rear wheels so the car cannot roll.

Then release the parking brake.

Don't place foreign objects or materials in the motor compartment

Placement of foreign object or materials which prevent cooling of the vehicle, in the motor compartment, may cause a failure. The manufacturer is not responsible for the damage caused by such placement.

To keep locks from freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the key opening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is frozen internally, you may be able to thaw it out by using a heated key. Handle the heated key with care to avoid injury.

5

5-101


V EH E L OA

Two labels on your driver's door sill show how much weight your vehicle was designed to carry: the Tire and

Loading Information Label and the

Certification Label.

Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle’s weight ratings, from the vehicle's specifications and the Certification Label:

GAW (Gross Axle Weight)

This is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) - including vehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Certification Label.

The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR.

Base Curb Weight

This is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual Cargo Weight plus passengers.

Vehicle Curb Weight

This is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.

Cargo Weight

This figure includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and optional equipment.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating)

This is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle

(including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the Certification Label located on the driver’s door sill.

Tire Loading Information Label

OAEE076052N

The label located on the driver's door sill gives the original tire size, cold tire pressures recommended for your vehicle, the number of people that can be in your vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

Vehicle capacity weight

849 lbs. (385 kg)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped with a trailer, the combined weight includes the tongue load.

5-102

Seating capacity

Total : 5 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons,

Rear seat : 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum number of occupants including a driver, your vehicle may carry.

However, the seating capacity may be reduced based upon the weight of all of the occupants, and the weight of the cargo being carried or towed.

Do not overload the vehicle as there is a limit to the total weight, or load limit including occupants and cargo, the vehicle can carry.

Towing capacity

We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.

Cargo capacity

The cargo capacity of your vehicle will increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants and the tongue load, if your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.

Steps for determining correct load limit

1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

WARNING

Do not overload the vehicle as there is a limit to the total weight, or load limit, including occupants and cargo, the vehicle can carry. Overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle. If the GVWR or the GAWR is exceeded, parts on the vehicle can break, and it can change the handling of your vehicle. These could cause you to lose control and result in an accident.

5

5-103


Example 1

Example 2

Example 3

Maximum Load

(1400 lbs.)

(635 kg)

Maximum Load

(1400 lbs.)

(635 kg)

Maximum Load

(1400 lbs.)

(635 kg)

≥≥

≥≥

Passenger Weight

(150 lbs. × 2 = 300 lbs.)

(68 kg × 2 = 136 kg)

Passenger Weight

(150 lbs. × 5 = 750 lbs.)

(68 kg × 5 = 340 kg)

≥≥

Passenger Weight

(172 lbs. × 5 = 860 lbs.)

(78 kg × 5 = 390 kg)

+

+

+

Cargo Weight

(1100 lbs.)

(499 kg)

Cargo Weight

(650 lbs.)

(295 kg)

Cargo Weight

(540 lbs.)

(245 kg)

5-104

Certification label

OBH059070

The certification label is located on the driver’s door sill at the center pillar and shows the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.

This label also tells you the maximum weight that can be supported by the front and rear axles, called

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

The total weight of the vehicle, including all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Be sure to spread out your load equally on both sides of the centerline.

WARNING

Overloading

•

Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, the GAWR for either the front or rear axle and vehicle capacity weight.

Exceeding these ratings can affect your vehicle’s handling and braking ability, and cause an accident.

•

Do not overload your vehicle.

Overloading your vehicle can cause heat buildup in your vehicle’s tires and possible tire failure, increased stopping distances and poor vehicle handling-all of which may result in a crash.

5

5-105


NOTICE

Overloading your vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

WARNING

If you carry items inside your vehicle (e.g., suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else), they are moving as fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, the items will keep going and can cause an injury if they strike the driver or a passenger.

•

Put items in the cargo area of your vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.

•

Do not stack items, like suitcases, inside the vehicle above the tops of the seats.

•

Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle.

•

When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it.

T RA ER OW G

We do not recommend using this vehicle for trailer towing.

5-106

What to do in an emergency

Hazard Warning Flasher .......................................6-2

In Case of an Emergency While Driving.............6-2

If the Vehicle Stalls While Driving.................................6-2

If the Vehicle Stalls at a Crossroad or Crossing .......6-2

If you Have a Flat Tire While Driving ..........................6-3

If the Vehicle Will Not Start .................................6-3

Confirm the EV Battery Is Not Low on the Charge

Gauge ...................................................................................6-3

Jump Starting (12V Battery) ................................6-4

If the Vehicle Overheats .......................................6-6

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).........6-8

Check Tire Pressure .........................................................6-8

Tire Pressure Monitoring System .................................6-9

Low Tire Pressure Telltale ............................................6-10

Low Tire Pressure LCD Display with

Position Indicator ............................................................6-10

TPMS Malfunction Indicator ........................................6-11

Changing a Tire with TPMS..........................................6-12

If you Have a Flat Tire........................................6-14

With Tire Mobility Kit (TMK) ........................................6-14

Towing ...................................................................6-21

Towing service .................................................................6-21

Removable Towing Hook ...............................................6-22

Emergency Towing..........................................................6-23

6


H AZ RD AR NIIN FL SH R

To turn the hazard warning flasher on or off, press the hazard warning flasher button. The button is located in the center fascia panel. Both the left and right turn signal lights will flash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not.

• The turn signals do not work when the hazard flasher is on.

N C AS E O F A N E ME RG NC Y

W HIIL E D VIIN G

If the Vehicle Stalls While

Driving

• Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.

• Turn on your hazard warning flasher.

• Try to start the vehicle again. If your vehicle will not start, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or seek other qualified assistance.

OAEE066013

The hazard warning flasher serves as a warning to other drivers to exercise extreme caution when approaching, overtaking, or passing your vehicle.

It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or when the vehicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway.

If the Vehicle Stalls at a

Crossroad or Crossing

If the vehicle stalls at a crossroad or crossing, if safe to do so, shift to the

N (Neutral) position and then push the vehicle to a safe location.

6-2

If you Have a Flat Tire While

Driving

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

• Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and let the vehicle slow down while driving straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes immediately to slow down the vehicle, but use the paddle shifter (left side lever) to increase regenerative braking control. Also, do not or attempt to pull off the road as this may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. When the vehicle has slowed to such a speed that it is safe to do so, brake carefully and pull off the road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on firm, level ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes.

• When the vehicle is stopped, press the hazard warning flasher button, shift to P(Park), apply the parking brake, and place the POWER button in the OFF position.

• Have all passengers get out of the vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the side of the vehicle that is away from traffic.

• When changing a flat tire, follow the instructions provided later in this chapter.

F T HE HIIC LE

S TA T

WIIL L N T

Confirm the EV Battery Is Not

Low on the Charge Gauge

• Be sure the gear is in P (Park). The vehicle starts only when the gear is in P (Park).

• Check the 12-volt battery connections to be sure they are clean and tight.

• Turn on the interior light. If the light dims or goes out when you operate the starter, the battery is drained.

Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. This could cause damage to your vehicle. See instructions for

"Jump Starting" provided in this chapter.

6

6-3


JJU MP TA TIIN G ((1 V B AT ER

Jump starting can be dangerous if done incorrectly. Follow the jump starting procedure in this section to avoid serious injury or damage to your vehicle. If in doubt about how to properly jump start your vehicle, we strongly recommend that you have a service technician or towing service do it for you.

WARNING

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH to you or bystanders, always follow these precautions when working near or handling the battery:

Always read and follow instructions carefully when handling a battery.

Wear eye protection designed to protect the eyes from acid splashes.

Keep all flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the battery.

(Continued)

(Continued)

Hydrogen is always present in battery cells, is highly combustible, and may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of reach of children.

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is highly corrosive. Do not allow acid to contact your eyes, skin or clothing.

If acid gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If acid gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the area. If you feel pain or a burning sensation, get medical attention immediately.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the case may cause battery acid to leak. Lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.

•

Do not attempt to jump start your vehicle if your battery is frozen.

•

NEVER attempt to recharge the battery when the vehicle's battery cables are connected to the battery.

•

The electrical ignition switch works with high voltage.

NEVER touch these components with the " " indicator

ON or when the POWER button is in the ON position.

6-4

i

Pb

Information

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulations.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to your vehicle:

• Only use a 12-volt power supply

(battery or jumper system) to jump start your vehicle.

• Do not attempt to jump start your vehicle by push-starting.

Jump starting procedure

1. Position the vehicles close enough that the jumper cables will reach, but do not allow the vehicles to touch.

2. Avoid fans or any moving parts in the motor compartment at all times, even when the vehicles are turned off.

3. Turn off all electrical devices such as radios, lights, air conditioning, etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park) and set the parking brakes. Turn both vehicles OFF.

1VQA4001

4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact sequence shown in the illustration. First connect one jumper cable to the red, positive (+) jumper terminal of your vehicle

(1).

5. Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the red, positive

(+) battery/jumper terminal of the assisting vehicle (2).

6. Connect the second jumper cable to the black, negative (-) battery/ chassis ground of the assisting vehicle (3).

6

6-5


7. Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the black, negative (-) chassis ground of your vehicle (4).

Do not allow the jumper cables to contact anything except the correct battery or jumper terminals or the correct ground. Do not lean over the battery when making connections.

8. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle and let it run at approximately 2,000 rpm for a few minutes. Then start your vehicle.

9. After your vehicle starts allow it to operate at least 30 minutes without shutting it down, this will help charge back the 12V battery.

If your vehicle will not start after a few attempts, it probably requires servicing. In this event please seek qualified assistance. If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent, have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Disconnect the jumper cables in the exact reverse order you connected them:

1. Disconnect the jumper cable from the black, negative (-) chassis ground of your vehicle (4).

2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the black, negative (-) battery/chassis ground of the assisting vehicle (3).

3. Disconnect the second jumper cable from the red, positive (+) battery/jumper terminal of the assisting vehicle (2).

4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the red, positive

(+) jumper terminal of your vehicle

(1).

F T HE EH LE ER EA S

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe to do so.

2. Shift to P (Park) and set the parking brake. If the air conditioning is on, turn it off.

3. If coolant is running out under the vehicle or steam is coming out from the hood, stop the vehicle.

Do not open the hood until the coolant has stopped running or the steaming has stopped. If there is no visible loss of coolant and no steam, leave the vehicle running and check to be sure the vehicle cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not running, turn the vehicle off.

6-6

WARNING

While the vehicle is running, keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving parts such as the cooling fan to prevent serious injury.

4. Check for coolant leaking from the radiator, hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining from it when you stop.)

5. If coolant is leaking out, stop the vehicle immediately and call the nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

WARNING

Your vehicle is equipped with a pressurized coolant reserve tank. NEVER remove the coolant reserve tank cap or the radiator drain plug while the radiator is

HOT. Hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure, causing serious injury.

Turn the vehicle off and wait until the vehicle cools down.

Use extreme care when removing the coolant reserve tank cap. Wrap a towel or thick rag around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to release some of the pressure from the system. Step back while the pressure is released.

When you are sure all the pressure has been released, continue turning the cap counterclockwise to remove it.

6. If you cannot find the cause of the overheating, wait until the radiator temperature has returned to normal. Then, if coolant has been lost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the halfway mark.

7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again, call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

CAUTION

Serious loss of coolant indicates a leak in the cooling system and should be checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

6

6-7


TIIR E P ES UR E M ON OR G S ST TP S))

Check Tire Pressure

OAEE066012

OAEE046115N

(1) Low Tire Pressure / TPMS

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(2) Low Tire Pressure /

Tire Pressure Monitor /

TPMS Malfunction Display

(shown on the cluster LCD display)

OAEE046138N

• You can check the tire pressure in the Assist mode on the cluster.

Refer to the "LCD Display Mode" section in chapter 3.

• Tire pressure is displayed after a few minutes of driving after initial vehicle start up.

• If tire pressure is not displayed when the vehicle is stopped, "Drive to display" message will appear.

After driving, check the tire pressure.

• The displayed tire pressure values may differ from those measured with a tire pressure gauge.

• You can change the tire pressure unit in the User Settings mode on the cluster.

- psi, kpa, bar (Refer to the "User

Settings Mode" section in

chapter 3).

6-8

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System

WARNING

Over-inflation or under-inflation can reduce tire life, adversely affect vehicle handling, and lead to sudden tire failure that may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the

TPMS to continue to function properly.

6

6-9


NOTICE

If any of the below happens, have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

1. The Low Tire Pressure TPMS

Malfunction Indicator does not illuminate for 3 seconds when the POWER button is placed to

( the ON position or vehicle is ON indicator ON).

2. The TPMS Malfunction Indicator remains illuminated after blinking for approximately 1 minute.

3. The Low Tire Pressure LCD display remains illuminated

Low Tire Pressure

Telltale

Low Tire Pressure LCD

Display with Position Indicator

OAEE046115N

When the tire pressure monitoring system warning indicators are illuminated and the warning message is displayed on the cluster LCD display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. The LCD position indicator will indicate which tire is significantly under-inflated by illuminating the corresponding position light.

If any of your tire pressures are indicated as being low, immediately reduce your speed, avoid hard cornering, and anticipate increased stopping distances. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible. Inflate the tires to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s placard or tire inflation pressure label located on the driver's side center pillar outer panel.

If you cannot reach a service station or if the tire cannot hold the newly added air, replace the low pressure tire with the spare tire.

The Low Tire Pressure LCD position indicator will remain on and the

TPMS Malfunction Indicator may blink for one minute and then remain illuminated until you have the low pressure tire repaired and replaced on the vehicle.

6-10

CAUTION

In winter or cold weather, the

Low Tire Pressure Telltale may be illuminated if the tire pressure was adjusted to the recommended tire inflation pressure in warm weather. It does not mean your TPMS is malfunctioning because the decreased temperature leads to a proportional lowering of tire pressure.

When you drive your vehicle from a warm area to a cold area or from a cold area to a warm area, or the outside temperature is greatly higher or lower, you should check the tire inflation pressure and adjust the tires to the recommended tire inflation pressure.

WARNING

Low pressure damage

Significantly low tire pressure makes the vehicle unstable and can contribute to loss of vehicle control and increased braking distances.

Continued driving on low pressure tires can cause the tires to overheat and fail.

TPMS Malfunction

Indicator

The TPMS Malfunction Indicator will illuminate after it blinks for approximately one minute when there is a problem with the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System.

Have the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

NOTICE


TPMS, the individual tire pressures in the cluster LCD display will not be available. Have the system checked by an authorized


6

6-11


NOTICE

The TPMS Malfunction Indicator may illuminate after blinking for one minute if the vehicle is near electric power supply cables or radio transmitters such as police stations, government and public offices, broadcasting stations, military installations, airports, transmitting towers, etc.

Additionally, the TPMS Malfunction

Indicator may illuminate if snow chains are used or electronic devices such as computers, chargers, remote starters, navigation, etc. This may interfere with normal operation of the TPMS.

Changing a Tire with TPMS

If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire

Pressure and LCD position indicator will come on. Have the flat tire repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible or replace the flat tire with the spare tire.

CAUTION

Never use a puncture-repairing agent not approved by HYUNDAI dealer to repair and/or inflate a low pressure tire. Tire sealant not approved by HYUNDAI dealer may damage the tire pressure sensor.

Once the original tire equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sensor is reinflated to the recommended pressure and reinstalled on the vehicle, the Low Tire Pressure LCD position indicator and TPMS Malfunction

Indicator will go off within a few minutes of driving.

If the indicators do not disappear after a few minutes, please visit an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Each wheel is equipped with a tire pressure sensor mounted inside the tire behind the valve stem. You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

6-12

A cold tire means the vehicle has been sitting for 3 hours and driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3 hour period.

Allow the tire to cool before measuring the inflation pressure. Always be sure the tire is cold before inflating to the recommended pressure.

WARNING

•

The TPMS cannot alert you to severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors such as nails or road debris.

•

If you feel any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator, apply the brakes gradually with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road.

WARNING

Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) components may interfere with the system's ability to warn the driver of low tire pressure conditions and/or TPMS malfunctions. Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) components may void the warranty for that portion of the vehicle.

i

Information





3. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user

' s authority to operate the equipment.

6

6-13


F Y OU AV E A LA TIIR

With Tire Mobility Kit (TMK)

E

CAUTION

One sealant bottle for one tire

When two or more tires are flat, do not use the tire mobility kit because the supported one sealant of Tire Mobility Kit is only used for one flat tire.

Introduction

OAEE066001

For safe operation, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual before use.

(1) Compressor

(2) Sealant bottle

The Tire Mobility Kit is placed under the luggage tray. The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary fix to the tire and the tire should be inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

WARNING

Tire side wall

Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit to repair punctures in the tire side walls. This can result in an accident due to tire failure.

WARNING

Temporary fix

Have your tire repaired as soon as possible. The tire may lose air pressure at any time after inflating with the Tire Mobility

Kit.

OAEE066002

With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay mobile even after experiencing a tire puncture.

The compressor and sealing compound system effectively and comfortably seals most punctures in a passenger car tire caused by nails or similar objects and reinflates the tire.

After you ensure that the tire is properly sealed you can drive cautiously on the tire (distance up to 120 miles

(200 km)) at a max. speed of (50mph

(80 km/h)) in order to reach a service station or tire dealer for the tire replacement.

6-14

It is possible that some tires, especially with larger punctures or damage to the sidewall, cannot be sealed completely.

Air pressure loss in the tire may adversely affect tire performance.

For this reason, you should avoid abrupt steering or other driving maneuvers, especially if the vehicle is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in use.

The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed or intended as a permanent tire repair method and is to be used for one tire only.

This instruction shows you step by step how to temporarily seal the puncture simply and reliably.

Read the section "Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit".

Notes on the safe use of the

Tire Mobility Kit

• Park your car at the side of the road so that you can work with the

Tire Mobility Kit away from moving traffic.

• To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you're on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake.

• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for sealing/inflation passenger car tires.

Only punctured areas located within the tread region of the tire can be sealed using the tire mobility kit.

• Do not use on motorcycles, bicycles or any other type of tires.

• When the tire and wheel are damaged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit for your safety.

• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not be effective for tire damage larger than approximately 0.24 inch (6 mm).

Please contact the nearest

HYUNDAI dealership if the tire cannot be made roadworthy with the Tire Mobility Kit.

• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit, if a flat tire or an under-inflated tire is further severely damaged by being continuously driven.

• Do not remove any foreign objects such as nails or screws that have penetrated the tire.

• Provided the car is outdoors, leave the vehicle ON ( indicator ON).

Otherwise operating the compressor may eventually drain the car battery.

• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit unattended while it is being used.

• Do not leave the compressor running for more than 10 minutes at a time or it may overheat.

• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if the ambient temperature is below

-22°F (-30°C).

• In case of skin contact with the sealant, wash the area thoroughly with plenty of water. If the irritation persists, seek medical attention.

• In case of eye contact with the sealant, flush your eyes for at least

15 minutes. If the irritation persists, seek medical attention.

• In case of swallowing the sealant, rinse the mouth and drink plenty of water. However, never give anything to an unconscious person and seek medical attention immediately.

• Long time exposure to the sealant may cause damage to bodily tissue such as kidney, etc.

6-15

6


Components of the Tire Mobility Kit

Connectors, cable and connection hose are stored in the compressor housing.

Strictly follow the specified sequence, otherwise the sealant may escape under high pressure.

WARNING

Do not use the tire sealant after the sealant has expired (i.e.

pasted the expiration date on the sealant container). This can increase the risk of tire failure.

0. Speed restriction label

1. Sealant bottle and label with speed restriction

2. Filling hose from sealant bottle to wheel

3. Connectors and cable for power outlet direct connection

OGDE064102

4. Holder for the sealant bottle

5. Compressor

6. ON/OFF switch

7. Pressure gauge for displaying the tire inflation pressure

8. Button for reducing tire inflation pressure

6-16

WARNING

•

Keep out of reach of children.

•

Avoid contact with eyes.

•

Do not swallow.

Using the Tire Mobility Kit

OAEE066003

1. Detach the speed restriction label from the sealant bottle, and place it in a highly visible place inside the vehicle such as on the steering wheel to remind the driver not to drive too fast.

OLMF064103

2. Shake the sealant bottle (1).

OAEE066004

3. Screw the filling hose (2) onto the connector of the sealant bottle.

4. Ensure that the ON/OFF switch on the compressor is in the OFF position.

6

6-17


OAEE066005

5. Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of the flat tire and screw the filling hose (2) of the sealant bottle onto the valve.

CAUTION

Securely install the sealant filling hose to the valve. If not, sealant may flow backward, possibly clogging the filling hose.

OAEE066006

OAEE066007

6. Insert the sealant bottle into the housing (4) of the compressor so that the bottle is upright.

7. Ensure that the compressor is switched off, position "0".

6-18

CAUTION

Do not attempt to drive your vehicle if the tire pressure is below 29 psi (200 kpa). This could result in an accident due to sudden tire failure.

Distributing the sealant

OAEE066008

8. Plug the compressor power cord

(3) into the vehicle power outlet.

9. With the vehicle ON ( indicator ON), switch on the compressor and let it run for approximately

5~7 minutes to fill the sealant up to proper pressure. (refer to the

Tire and Wheels, chapter 8). The inflation pressure of the tire after filling is unimportant and will be checked/corrected later.

Be careful not to overinflate the tire and stay away from the tire when filling it.

10. Switch off the compressor.

11. Detach the hoses from the sealant bottle connector and from the tire valve.

Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its storage location in the vehicle.

OLMF064106

12. Immediately drive approximately

4~6miles (7~10km or about 10 minutes) to evenly distribute the sealant in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph

(80 km/h). If possible, do not fall below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

6

6-19


While driving, if you experience any unusual vibration, ride disturbance or noise, reduce your speed and drive with caution until you can safely pull off of the side of the road.

Call for road side service or towing.

When you use the Tire Mobility Kit, the tire pressure sensors and wheel may be damaged by sealant, have it inspected at an authorized dealer.

6-20

- To reduce the inflation pressure:

Press the button (8) on the compressor.

i

Information

The pressure gauge may show higher than actual reading when the compressor is running. To get an accurate tire pressure, the compressor needs to be turned off.

OAEE066005

Checking the tire inflation pressure

CAUTION

1. After driving approximately

4~6miles (7~10km or about

10 minutes), stop at a safe location.

When you use the Tire Mobility

Kit including sealant not approved by HYUNDAI, the tire

2. Connect the filling hose (2) of the compressor directly to the tire valve.

3. Plug the compressor power cord into the vehicle power outlet.

pressure sensors may be damaged by sealant. The sealant on the tire pressure sensor and wheel should be removed when

4. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the recommended tire inflation.

you replace the tire with a new one and inspect the tire pressure sensors at an authorized dealer.

With the vehicle ON ( tor ON) proceed as follows.

indica-

- To increase the inflation pressure:

i

Information

Switch on the compressor, position to "I". To check the current inflation pressure setting, briefly switch off the compressor.

When reinstalling the repaired or replaced tire and wheel on the vehicle, tighten the wheel lug nut to 11~13 kgf·m (79~94 lbf·ft).

T OW G

Towing service

dolly

OAE066018

If emergency towing is necessary, we recommend having it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow-truck service.

Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies or flatbed is recommended.

dolly

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground

(without dollies) and the front wheels off the ground. If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged or the vehicle is being towed with the front wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

When being towed by a commercial tow truck and wheel dollies are not used, the front of the vehicle should always be lifted, not the rear.

OAEE066016

OAE066019

CAUTION

•

Do not tow the vehicle with the front wheels on the ground as this may cause damage to the vehicle.

•

Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Use a wheel lift or flatbed equipment.

6

6-21


Removable Towing Hook

■

Front

WARNING

If your vehicle is equipped with a rollover sensor, place the

POWER button in the OFF or

ACC position when the vehicle is being towed. The side impact and curtain air bag may deploy if the sensor detects the situation as a rollover.

OAEE066011N

■

Rear

When towing your vehicle in an emergency without wheel dollies:

1. While depressing the brake pedal shift to the N (Neutral) position and turn the vehicle off. The

POWER button will be in the ACC position.

2. Release the parking brake.

OAEE066010N

1. Open the liftgate, and remove the towing hook from the tool case.

NOTICE

Failure to shift to N (Neutral) may cause internal damage to the vehicle.

OAEE066013N

2. Remove the hole cover by pressing the lower part of the cover on the front or rear bumper.

3. Install the towing hook by turning it clockwise into the hole until it is fully secured.

4. Remove the towing hook and install the cover after use.

6-22

Emergency Towing

If towing is necessary, we recommend you have it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow truck service.

If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing hook at the front (or rear) of the vehicle.

Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle with a cable or chain. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only on hard-surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds.

Also, the wheels, axles, power train, steering and brakes must all be in good condition.

Always follow these emergency towing precautions:

• While depressing the brake pedal shift to the N (Neutral) position and turn the vehicle off. The POWER button will be in the ACC position.

• Release the parking brake.

• Depress the brake pedal with more force than normal since you will have reduced braking performance.

• More steering effort will be required because the power steering system will be disabled.

• Use a vehicle heavier than your own to tow your vehicle.

• The drivers of both vehicles should communicate with each other frequently.

• Before emergency towing, check that the hook is not broken or damaged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady and even force.

OAEE066017

• Use a towing cable or chain less than 16 feet (5 m) long. Attach a white or red cloth (about 12 inch

(30 cm) wide) in the middle of the cable or chain for easy visibility.

• Drive carefully so the towing cable or chain remains tight during towing.

• Before towing, check the reduction gear for fluid leaks under your vehicle. If the reduction gear is leaking, flatbed equipment or a towing dolly must be used.

6

6-23


CAUTION

To avoid damage to your vehicle and vehicle components when towing:

•

Always pull straight ahead when using the towing hooks.

Do not pull from the side or at a vertical angle.

•

Do not use the towing hooks to pull a vehicle out of mud, sand or other conditions from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power.

•

Limit the vehicle speed to

10 mph (15 km/h) and drive less than 1 mile (1.5 km) when towing to avoid serious damage to the reduction gear.

6-24

Maintenance

Motor Compartment ..............................................7-3

Maintenance Services ...........................................7-4

Owner's Responsibility.....................................................7-4

Owner Maintenance Precautions..................................7-4

Owner Maintenance ..............................................7-5

Owner Maintenance Schedule .......................................7-6

Scheduled Maintenance Services........................7-7

Normal Maintenance Schedule ......................................7-8

Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions ........7-10

Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items..7-11

Coolant...................................................................7-12

Checking the Coolant Level ..........................................7-12

Changing Coolant ............................................................7-15

Brake Fluid............................................................7-16

Checking the Brake Fluid Level...................................7-16

Washer Fluid .........................................................7-17

Checking the Washer Fluid Level................................7-17

Climate Control Air Filter ....................................7-18

Filter Inspection...............................................................7-18

Wiper Blades.........................................................7-20

Blade Inspection ..............................................................7-20

Blade Replacement .........................................................7-20

12v Battery ...........................................................7-23

For Best Battery Service ..............................................7-24

Battery Recharging ........................................................7-24

Reset Features.................................................................7-25

Tires and Wheels .................................................7-26

Tire Care............................................................................7-26

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures ...........7-27

Check Tire Inflation Pressure ......................................7-28

Tire Rotation.....................................................................7-29

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............................7-30

Tire Replacement ............................................................7-30

Wheel Replacement ........................................................7-31

Tire Traction .....................................................................7-31

Tire Maintenance ............................................................7-31

Tire Sidewall Labeling ....................................................7-31

Tire Terminology and Definitions................................7-35

All Season Tires...............................................................7-39

Summer Tires ...................................................................7-39

Snow Tires ........................................................................7-39

Radial-Ply Tires ...............................................................7-39

Low Aspect Ratio Tires..................................................7-40

7

Fuses......................................................................7-42

Instrument Panel Fuse Replacement..........................7-43

Motor Compartment Panel Fuse Replacement........7-44

Fuse/Relay Panel Description......................................7-46

Light Bulbs ............................................................7-55

Headlamp, Parking Lamp, Turn Signal Lamp and

Side Marker ......................................................................7-56

Daytime Running Light (DRL).......................................7-60

Side Repeater Lamp Replacement ..............................7-61

Rear Combination Light Bulb Replacement ..............7-61

High Mounted Stop Light Replacement ....................7-62

License Plate Light Bulb Replacement ......................7-63

Interior Light Bulb Replacement .................................7-63

Appearance Care..................................................7-65

Exterior Care ....................................................................7-65

Interior Care .....................................................................7-70

California Perchlorate Notice.............................7-73

M OT R C OM AR TM EN

The actual motor compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Coolant reservoir

2. Brake fluid reservoir

3. Fuse box

4. Battery (12 volt)

5. Coolant cap

6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

OAEE076001N

7-3

7

Maintenance

M AIIN EN NC E S ER VIIC S

You should exercise the utmost care to prevent damage to your vehicle and injury to yourself whenever performing any maintenance or inspection procedures.

We recommend you have your vehicle maintained and repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An authorized HYUNDAI dealer meets

HYUNDAI's high service quality standards and receives technical support from HYUNDAI in order to provide you with a high level of service satisfaction.

Owner's Responsibility

Maintenance service and record retention are the owner's responsibility.

You should retain documents that show proper maintenance has been performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service charts shown on the following pages. You need this information to establish your compliance with the servicing and maintenance requirements of your vehicle warranties.

Detailed warranty information is provided in your Owner's Handbook &

Warranty Information booklet.

Repairs and adjustments required as a result of improper maintenance or a lack of required maintenance are not covered.

Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.

Owner Maintenance

Precautions

Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that could lead to vehicle damage, an accident, or personal injury. This chapter provides instructions only for the maintenance items that are easy to perform. Several procedures can be done only by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer with special tools.

Your vehicle should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safety or durability of your vehicle and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle.

NOTICE

Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the separate Owner's

Handbook & Warranty Information booklet provided with the vehicle.

If you're unsure about any service or maintenance procedure, have it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

7-4

O WN R M AIIN TE NC E

WARNING

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous.

If you lack sufficient knowledge and experience or the proper tools and equipment to do the work, have it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

ALWAYS follow these precautions for performing maintenance work:

•

Park your vehicle on level ground, shift to the P (Park) position, apply the parking brake, and place the POWER button in the OFF position.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

Block the tires (front and back) to prevent the vehicle from moving.

Remove loose clothing or jewelry that can become entangled in moving parts.

•

Keep flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the battery related parts.

The following lists are vehicle checks and inspections that should be performed by the owner or an authorized HYUNDAI dealer at the frequencies indicated to help ensure safe, dependable operation of your vehicle.

Any adverse conditions should be brought to the attention of your dealer as soon as possible.

These Owner Maintenance vehicle checks are generally not covered by warranties and you may be charged for labor, parts and lubricants used.

7

7-5

Maintenance

Owner Maintenance Schedule

When you stop for fuel:

• Check coolant level in the coolant reservoir.

• Check the windshield washer fluid level.

• Check for low or under-inflated tires.

WARNING

Be careful when checking your coolant level when the parts in the motor compartment are hot.

This may result in coolant being blown out of the opening and cause serious burns and other injuries.

While operating your vehicle:

• Check for vibrations in the steering wheel. Notice if there is any increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in its straight-ahead position.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or "pulls" to one side when traveling on smooth, level road.

• When stopping, listen and check for unusual sounds, pulling to one side, increased brake pedal travel or "hard-to-push" brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the operation of your reduction gear occurs, check the reduction gear fluid level.

• Check the reduction gear P (Park) function.

• Check the parking brake.

• Check for fluid leaks under your vehicle (water dripping from the air conditioning system during or after use is normal).

At least monthly:

• Check coolant level in the coolant reservoir.

• Check the operation of all exterior lights, including the brake lights, turn signals and hazard warning flashers.

• Check the inflation pressures of all tires including the spare for tires that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged.

• Check for loose wheel lug nuts.

7-6

At least twice a year:

(i.e., every Spring and Fall)

• Check radiator, heater and air conditioning hoses for leaks or damage.

• Check windshield washer spray and wiper operation. Clean wiper blades with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.

• Check headlamp alignment.

• Check the seat belts for wear and function.

At least once a year:

• Clean body and door drain holes.

• Lubricate door hinges and hood hinges.

• Lubricate door and hood locks and latches.

• Lubricate door rubber weather strips.

• Lubricate door checker.

• Check the air conditioning system.

• Inspect and lubricate reduction gear linkage and controls.

• Clean the battery and terminals.

• Check the brake fluid level.

S CH DU ED NT EN NC

S ER CE S

Follow Normal Maintenance

Schedule if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply. If any of the following conditions apply, you must follow the Maintenance Under Severe

Usage Conditions.

• Repeated short distance driving.

• Driving in dusty conditions or sandy areas.

• Extensive use of brakes.

• Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are used.

• Driving on rough or muddy roads.

• Driving in mountainous areas.

• Extended periods of low speed operation.

• Driving for a prolonged period in cold temperatures and/or extremely humid climates.

• More than 50% driving in heavy city traffic during hot weather above 90°F (32°C).

For additional information or assistance see your authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

7-7

7

Maintenance

Normal Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Intervals

Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80 84 88 92 96

Miles×1,000 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120

Maintenance

Item

Km×1,000 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128 136 144 152 160 168 176 184 192

Inspect cooling system I I I I I I I I

Rotate Tires

(Includes Tire Pressure and

Tread Wear Inspection)

Replace Climate Control Air

Filter (For Evaporator and

Blower Unit)

I I I

R

I I I

R

I I I

R

I I I

R

I I I

R

I I I

R

I I I

R

I I I

R

Replace coolant * 1 * 2

(1 st Replace 120,000 miles or

96 months)

(Thereafter, Replace 30,000 miles / 24 months)

R

Inspect 12V battery condition I I I I I I I I

Inspect brake lines, hoses, and connections

Inspect disc brakes and pads I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I : Inspect (Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean, or replace)

R : Replace or change.

* 1 : When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or vehicle damage.

* 2 : For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items.

7-8

Normal Maintenance Schedule (Cont.)

Maintenance

Intervals

Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64 68 72 76 80 84 88 92 96

Miles×1,000 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120

Maintenance

Item

Km×1,000 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96 104 112 120 128 136 144 152 160 168 176 184 192

Inspect steering gear rack, linkage, and boots

I I I I I I I I

Inspect drive shafts and boots

Inspect air conditioning compressor, air conditioner refrigerant and performance

Inspect reduction gear fluid

Inspect brake pedal

Inspect brake fluid I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I : Inspect (Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean, or replace)

R : Replace or change.

7

7-9

Maintenance

Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

MAINTENANCE ITEM

Reduction gear fluid

MAINTENANCE

OPERATION

R

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

Every 75,000 miles (120,000 km)

DRIVING

CONDITION

C, E, F, G, I

Brake / pads, calipers

Steering gear box, linkage & boots / lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint

Drive shafts and boots

I

I More frequently

More frequently

C, D, G, H

C, D, E, F, G, H, I

I More frequently C, D, E, F, G, H, I

Climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)

R More frequently C, E

Severe Driving Conditions

A - Repeatedly driving short distances of less than 5 miles

(8 km) in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freezing temperature

B - Extensive low speed driving for long distances

C- Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or saltspread roads

D- Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather

E - Driving in sandy areas

F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)

G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road

H- Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack

I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing

J - Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)

K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

7-10

E XP AN TIIO N O F S HE UL D M AIIN EN AN E IIT S

Cooling System Brake Fluid

Check cooling system components, such as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged parts.

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. The level should be between the MIN and the MAX marks on the side of the reservoir.

Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.

Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.

Reduction Gear Fluid

Inspect the reduction gear fluid according to the maintenance schedule.

Brake Discs, Pads, Calipers and Rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

Suspension Mounting Bolts

Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified torque.

Brake Hoses and Lines

Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

Steering Gear Box, Linkage &

Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint

With the vehicle stopped and the vehicle off, check for excessive freeplay in the steering wheel. Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage.

Replace any damaged parts.

Drive Shafts and Boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.

Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage.

7

7-11

Maintenance

C OO NT

The high-pressure cooling system has a reservoir filled with year-round antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory.

Check the antifreeze protection and coolant level at least once a year, at the beginning of the winter season and before traveling to a colder climate.

Checking the Coolant Level

OAEE076002L

Check the condition and connections of all cooling system hoses and heater hoses. Replace any swollen or deteriorated hoses.

The coolant level should be filled between the MAX and the MIN marks on the side of the coolant reservoir when the parts in the motor compartment is cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough distilled (deionized) water to bring the level to the MAX mark, but do not overfill. If frequent additions are required, you see an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer for a cooling system inspection.

Recommended coolant

• When adding coolant, use only distilled (deionized) water for your vehicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory.

• An improper coolant mixture can result in severe malfunction or electric vehicle damage.

• Do not use alcohol or methanol coolant or mix them with the specified coolant.

• Do not use a solution that contains more than 60% antifreeze or less than 35% antifreeze, which would reduce the effectiveness of the solution.

7-12

For mixing percentage, refer to the following table:

Ambient

Temperature

5°F (-15°C)

-13°F (-25°C)

-31°F (-35°C)

-49°F (-45°C)

Mixture Percentage

(volume)

Antifreeze

35

40

50

60

Water

65

60

50

40

OAEE076002

i

Information

If in doubt about the mix ratio, a 50% water and 50% antifreeze mix is the easiest to mix together as it will be the same quantity of each. It is suitable to use for most temperature ranges of

- 31°F and higher.

WARNING

Never remove the coolant cap or the drain plug while the radiator is hot. Hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure, causing serious injury.

(Continued)

(Continued)

Turn the vehicle off and wait until the parts in the motor compartment cools down.

Use extreme care when removing the coolant cap. Wrap a thick towel around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the first stop. Step back while the pressure is released from the cooling system. When you are sure all the pressure has been released, press down on the cap, using a thick towel, and continue turning counterclockwise to remove it.

7

7-13

Maintenance

WARNING

The electric motor for the cooling fan may continue to operate or start up when the vehicle is not running and can cause serious injury.

Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the rotating fan blades of the cooling fan.

WARNING

Make sure the coolant cap is properly closed after refilling coolant.

■

Motor compartment front view

The electric motor for the cooling fan is controlled by coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure and vehicle speed. As the coolant temperature decreases, the electric motor will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition.

OTL075062

1. Check if the coolant cap label is straight In front.

(Continued)

(Continued)

■

Motor compartment rear view

OAEE076044L

2. Make sure that the tiny protrusions inside the coolant cap is securely interlocked.

7-14

Changing Coolant

Have coolant changed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to the Maintenance Schedule at the beginning of this chapter.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to parts in the motor compartment, put a thick towel around the coolant cap before refilling the coolant to prevent the coolant from overflowing into parts in the motor compartment.

WARNING

Do not use coolant or antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir.

Coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Coolant may also cause damage to paint and body trim.

7-15

7

Maintenance

B RA E F D

Checking the Brake Fluid

Level

OAEE076003

Check the fluid level in the reservoir periodically. The fluid level should be between MAX and MIN marks on the side of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap and adding brake fluid, clean the area around the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent brake fluid contamination.

If the level is low, add the specified brake fluid to the MAX level. The level will fall with accumulated mileage.

This is a normal condition associated with the wear of the brake linings. If the fluid level is excessively low, have the brake system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

If the brake system requires frequent additions of fluid this could indicate a leak in the brake system. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Do not allow brake fluid to come in contact with your eyes. If brake fluid comes in contact with your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention.

NOTICE

• Do not allow brake fluid to contact the vehicle’s body paint, as paint damage will result.

• Brake fluid, which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should NEVER be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be disposed of properly.

• Do not use the wrong kind of brake fluid. A few drops of mineral based oil, such as engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts.

i

Information

Use only the specified brake fluid

(refer to "Recommended Lubricants and Capacities" in chapter 8).

7-16

W AS R F LU

Checking the Washer Fluid

Level

OAEE076004

Check the fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain water may be used if washer fluid is not available.

However, use washer solvent with antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.

WARNING

To prevent serious injury or death, take the following safety precautions when using washer fluid:

•

Do not use coolant or antifreeze in the washer fluid reservoir.

Coolant can severely obscure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident or damage to paint and body trim.

•

Do not allow sparks or flame to contact the washer fluid or the washer fluid reservoir. Washer fluid may contain alcohol and can be flammable.

•

Do not drink washer fluid and avoid contact with skin. Washer fluid is harmful to humans and animals.

•

Keep washer fluid away from children and animals.

7-17

7

Maintenance

C LIIM TE ON RO

Filter Inspection

LT

The climate control air filter should be replaced according to the

Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle is operated in severely air-polluted cities or on dusty rough roads for a long period, it should be inspected more frequently and replaced earlier.

When you replace the climate control air filter, replace it performing the following procedure, and be careful to avoid damaging other components.

R

OAEE076006

1. With the glove box open, remove the stoppers on both sides to allow the glove box to hang freely on the hinges.

OAEE076005

2. Remove the support rod (1).

7-18

OAEE076029

3. Press and hold the lock (1) on both sides of the cover.

4. Pull out (2) the cover.

OHG075041

5. Replace the climate control air filter.

6. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

NOTICE

Install a new climate control air filter in the correct direction with the arrow symbol (

↓↓

) facing downwards. Otherwise, the climate control effects may decrease, possibly with a noise.

7

7-19

Maintenance

WIIP ER LA S

Blade Inspection

Contamination of either the windshield or the wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce the effectiveness of the windshield wiper functionality. Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the window and the blades with a clean cloth dampened with washer fluid.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the wiper blades, arms or other components, do not:

• Use gasoline, kerosene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them.

• Attempt to move the wipers manually.

• Use non-specified wiper blades.

Blade Replacement

When the wipers no longer clean adequately, the blades may be worn or cracked, and require replacement.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually.

i

Information

Commercial hot waxes applied by automatic car washes have been known to make the windshield difficult to clean.

NOTICE

The use of a non-specified wiper blade could result in wiper malfunction and failure.

7-20

Type A Type B

OLMB073021

OLMB073020

1. Raise the wiper arm and slightly rotate the wiper blade assembly to expose the plastic locking clip.

CAUTION

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, since it may chip or crack the windshield.

OLMB073022

2. Press the clip (1) and slide the blade assembly downward (2).

3. Lift it off the arm.

4. Install the blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

5. Return the wiper arm on the windshield.

1. Raise the wiper arm.

OLF074017

7

7-21

Maintenance

OAD075074L

2. Lift up the wiper blade clip (1).

Then lift up the wiper blade (2).

OAD075075L

3. While pushing the lock (3), pull down the wiper blade (4).

OAD075076L

4. Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm (5).

5. Install a new wiper blade assembly in the reverse order of removal.

6. Return the wiper arm on the windshield.

CAUTION

To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer replace the wiper blade.

7-22

1 2V BA TT Y

WARNING

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH to you or bystanders, always follow these precautions when working near or handling the battery:

Always read and follow instructions carefully when handling a battery.

Wear eye protection designed to protect the eyes from acid splashes.


Hydrogen is always present in battery cells, is highly combustible, and may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of reach of children.

(Continued)

(Continued)

Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is highly corrosive. Do not allow acid to contact your eyes, skin or clothing.

If acid gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If acid gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the area. If you feel pain or a burning sensation, get medical attention immediately.

•

When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the case may cause battery acid to leak. Lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners.

•

Do not attempt to jump start your vehicle if your battery is frozen.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

NEVER attempt to recharge the battery when the vehicle’s battery cables are connected to the battery.

•

The electrical ignition system works with high voltage.

NEVER touch these components with the vehicle ON

( indicator ON) or when the POWER button is in the

ON position.

7

7-23

Maintenance

For Best Battery Service

WARNING


WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer, birth defects and reproductive harm.

Batteries also contain other chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer.

Wash hands after handling.

NOTICE

• When you do not use the vehicle for a long time in a low temperature area, disconnect the battery and keep it indoors.

• Always charge the battery fully to prevent battery case damage in low temperature areas.

OAEE076007

• Keep the battery securely mounted.

• Keep the battery top clean and dry.

• Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled acid from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda.

Battery Recharging

WARNING

Always follow these instructions when recharging your vehicle's battery to avoid the risk of SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH from explosions or acid burns:

•

Before performing maintenance or recharging the battery, turn off all accessories and place the POWER button to the OFF position.

•


•

Always work outdoors or in an area with plenty of ventilation.

•

Wear eye protection when checking the battery during charging.

•

The battery must be removed from the vehicle and placed in a well ventilated area.

(Continued)

7-24

(Continued)

•

Watch the battery during charging, and stop or reduce the charging rate if the battery cells begin boiling violently.

•

The negative battery cable must be removed first and installed last when the battery is disconnected. Disconnect the battery charger in the following order:

(1) Turn off the battery charger main switch.

(2) Unhook the negative clamp from the negative battery terminal.

(3) Unhook the positive clamp from the positive battery terminal.

•

Always use a genuine

HYUNDAI approved battery when you replace the battery.

By jump starting

After a jump start from a good battery, drive the vehicle for 20-30 minutes before it is shutoff. The vehicle may not restart if you shut it off before the battery had a chance to adequately recharge. See "Jump

Starting" in chapter 6 for more information on jump starting procedures.

i

Information

An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health.

Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation.

Reset Features

Some items need to be reset after the battery has been discharged or the battery has been disconnected.

See chapter 3 for:

• Power Windows

• Trip Computer

• Climate Control System

• Clock

• Audio System

• Sunroof

• Driver Position Memory System

7

7-25

Maintenance

TIIR ES ND WH EE S

WARNING

Tire failure may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. To reduce risk of

SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH, take the following precautions:

•

Inspect your tires monthly for proper inflation as well as wear and damage.

•

The recommended cold tire pressure for your vehicle can be found in this manual and on the tire label located on the driver's side center pillar. Always use a tire pressure gauge to measure tire pressure. Tires with too much or too little pressure wear unevenly causing poor handling.

•

Check the pressure of the spare every time you check the pressure of the other tires on your vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)

•

Replace tires that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged. Worn tires can cause loss of braking effectiveness, steering) control, or traction.

•

ALWAYS replace tires with the same size as each tire that was originally supplied with this vehicle. Using tires and wheels other than the recommended sizes could cause unusual handling characteristics, poor vehicle control, or negatively affect your vehicle's Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS) resulting in a serious accident.

Tire Care

For proper maintenance, safety, and maximum fuel economy, you must always maintain recommended tire inflation pressures and stay within the load limits and weight distribution recommended for your vehicle.

7-26

OAE086002L

All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label attached to the driver’s side center pillar.

Recommended Cold Tire

Inflation Pressures

All tire pressures (including the spare) should be checked when the tires are cold. "Cold tires" means the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than one mile (1.6 km).

Warm tires normally exceed recommended cold tire pressures by 4 to 6 psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not release air from warm tires to adjust the pressure or the tires will be under-inflated. For recommended inflation pressure, refer to "Tire and Wheels" in chapter 8.

WARNING

Recommended pressures must be maintained for the best ride, vehicle handling, and minimum tire wear.

Over-inflation or under-inflation can reduce tire life, adversely affect vehicle handling, and lead to sudden tire failure that could result in loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Severe under-inflation can lead to severe heat build-up, causing blowouts, tread separation and other tire failures that can result in the loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. This risk is much higher on hot days and when driving for long periods at high speeds.

7

7-27

Maintenance

CAUTION

•

Under-inflation results in excessive wear, poor handling and reduced fuel economy.

Wheel deformation is also possible. Keep your tire pressures at the proper levels. If a tire frequently needs refilling, have it checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

•

Over-inflation produces a harsh ride, excessive wear at the center of the tire tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road hazards.

Check Tire Inflation Pressure

Check your tires, including the spare tire, once a month or more.

How to check

Use a good quality tire pressure gauge to check tire pressure. You can not tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them.

Radial tires may look properly inflated when they are under-inflated.

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the tire and loading information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add air until you reach the recommended pressure. Make sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage. If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leakage.

If a valve cap is missing, install a new one as soon as possible.

7-28

Tire Rotation

To equalize tread wear, HYUNDAI recommends that the tires be rotated every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or sooner if irregular wear develops.

During rotation, check the tires for correct balance.

When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, outof-balance wheels, severe braking or severe cornering. Look for bumps or bulges in the tread or side of tire.

Replace the tire if you find either of these conditions. Replace the tire if fabric or cord is visible. After rotation, be sure to bring the front and rear tire pressures to specification and check lug nut tightness (proper torque is

79~94 lbf·ft [11~13 kgf·m]).

■

Without a spare tire

ODH073802

Disc brake pads should be inspected for wear whenever tires are rotated.

i

Information

Tires that are asymmetrical or directional can only be installed on the wheel in one direction. The outside and inside of an asymmetrical tire is not easily distinguishable. Pay careful attention to the markings on the sidewalls of the tires, noting the "outside" marking and also the rotating direction before installing them on the vehicle.

WARNING

•

Do not use the compact spare tire for tire rotation.

•

Do not mix bias ply and radial ply tires under any circumstances.

This may cause unusual handling characteristics that may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

7

7-29

Maintenance

Wheel Alignment and Tire

Balance

The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels aligned again.

However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset.

If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced.

Tire Replacement

Tread wear indicator

NOTICE

Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use only approved wheel weights.

OLMB073027

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread. This shows there is less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Replace the tire when this happens.

Do not wait for the band to appear across the entire tread before replacing the tire.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of DEATH or

SERIOUS INJURY:

•

Replace tires that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged. Worn tires can cause loss of braking effectiveness, steering control, and traction.

•

Always replace tires with the same size as each tire that was originally supplied with this vehicle. Using tires and wheels other than the recommended sizes could cause unusual handling characteristics, poor vehicle control, or negatively affect your vehicle's Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS) resulting in a serious accident.

(Continued)

7-30

(Continued)

•

Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used.

Regardless of the remaining tread, HYUNDAI recommends that tires be replaced after six

(6) years of normal service.

•

When replacing tires (or wheels), it is recommended to replace the two front or two rear tires (or wheels) as a pair.

Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle's handling.

•

Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process. Failure to follow this warning may cause sudden tire failure, which could lead to a loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Wheel Replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for any reason, make sure the new wheels are equivalent to the original factory units in diameter, rim width and offset.

Tire Traction

Tire traction can be reduced if you drive on worn tires, tires that are improperly inflated or on slippery road surfaces. Tires should be replaced when tread wear indicators appear. To reduce the possibility of losing control, slow down whenever there is rain, snow or ice on the road.

Tire Maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment.

When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This will increase vehicle ride comfort and tire life. Additionally, a tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel.

Tire Sidewall Labeling

This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The

TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.

7

7-31

Maintenance

2

1

5,6

7

3

4

1

OLMB073028

1. Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

2. Tire size designation

A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire size designation. You will need this information when selecting replacement tires for your car. The following explains what the letters and numbers in the tire size designation mean.

Example tire size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an example only; your tire size designator could vary depending on your vehicle.)

205/55R16 91H

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and numbers in the wheel size designation mean.

Example wheel size designation:

6.5J X 16

205 - Tire width in millimeters.

55 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section height as a percentage of its width.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).

16 - Rim diameter in inches.

91 - Load Index, a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the speed rating chart in this section for additional information.

6.5 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

16 - Rim diameter in inches.

7-32

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being used for passenger car tires. The speed rating is part of the tire size designation on the sidewall of the tire. This symbol corresponds to that tire’s designed maximum safe operating speed.

Speed

Rating

Symbol

S

T

H

V

W

Y

Maximum Speed

112 mph (180 km/h)

118 mph (190 km/h)

130 mph (210 km/h)

149 mph (240 km/h)

168 mph (270 km/h)

186 mph (300 km/h)

3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire

Identification Number)

Any tires that are over six years old, based on the manufacturing date,

(including the spare tire) should be replaced by new ones. You can find the manufacturing date on the tire sidewall (possibly on the inside of the wheel), displaying the DOT Code.

The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tire consisting of numbers and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the last four digits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO

The front part of the DOT means a plant code number, tire size and tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.

For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 1418 represents that the tire was produced in the 14th week of 2018.

4. Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure. Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label for recommended inflation pressure.

7

7-33

Maintenance

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example:

TREAD wear 200

TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-ahalf times (1½) as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

These grades are molded on the sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires.

The tires available as standard or optional equipment on your vehicle may vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked

C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straightahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

7-34

Temperature - A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

Grade C responds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, over-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible sudden tire failure.

This may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Tire Terminology and

Definitions

Air Pressure

The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight

This means the combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are automatic transmission, power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio

The relationship of a tire's height to its width.

Belt

A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials.

7

7-35

Maintenance

Bead

The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire

A pneumatic tire in which the plies are laid at alternate angles less than

90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

DOT Markings

A code molded into the sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of

Transportation motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand and date of production.

Intended Outboard Sidewall

The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa)

The metric unit for air pressure.

Light truck(LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles.

Cold Tire Pressure

The amount of air pressure in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch

(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from driving.

Curb Weight

This means the weight of a motor vehicle with standard and optional equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but without passengers and cargo.

GVWR

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

GAWR FRT

Gross Axle Weight Rating for the

Front Axle.

GAWR RR

Gross Axle Weight Rating for the

Rear axle.

Load ratings

The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.

Load Index

An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.

7-36

Maximum Inflation Pressure

The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.

Normal Occupant Weight

The number of occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68 kg).

Maximum Load Rating

The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.

Occupant Distribution

Designated seating positions.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle

Weight

The sum of curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight; and production options weight.

Outward Facing Sidewall

An asymmetrical tire has a particular side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The outward facing sidewall bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on the inner facing sidewall.

Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load.

Pneumatic options weight

The combined weight of installed regular production options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty breaks, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.

Passenger (P-Metric) tire

A tire used on passenger cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation

Pressure

Vehicle manufacturer's recommended tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.

Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords.

7

7-37

Maintenance

Radial Ply Tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Tread

The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road.

Rim

A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated.

Treadwear Indicators

Narrow bands, sometimes called

"wear bars", that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch of tread remains.

Sidewall

The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating

An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate.

UTQGS

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards is a tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire's traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Traction

The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided.

Vehicle Capacity Weight

The number of designated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the rated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the

Tire

Load on an individual tire due to curb and accessory weight plus maximum occupant and cargo weight.

Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire

Load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and dividing by 2.

Vehicle Placard

A label permanently attached to a vehicle showing the original equipment tire size and recommended inflation pressure.

7-38

All Season Tires

HYUNDAI specifies all season tires on some models to provide good performance for use all year round, including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than all season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.

Summer Tires

HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall. If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions,

HYUNDAI recommends the use of snow tires or all season tires on all four wheels.

Snow Tires

If you equip your car with snow tires, they should be the same size and have the same load capacity as the original tires. Snow tires should be installed on all four wheels; otherwise, poor handling may result. Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa) more air pressure than the pressure recommended for the standard tires on the tire label on the driver’s side of the center pillar, or up to the maximum pressure shown on the tire sidewall, whichever is less. Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h) when your vehicle is equipped with snow tires.

Radial-Ply Tires

Radial-ply tires provide improved tread life, road hazard resistance and smoother high speed ride. The radial-ply tires used on this vehicle are of belted construction, and are selected to complement the ride and handling characteristics of your vehicle.

Radial-ply tires have the same load carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias belted tires of the same size, and use the same recommended inflation pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires with bias-ply or bias belted tires is not recommended. Any combinations of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias belted tires when used on the same vehicle will seriously deteriorate vehicle handling. The best rule to follow is: Identical pairs of radial-ply tires should always be used as a set for the front tires and a set for the rear tires.

7

7-39

Maintenance

Longer wearing tires can be more susceptible to irregular tread wear. It is very important to follow the tire rotation interval in this chapter to achieve the tread life potential of these tires. Cuts and punctures in radial-ply tires are repairable only in the tread area, because of sidewall flexing. Consult your tire dealer for radial-ply tire repairs.

WARNING

Do not mix bias ply and radial ply tires under any circumstances. This may cause unusual handling characteristics that may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Low Aspect Ratio Tires

(if equipped)

Low aspect ratio tires, the aspect ratio is lower than 50, are provided for sporty looks.

Because low aspect ratio tires are optimized for handling and braking, their sidewall is a little stiffer than a standard tire. Also low aspect ratio tires tend to be wider and consequently have a greater contact patch with the road surface. In some instances they may generate more road noise compared with standard tires.

CAUTION

Because the sidewall of a low aspect ratio tire is shorter than a standard tire, the rim of the wheel and the tire itself is more easily susceptible to damage.

Use caution when driving and follow the guidelines below to help minimize damage to the wheel and tire:

•

When driving on a rough road or off road, drive cautiously because tires and wheels may be damaged. And after driving, inspect tires and wheels.

•

When passing over a pothole, speed bump, manhole, or curb stone, drive slowly so that the tires and wheels are not damaged.

•

If the tire is subjected to a severe impact, have the tire and wheel inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

•

Inspect the tire condition and pressure every 1,800 miles

(3,000 km).

7-40

CAUTION

•

It is not easy to recognize tire damage with your own eyes.

But if there is the slightest hint of tire damage, have the tire checked or replaced because the tire damage may cause air leakage from the tire.

•

If the tire is damaged by driving on a rough road, off road, pothole, manhole, or curb stone, it will not be covered by the warranty.

7-41

7

Maintenance

F US S

■

Blade type

Normal

■

Cartridge type

Normal

■

Multi fuse

Blown

Blown

Normal

Blown

OAEE076008

A vehicle's electrical system is protected from electrical overload damage by fuses.

This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels, one located in the driver's side panel bolster, the other in the motor compartment near the battery.

If any of your vehicle’s lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has blown, the element inside the fuse will be melted or broken.

If the electrical system does not work, first check the driver's side fuse panel. Before replacing a blown fuse, turn the vehicle and all switches off, and then disconnect the negative battery cable. Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same rating.

If the replacement fuse blows, this indicates an electrical problem. Avoid using the system involved and immediately consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

i

Information

Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type for lower amperage rating, cartridge type, and multi fuse for higher amperage ratings.

WARNING

NEVER replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the same rating.

•

A higher capacity fuse could cause damage and possibly cause a fire.

•

Do not install a wire or aluminum foil instead of the proper fuse - even as a temporary repair. It may cause extensive wiring damage and possibly a fire.

7-42

NOTICE

Do not use a screwdriver or any other metal object to remove fuses because it may cause a short circuit and damage the system.

Instrument Panel Fuse

Replacement

OAEE076009

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Turn all other switches OFF.

3. Open the fuse panel cover.

4. Refer to the label on the inside of the fuse panel cover to locate the suspected fuse location.

OAEE076010

5. Pull the suspected fuse straight out. Use the removal tool provided in the motor compartment fuse panel.

6. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. Spare fuses are provided in the instrument panel fuse panels (or in the motor compartment fuse panel).

7. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

In an emergency, if you do not have a spare fuse, use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle.

If the headlamps or other electrical components do not work and the fuses are OK, check the fuse panel in the motor compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced with the same rating.

7-43

7

Maintenance

Fuse switch

i

Information

Motor Compartment Panel

Fuse Replacement

■

Blade type fuse

OLFH044149L

If the fuse switch is OFF, the above message will appear.

■

Cartridge type fuse

OAEE076033

OAEE076011

Always, place the fuse switch to the

ON position.

If you move the switch to the OFF position, some items such as the audio system and digital clock must be reset and the smart key may not work properly.

NOTICE

• Always place the fuse switch in the ON position while driving the vehicle.

• Do not move the fuse switch repeatedly. The fuse switch may be damaged.

OAEE076045L


2. Turn all other switches OFF.

3. Remove the fuse panel cover by pressing the tap and pulling up.

7-44

4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. To remove or insert the fuse, use the fuse puller in the motor compartment fuse panel.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

After checking the fuse box in the motor compartment securely close the fuse box cover inside the motor compartment, until it clicks.

If the fuse box is not closed properly, water may leak in side, possibly causing a malfunction with the electrical system.

Multi fuse

OAEE076033

If the multi fuse is blown, it must be removed as follows:


2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

3. Remove the fuse panel cover by pressing the tab and pulling it up.

4. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.

5. Replace the fuse with a new one of the same rating.

6. Reinstall in the reverse order of removal.

i

Information

If the multi fuse is blown, consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

7

7-45

Maintenance

Fuse/Relay Panel Description

Instrument panel fuse panel

OAEE076014

Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

i

Information

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle; the information is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

7-46

OAEE076053N


Fuse Name Fuse Rating

MODULE5

MODULE4

10A

10A

Protected Component

Electro Chromic Mirror, Audio, Driver IMS Module, Rear Seat Warmer Module, DBL Unit, VESS Unit,

Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Head Lamp LH/RH, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module

Lane Keeping Assist Unit, Crash Pad Switch, Electric Parking Brake Unit FCA Unit,

Blind-spot Collision Warning (BCW) Radar LH/RH

INTERIOR

LAMP

10A Front Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Room Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp, Luggage Lamp, Wireless Charger Unit

A/BAG 15A SRS Control Module, Occupant Detection Sensor

E-SHIFTER1

IG1

CLUSTER

MODULE3

IG3 2

MEMORY2

A/BAG IND

START

10A

7.5A

7.5A

7.5A

10A

25A

10A

10A

SBW Switch, Front Console Switch

PCB Block (Fuse - AHB3, EPCU2)

Instrument Cluster

BCM, Stop Lamp Switch, Driver Door Module, Passenger Door Module

IPS Control Module, Main Battery Charging Switch, Charge Lamp, PTC Heater,

A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Instrument Cluster, A/C Control Module, Audio

Active Air Flap

Instrument Cluster

EPCU, Smart Key Control Module

7-47

7

Maintenance



MODULE2 10A


E/R Junction Block (Power Outlet Relay), Wireless Charger Unit, SBW Switch, BCM, USB Charging,

Smart Key Control Module, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Power Outside Mirror Switch, AMP

PDM3 7.5A

Smart Key Control Module

MEMORY1

MULTIMEDIA

10A

10A

Auto Light & Photo Sensor, Driver IMS Module, BCM, A/C Control Module, Instrument Cluster,

Passenger Door Module, Driver Door Module, Electro Chromic Mirror Relay Box

(Outside Mirror Folding/Unfolding Relay)

A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Audio

E-SHIFTER2

IG3 3

IG3 1

MDPS

T/GATE

PDM1

MODULE7

HTD STRG

10A

15A

7.5A

15A

10A

10A

20A

7.5A

SCU

CCM Unit

ICM Relay Box

MDPS Unit

Tail Gate Relay, Main Battery Charging Switch, Quick Charging Connector Door Lock/Unlock Actuator

Smart Key Control Module

Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module, Rear Seat Warmer Module

BCM

7-48



SUNROOF 20A Sunroof Motor

P/WDW RH

P/WDW LH

PDM2

BRAKE

SWITCH

OBC

A/CON

WASHER

S/HEATER

FRT

CHARGER

P/SEAT DRV

AMP

25A

25A

7.5A

7.5A

10A

7.5A

15A

25A

10A

30A

30A


Power Window (RH) Relay, Passenger Safety Power Window Switch

Driver Safety Power Window Module

Smart Key Control Module, Start/Stop Button Switch

Stop Lamp Switch, Smart Key Control Module

OBC

A/C Control Module

MultifunctioEt Warmer Control Module, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module

Charging Connector Lamp, Quick Charging Connector Lamp

CCM Unit, Charging Connector Lamp, ICM Relay Box (Charging Connector Lock/Unlock Relay)

Driver Seat Manual Switch, Driver IMS Module

AMP

7-49

7

Maintenance



MODULE1 10A


Data Link Connector, FCA Unit, Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror,

Driver/Passenger Smart Key Outside Handle, Driver/Passenger Door Module

DOOR LOCK 20A Door Lock/Unlock Relay, ICM Relay Box (Two Turn Unlcok Relay)

WIPER FRT2

MODULE6

S/HEATER RR

HTD MIRR

RR HTD

WIPER FRT1

10A

7.5A

25A

10A

25A

30A

Wiper Motor, PCB Block (Front Wiper (Low) Relay) BCM

Smart Key Control Module, BCM

Rear Seat Warmer Module

Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror, A/C Control Module

Rear Defogger (+) (Upper)

Wiper Motor, PCB Block (Front Wiper (Low) Relay), A/C Control Module

7-50

Motor compartment fuse panel

OAEE076016


i

Information

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle; the information is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.

OAEE076054N

7

7-51

Maintenance



MAIN 180A


EPCU (Low Voltage DC-DC Converter), E/R Junction Block (Fuse - H/LAMP HI,

POWER OUTLET1, AHB2, AHB1)

80A MDPS Unit MDPS

REAR

HEATED1

BLOWER

50A

40A

E/R Junction Block (Rear Defogger Relay)

E/R Junction Block (Blower Relay)

B+3

B+4

C/FAN

B+2

IG1

IG2

E-SHIFTER

B+5

40A

40A

40A

60A

60A

50A

60A

60A

IGPM (Fuse - ARISU (4CH), IPS (1CH/2CH))

IGPM (Fuse - P/WINDOW LH/RH, TAILGATE OPEN, SUNROOF, AMP, CHARGER, OBC,

S/HEATER FRT, P/SEAT DRV)

E/R Junction Block (Cooling Fan Relay)

IGPM (Fuse - S/HEATER RR, ARISU (4CH), IPS (2CH))

E/R Junction Block (Button Start #1 (ACC) Relay, Button Start #2 (IG1) Relay)

E/R Junction Block (Button Start #2 (IG2) Relay)

E/R Junction Block (Fuse - E-SHIFTER2, E-SHIFTER Relay)

PCB Block (Fuse - EPCU1, HORN, B/A HORN, BMS, Main Relay)

7-52



B/UP LAMP 10A


E/R Junction Block (B/UP Lamp Relay), Multipurpose Check Connector

POWER

OUTLET1

H/LAMP HI

40A

10A

E/R Junction Block (Power Outlet Relay)

E/R Junction Block (Head Lamp (HI) Relay)

AHB1 30A IBAU, Multipurpose Check Connector

AHB2

EPB1

EPB2

B+1

BATT C/FAN

40A

30A

30A

40A

25A

IBAU, Multipurpose Check Connector

Electric Parking Brake Unit

Electric Parking Brake Unit

IGPM (Fuse - BRAKE SWITCH, MODULE1, DOOR LOCK, PDM1, PDM2,

Fuse Switch, Leak Current Autocut Device)

E/R Junction Block (Battery C/Fan Relay)

7-53

7

Maintenance


(Battery terminal cover)

OAEE076018


i

Information

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle; the information is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.

OAEE076043

NOTICE

After checking the fuse panel in the motor compartment, securely install the cover. If it is not securely latched, electrical failure may occur from water contact.

7-54

LIIG HT LB

Consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer to replace most vehicle light bulbs. It is difficult to replace vehicle light bulbs because other parts of the vehicle must be removed before you can get to the bulb. This is especially true for removing the headlamp assembly to get to the bulb(s).

Removing/installing the headlamp assembly can result in damage to the vehicle.

i

Information

After heavy driving, rain or washing, lamps could appear frosty. This condition is caused by the temperature difference between the lamp inside and the outside temperature. This is similar to the condensation on your windows inside your vehicle during the rain and doesn

’ t indicate a problem with your vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp bulb circuitry, have your vehicle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

•

Prior to replacing a lamp, depress the foot brake, shift to P (Park), apply the parking brake, place the POWER button in the OFF position and take the key with you when leaving the vehicle to avoid sudden movement of the vehicle and to prevent possible electric shock.

•

Be aware the bulbs may be hot and may burn your fingers.

i

Information

• A normally functioning lamp may flicker momentarily to stabilize the vehicle’s electrical control system.

However, if the lamp goes out after flickering momentarily, or continues to flicker, we recommend the system be checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• The position lamp may not turn on when the position lamp switch is turned on, but the position lamp and headlamp switch may turn on when the headlamp switch is turned on.

This may be caused by network failure or vehicle electrical control system malfunction. If this occurs, we recommend the system be checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

7

7-55

Maintenance

Headlamp, Parking Lamp, Turn

Signal Lamp and Side Marker

■

Type A– Standard type

(1) Headlamp (Low)

(2) Headlamp (High)

(3) Turn signal lamp

(4) Parking lamp

(5) Side marker

OAE076028

OLMB073042L

• Always handle them carefully, and avoid scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liquids.

• Never touch the glass with bare hands. Residual oil may cause the bulb to overheat and burst when lit.

• A bulb should be operated only when installed in a headlamp.

• If a bulb becomes damaged or cracked, replace it immediately and carefully dispose of it.

WARNING

Halogen bulb

•

Handle halogen bulbs with care. Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will produce flying pieces of glass that could cause injuries if broken.

•

Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before handling it.

7-56

Headlamp and parking lamp

High beam

Parking lamp Low beam

OAE076030

1. Open the hood.


3. Remove the headlamp bulb cover

(1) by turning it counterclockwise.

4. Disconnect the headlamp bulb socket-connector. (for low beam and high beam)

5. Remove the bulb from the headlamp assembly.

6. Install a new bulb.

7. Connect the headlamp bulb socket-connector. (for low beam and high beam)

8. Install the headlamp bulb cover (1) by turning it clockwise.

Turn signal

i

Information

The headlamp aiming should be adjusted after an accident or after the headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OAE076031

1. Open the hood.


3. Remove the socket from the assembly by turning the socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

7

7-57

Maintenance

5. Install a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

6. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly.

7. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

Side marker

1. Open the hood.



4. Remove the bulb from the socket by pulling out the bulb.

5. Insert a new bulb.

■

Type B - LED type

(1) Headlamp (Low)

(2) Headlamp (High)

(3) Parking/Turn signal lamp

(4) Side marker

7-58

Headlamp (Low), parking/turn signal lamp and side marker

Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. LED lamps do not have replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OLMB073042L

• Always handle them carefully, and avoid scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liquids.

• Never touch the glass with bare hands. Residual oil may cause the bulb to overheat and burst when lit.

• A bulb should be operated only when installed in a headlamp.

• If a bulb becomes damaged or cracked, replace it immediately and carefully dispose of it.

WARNING

Halogen bulb

•

Handle halogen bulbs with care. Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will produce flying pieces of glass that could cause injuries if broken.

•

Wear eye protection when changing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before handling it.

7

7-59

Maintenance

Headlamp (High)

OAEE076039

1. Open the hood.


3. Remove the headlamp bulb cover

(1) by turning it counterclockwise.

4. Disconnect the headlamp bulb socket-connector.

5. Remove the bulb from the headlamp assembly.


7. Connect the headlamp bulb socket-connector.

8. Install the headlamp bulb cover (1) by turning it clockwise.

7-60

i

Information

The headlamp aiming should be adjusted after an accident or after the headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Daytime Running Light (DRL)

OAEE076030N


Side Repeater Lamp

Replacement

Rear Combination Light Bulb

Replacement

Stop lamp, tail lamp, turn signal lamp and side marker


OAE076034


OAEE076022

(1) Tail lamp

(2) Back-up lamp

(3) Stop lamp, tail lamp and turn signal lamp

(4) Side marker

7

7-61

Maintenance

Backup lamp

High Mounted Stop Light

Replacement

Backup lamp

OAEE076025

1. Turn off the vehicle.

2. Open the liftgate.

3. Remove the service cover using a flat-blade screwdriver.

OAEE076038


5. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.

6. Insert a new bulb by inserting it into the socket and rotating it until it locks into place.

7. Install the socket into the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise.

8. Reinstall the service cover.

OAEE076023

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Gently remove the cover of the liftgate trim.

3. Remove the spoiler plug hole.

4. Disconnect the electrical connector.

5. Loosen the mounting bolts and remove the spoiler.

6. Remove the high mounted stop light assembly after disconnecting the connector.

7. Reinstall a new light assembly in the reverse order of removal.

7-62

License Plate Light Bulb

Replacement

Interior Light Bulb Replacement

Map lamp and room lamp

■

Map lamp (LED type)

■

Room lamp (LED type)

OAE076044

1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lens cover from the lamp housing.



4. Reinstall in the reverse order.

OAEE076026 OAEE076027


7

7-63

Maintenance

Map lamp, room lamp, vanity mirror lamp and luggage compartment lamp

■

Map lamp (Bulb type)

■

Vanity mirror lamp

■

Room lamp (Bulb type)

OAE076045

■

Luggage compartment lamp

OAE076046

1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry the lens from the interior lamp housing.


WARNING

Prior to working on the Interior

Lights, ensure that the lamp is off to avoid burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock.

OAE076048

3. Install a new bulb in the socket.

4. Align the lens tabs with the interior lamp housing notches and snap the lens into place.

NOTICE

Use care not to dirty or damage lens, lens tab, and plastic housings.

OAE076047

7-64

A PP AR NC E C AR

Exterior Care

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the label directions when using any chemical cleaner or polish. Read all warning and caution statements that appear on the label.

High-pressure washing

• When using high-pressure washers, make sure to maintain sufficient distance from the vehicle.

Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure can lead to component damage or water penetration.

• Do not spray the camera, sensors or its surrounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not operate normally.

• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or plastic covers)or connectors as they may be damaged if they come into contact with high pressure water.

• Do not use any high-pressure nozzles, which induce either onedirect water stream or water swirling.

Protecting your vehicle’s finish

Washing

To help protect your vehicle’s finish from rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly and frequently at least once a month with lukewarm or cold water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road driving, you should wash it after each off-road trip. Pay special attention to the removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign materials. Make sure the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker panels are kept clear and clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, industrial pollution and similar deposits can damage your vehicle’s finish if not removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain water may not completely remove all these deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on painted surfaces, should be used.

7

7-65

Maintenance

After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water.

Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.

WARNING

After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water before getting on the road. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.

NOTICE

• Do not use strong soap, chemical detergents or hot water, and do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or when the body of the vehicle is warm.

• Be careful when washing the side windows of your vehicle.

Especially, with high-pressure water, water may leak through the windows and wet the interior.

• To prevent damage to the plastic parts, do not clean with chemical solvents or strong detergents.

OAEE076046L

NOTICE

• Water washing in the motor compartment including high pressure water washing may cause the failure of electrical circuits located in the motor compartment.

• Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

7-66

Waxing

A good coat of wax provides a barrier between your paint and environmental contamination.

Keeping a good coat of wax on your vehicle will help protect it.

Wax the vehicle when water will no longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing. Use a good quality liquid or paste wax, and follow the manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materials with a spot remover will usually strip the wax from the finish. Be sure to re-wax these areas even if the rest of the vehicle does not yet need waxing.

NOTICE

• Wiping dust or dirt off the body with a dry cloth will scratch the finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or caustic agents on chrome-plated or anodized aluminum parts.

This may result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.

Repairing your vehicle’s finish

Deep scratches or stone chips in the painted surface must be repaired promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust and may develop into a major repair expense.

NOTICE

If your vehicle is damaged and requires any metal repair or replacement, be sure the body shop applies anti-corrosion materials to the parts repaired or replaced.

7

7-67

Maintenance

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects, use a tar remover, not a scraper or other sharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of brightmetal parts from corrosion, apply a coating of wax or chrome preservative and rub to a high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastal areas, cover the bright metal parts with a heavier coating of wax or preservative. If necessary, coat the parts with non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other protective compound.

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and dust control may collect on the underbody. If these materials are not removed, accelerated rusting can occur on underbody parts such as the fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system, even though they have been treated with rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody and wheel openings with lukewarm or cold water once a month, after off-road driving and at the end of each winter. Pay special attention to these areas because it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to wet down the road grime without removing it.

The lower edges of doors, rocker panels, and frame members have drain holes that should not be allowed to clog with dirt; trapped water in these areas can cause rusting.

WARNING

After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed.

Aluminum wheel maintenance

The aluminum wheels are coated with a clear protective finish.

NOTICE

• Do not use abrasive cleaner, polishing compound, solvent, or wire brushes on aluminum wheels.

• Clean the wheel when it has cooled.

• Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water. Also, clean the wheels after driving on salted roads.

• Do not wash the wheels with high-speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any cleaners containing acid or alkaline detergents.

7-68

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corrosion

By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corrosion, HYUNDAI produces cars of the highest quality. However, this is only part of the job. To achieve the long-term corrosion resistance your vehicle can deliver, the owner’s cooperation and assistance is also required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion on your vehicle are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed to accumulate underneath the vehicle.

• Removal of paint or protective coatings by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your vehicle is regularly exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air and industrial pollution.

High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to keep your vehicle clean and free of mud or accumulations of other materials. This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the underside of the vehicle.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, corrosion is accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such conditions, the corrosive material is kept in contact with the car surfaces by moisture that is slow to evaporate.+

Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slow to dry and holds moisture in contact with the vehicle.

Although the mud appears to be dry, it can still retain the moisture and promote corrosion.

To help prevent corrosion

Keep your car clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep your vehicle clean and free of corrosive materials. Attention to the underside of the vehicle is particularly important.

• If you live in a high-corrosion area

— where road salts are used, near the ocean, areas with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra care to prevent corrosion. In winter, hose off the underside of your vehicle at least once a month and be sure to clean the underside thoroughly when winter is over.

7-69

7

Maintenance

• When cleaning underneath the vehicle, pay particular attention to the components under the fenders and other areas that are hidden from view. Do a thorough job; just dampening the accumulated mud rather than washing it away will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and corrosive materials.

• When cleaning lower door panels, rocker panels and frame members, be sure that drain holes are kept open so that moisture can escape and not be trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

Keep your garage dry

Don’t park your car in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion.

This is particularly true if you wash your vehicle in the garage or drive it into the garage when it is still wet or covered with snow, ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should be covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage painted surfaces in just a few hours. Always remove bird droppings as soon as possible.

Interior Care

Interior general precautions

Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume and cosmetic oil, from contacting the interior parts because they may cause damage or discoloration. If they do contact the interior parts, wipe them off immediately.

See the instructions for the proper way to clean vinyl.

NOTICE

• Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.

• When cleaning leather products

(steering wheel, seats etc.), use neutral detergents or low alcohol content solutions. If you use high alcohol content solutions or acid/alkaline detergents, the color of the leather may fade or the surface may get stripped off.

7-70

Cleaning the upholstery and interior trim

Vinyl (if equipped)

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl cleaner.

Fabric (if equipped)

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or carpets. Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not receive immediate attention, the fabric can be stained and its color can be affected. Also, its fire-resistant properties can be reduced if the material is not properly maintained.

Leather (if equipped)

• Feature of Seat Leather

- Leather is made from the outer skin of an animal, which goes through a special process to be available for use. Since it is a natural object, each part differs in thickness or density.

Wrinkles may appear as a natural result of stretching and shrinking depending on the temperature and humidity.

- The seat is made of stretchable fabric to improve comfort.

- The parts contacting the body are curved and the side supporting area is high which provides driving comfort and stability.

- Wrinkles may appear naturally from usage. It is not a fault of the products.

NOTICE

Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric's appearance and fire-resistant properties.

CAUTION

•

Wrinkles or abrasions which appear naturally from usage are not covered by warranty.

•

Belts with metallic accessories, zippers or keys inside the back pocket may damage the seat fabric.

•

Make sure not to wet the seat.

It may change the nature of natural leather.

•

Jeans or clothes which could bleach may contaminate the surface of the seat covering fabric.

7

7-71

Maintenance

• Caring for the leather seats

- Vacuum the seat periodically to remove dust and sand on the seat. It will prevent abrasion or damage of the leather and maintain its quality.

- Wipe the natural leather seat cover often with dry or soft cloth.

- Use of proper leather protective may prevent abrasion of the cover and helps maintain the color. Be sure to read the instructions and consult a specialist when using leather coating or protective agent.

beige) leather is easily contaminated and the stain is noticeable.

Clean the seats frequently.

- Avoid wiping with wet cloth. It may cause the surface to crack.

• Cleaning the leather seats instantly. Refer to instructions below for removal of each contaminant.

- Cosmetic products (sunscreen, foundation, etc.)

Apply cleansing cream on a cloth and wipe the contaminate spot.

Wipe off the cream with a wet cloth and remove water with a dry cloth.

- Beverages (coffee, soft drink, etc.)

Apply a small amount of neutral detergent and wipe until contaminations do not smear.

- Oil

Remove oil instantly with absorbable cloth and wipe with stain remover used only for natural leather.

- Chewing gum

Harden the gum with ice and remove gradually.

Cleaning the seat belt webbing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild soap solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow the instructions provided with the soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing because this may weaken the seat belt.

Cleaning the interior window glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should be cleaned with glass cleaner. Follow the directions on the glass cleaner container.

NOTICE

Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window. This may result in damage to the rear window defroster grid.

7-72

C AL FO RN A P ER HL OR AT E N TIIC E

Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply, See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:

Perchlorate containing materials, such as air bag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless remote entry batteries, must be disposed of according to Title 22 California Code of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).

7-73

7

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Dimensions ..............................................................8-2

Electric Vehicle Specifications.............................8-2

Bulb Wattage ..........................................................8-3

Tires and Wheels ...................................................8-4

Volume and Weight................................................8-5

Air Conditioning System........................................8-5

Recommended Lubricants and Capacities ..........8-6

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...................8-7

Vehicle Certification Label....................................8-7

Tire Specification and Pressure Label................8-8

Motor Number ........................................................8-8

Refrigerant Label...................................................8-8

Consumer Information...........................................8-9

Reporting Safety Defects ...................................8-10

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

DIIM EN SIIO S

Items

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Front tread

Rear tread

Wheelbase

in (mm)

175.9 (4,470)

71.6 (1,820)

57.1 (1,450)

61.2 (1,555)

61.5 (1,564)

106.3 (2,700)

E LE TR C V EH E S PE FIIC AT S

Motor

Max. Output (kW)

88

Max. Torque (Nm)

295

OBC : On-Board Battery Chargers

Battery (Lithium-Ion Polymer)

Capacity (kWh)

28

Power Output (kW)

98

Voltage (V)

360

Charger (OBC)

Max. Output (kW)

6.6

8-2

B UL B W TT AG

Front

Rear

Type A

Type B

Daytime running light (DRL)

Side repeater lamp

Tail lamp

Turn signal lamp

Stop lamp

Backup lamp

Side marker

High mounted stop lamp

License plate lamp

Map lamp

Light Bulb

Headlamp

Parking lamp

Turn signal lamp

Side marker

Headlamp

Parking lamp

Turn signal lamp

Side marker

Interior Room lamp

Vanity mirror lamp

Luggage room lamp

Type A

Type B

Type A

Type B

Low

High

Low

High

Bulb Type

H7

HB3

W5W

PY21W

W5W

LED

HB3

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

W16W

LED

LED

W5W

W10W

LED

FESTOON

LED

FESTOON

FESTOON

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

LED

16

LED

LED

5

10

Wattage

55

60

5

21

5

LED

60

LED

LED

LED

8

LED

5

5

8-3


TIIR ES ND WH EE S

Items

Full size tire

Tire Size

205/55 R16

Wheel Size

6.5J X 16

Inflation Pressure kPa (psi)

Normal Load

Front Rear

Maximum Load

Front Rear

250 (36) 235 (34) 250 (36)

Wheel Lug Nut

Torque kgf

• m

(lbf

• ft, N

• m)

235 (34)

11~13

(79~94, 07~127)

If your vehicle is not equipped with a compact spare tire, your vehicle will be equipped with a Tire Mobility Kit.

NOTICE

• It is permissible to add 3 psi to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expected soon.

Tires typically loose 1psi (7kPa) for every 12°F temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are expected, recheck your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.

• An air pressure generally decreases, as you drive up to a high-altitude area above sea level. Thus, if you plan to drive a high-altitude area, check the tire pressures in advance. If necessary, inflate them to a proper level. (Air inflation per altitude : +2.4 psi/1 mile)

CAUTION

When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.

Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or not work properly.

8-4

V OL ME ND GH T

Gross Vehicle Weight lbs. (kg)

4,189 (1,900)

Luggage Volume cu ft (

l

)

23.8 (650)

R C ON TIIO NIIN

Refrigerant

SY ST M

Items

without heat pump oz. (g) with heat pump

Compressor lubricant oz. (cc)

Weight of Volume

19.40±0.88 (550±25)

38.80±0.88 (1,100±25)

6.34±0.35 (180±10)

Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for more details.

Classification

R-134a

POE

8-5


R EC MM ND LU BR NT S A CA PA TIIE S

To help achieve proper vehicle performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.

These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.

Lubricant Classification

Reduction gear fluid

Coolant

Brake fluid without heat pump with heat pump

Volume

1.0 ~ 1.1 US qt.

(1.0 ~ 1.1

l

)

4.33 ~ 4.44 US qt.

(4.1 ~ 4.2

l

)

4.86 ~ 4.97 US qt.

(4.6 ~ 4.7

l

)

0.74~0.85 US qt.

(0.7~0.8

l

)

70W, API GL-4, TCGO-9(MS517-14)

Mixture of antifreeze and water

(Phosphate-based Ethylene glycol coolant for aluminum radiator)

FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

8-6

V EH E IID

■

Frame number

EN FIIC AT N N MB ER

■

VIN label

V EH E C ER

L AB

FIIC AT

OAE086001

The vehicle identification number

(VIN) is the number used in registering your car and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc.

The number is punched on the floor under the passenger seat. To check the number, open the cover.

OAE086004L

The VIN is also on a plate attached to the top of the dashboard. The number on the plate can easily be seen through the windshield from outside.

OAE086002

The vehicle certification label attached on the driver’s side center pillar gives the Vehicle Identification Number

(VIN).

8-7


TIIR E S EC FIIC AT AN D

P RE SS UR E L AB L

M OT R N UM R R EF RIIG ER T L AB

F E QU PE

OAE086002L

The tires supplied on your new vehicle are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving.

The tire label located on the driver’s side center pillar gives the tire pressures recommended for your car.

OAEE086001

The motor number is stamped on the motor block as shown in the drawing.

The motor number can be seen from under the vehicle.

OAEE086005N

The refrigerant label provides information such as refrigerant type and amount.

The label is located on the underside of the hood.

8-8

C ON UM R IIN OR MA TIIO

This consumer information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. Your HYUNDAI dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

HYUNDAI motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed all applicable safety standards.

For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read and follow all directions in this Owner’s Manual, particularly the information under the headings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and "WARNING".

If, after reading this manual, you have any questions regarding the operation of your vehicle, please contact your nearest

HYUNDAI Motor America Regional Office as listed in the following:

Eastern Region:

Connecticut, Delaware,

Maine, Massachusetts, New

Hampshire, New Jersey, New York,

Pennsylvania, Rhode Island,

Vermont.

Eastern Region

1122 Cranbury South River Road

Jamesburg, NJ 08831

(800) 633-5151

South Central Region:

Alabama, Arkansas, Louisiana,

Mississippi, New Mexico, Oklahoma,

Tennessee, Texas.

South Central Region

1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400

Coppell, TX 75019

(800) 633-5151

Western Region:

Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona, California,

Colorado, Idaho, Montana, Nevada,

Oregon, Utah, Washington,

Wyoming.

Western Region

10550 Talbert Avenue P.O.Box

20850 Fountain Valley, California

92728-0850

(800) 633-5151

Southern Region:

Florida, Georgia, Maryland, North

Carolina, South Carolina, Virginia,

West Virginia.

Southern Region

3025 Chastain Meadows Parkway

Suite 100 Marietta, GA 30066

(800) 633-5151

Central Region:

Illinois, Indiana, lowa, Kentucky,

Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska,

North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio,

Wisconsin, Kansas, Missouri.

Central Region

2 Trans Am Plaza Dr #500 Oakbrook

Terrace, IL 60181

(800) 633-5151

8-9


R EP RT G S FE Y D FE CT S

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying HYUNDAI

MOTOR AMERICA.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888- 327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; download the SaferCar mobile application; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA

1200 New Jersey Ave, SE,

West Building Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.

8-10

Elle cttrriic eh e S ysstte m O ve viie w

Electric Vehicle ........................................................H3

Characteristics of Electric Vehicles......................H3

Battery Information ................................................H3

Main Components of Electric Vehicle ..................H4

High Voltage Battery (lithium-ion polymer)........H5

High Voltage Battery Warmer System .................H6

EV Mode ...................................................................H7

Range .....................................................................................H7

Nearby by stations .............................................................H8

Energy Information ............................................................H8

ECO Driving...........................................................................H9

Charging and Climate Settings.........................................H9

EV Settings .........................................................................H10

Charging Information ............................................H12

Charging Time Information ..................................H12

Charging Types ......................................................H13

Charging Status .....................................................H14

Charging Connector AUTO/LOCK Mode ............H15

When the Charging Connector is Locked...................H15

Scheduled Charging...............................................H16

Charging Precautions............................................H17

Normal Charge .......................................................H19

How to Connect Normal Charger..................................H19

Unlock Charging Door in Emergency ..........................H22

Checking Charging Status...............................................H23

How to Disconnect Normal Charger ............................H24

Unlock Charging Connector in Emergency ................H25

Fast Charge ............................................................H26

How to Connect Fast Charger .......................................H26



How to Disconnect Fast Charger..................................H29

Trickle Charge ........................................................H30

How to set the charge level of the portable charger ................................................................................H30

How to Connect Portable Charger

(ICCB: In-Cable Control Box)..........................................H31



Charging Status Indicator Lamp for

Portable Charger...............................................................H37

How to Disconnect Portable Charger


Unlock Charging Connector in Emergency ................H41

Precautions for Portable Charger


How to Start the Vehicle ......................................H42

How to Stop the Vehicle.......................................H42

Virtual Engine Sound System ..............................H43

Distance to Empty .................................................H43

When destination is not set ...........................................H44

When destination is set...................................................H44

Tips for Improving Distance to Empty ...............H45

ECO Guide ...............................................................H45

State of Charge (SOC) Gauge for

High Voltage Battery ............................................H46

Warning and Indicator Lights

(related to electric vehicle) .................................H46

Ready Indicator .................................................................H46

Service Warning Light .....................................................H47

Power Down Warning Light ...........................................H47

Charging Indicator Light..................................................H47

High Voltage Battery Level Warning Light.................H48

Regenerative Brake Warning Light ..............................H48

LCD Display Messages..........................................H48

Shift to P to charge .........................................................H48

Remaining time ..................................................................H49

Charging Door Open ........................................................H49

Charger Error! / Quick Charger Error!........................H49

Stop vehicle and check brakes .....................................H50

Check brakes......................................................................H50

Low Battery........................................................................H50

Charge immediately. Power limited ..............................H51

Low Battery. Charge immediately.................................H51

Low Battery Temp. Power limited.................................H51

Battery Overheated! Stop vehicle ................................H52

Power limited .....................................................................H52

Stop vehicle and check power supply.........................H53

Check Virtual Engine Sound System............................H53

Check electric vehicle system .......................................H54

Energy Flow ...........................................................H54

Vehicle Stop........................................................................H54

EV Propulsion ....................................................................H55

Regeneration......................................................................H55

Aux. Battery Saver+ .............................................H55

Mode ....................................................................................H56

System Setting...................................................................H57

LCD Message .....................................................................H57

If an Accident Occurs ...........................................H58

Other Precautions for Electric Vehicle ..............H60

Service Plug ...........................................................H61

E LE TR C V EH E

Electric Vehicle

An electric vehicle is driven using a battery and an electric motor. While general vehicles use an internal combustion engine and gasoline as fuel, electric vehicles use electrical energy that is charged inside the high voltage battery. As a result, electric vehicles are eco-friendly in that they do not require fuel and do not emit exhaust gases.

Characteristics of Electric

Vehicles

1. It is driven using the electrical energy that is charged inside the high voltage battery. This method prevents air pollution since fuel, like gasoline, is not required, negating the emission of exhaust gases.

2. A high performance motor is used in the vehicle as well. Compared to standard, internal combustion engine vehicles, engine noise and vibrations are much more minimal when driving.

3. When decelerating or driving downhill, regenerative braking is utilized to charge the high voltage battery. This minimizes energy loss and increases the distance to empty.

4. When the battery charge is not sufficient, normal charge, quick charge and trickle charge are available. (Refer to "Charge Types for Electric Vehicle" for details.)

i

Information

What does regenerative braking do?

It uses the electric motor when decelerating or braking which transforms vehicle motion (kinetic energy) to electrical energy to charge the high voltage batteries. (Torque is applied in the opposite direction when decelerating to generate braking force and electric energy.)

Battery Information

• The vehicle is composed of a high voltage battery that drives the motor and air-conditioner, and an auxiliary battery (12 V) that drives the lamps, wipers, and audio system.

• The auxiliary battery is automatically charged when the vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode or the high voltage battery is being charged.

H3

H4

M AIIN OM ON NT S O F E EC RIIC EH CL E

Main Components of Electric Vehicle

High Voltage Battery

Motor

On-Board Charger

(OBC)

EPCU

(Inverter + LDC)

Reduction

Gear

OAEEQ016001

• On-Board Charger (OBC) : External device (low speed) to charge the high voltage battery.

• Inverter : Transforms direct current into alternate current to supply power to the motor, and transforms alternate current into direct current to charge the high voltage battery.

• LDC : Transforms power from the high voltage battery to low voltage (12 V) to supply power to the vehicle (DC-DC).

• Motor : Uses electrical energy stored inside the high voltage battery to drive the vehicle (functions like an engine in a standard vehicle).

• Reduction Gear : Delivers rotational force of the motor to the tires at appropriate speeds and torque.

• High voltage battery (lithium-ion

polymer) : Stores and supplies power necessary for the electric vehicle to operate (12 V auxiliary battery provides power to the vehicle features such as lights and wipers).

❈

OBC : On-Board Charger

❈

LDC : Low Voltage DC-DC Converter

WARNING

•

Do not intentionally remove or disassemble high voltage components and high voltage battery connectors and wires.

Also, be careful not to damage high voltage components and the high voltage battery. It may cause serious injury and significantly impact the performance and durability of the vehicle.

•

When inspection and maintenance is required for high voltage components and the high voltage battery, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

High Voltage Battery (lithiumion polymer)

OAEEQ016002

• The charge amount of the high voltage battery may gradually decrease when the vehicle is not driving.

• The battery capacity of the high voltage battery may decrease when the vehicle is stored in high/low temperatures.

• Distance to empty may vary depending on the driving conditions, even if the charge amount is the same. The high voltage battery may expend more energy when driving at high speed or uphill.

These actions may reduce the distance to empty.

• The high voltage battery is used when using the air-conditioner / heater. This may reduce the distance to empty. Make sure to set moderate temperatures when using the air-conditioner/heater.

• Natural degradation may occur with the high voltage battery depending on the number of years the vehicle is used. This may reduce the distance to empty.

• When the charge capacity and distance to empty keep falling, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for inspection and maintenance.

H5

H6

M AIIN OM ON NT S O F E EC RIIC EH CL E ((C T..))

• If the vehicle will not be in use for an extended period of time, charge the high voltage battery once every three months to prevent it from discharging. Also, if the charge amount is not enough, immediately charge to full and store the vehicle.

• Normal charge is recommended to keep the high voltage battery in optimal condition.

If the high voltage battery charge amount is below 20%, you can keep the high voltage battery performance in optimal condition if you charge the high voltage battery to 100%. (Once a month or more is recommended.)

CAUTION

•

Make sure to use a designated charger when charging the high voltage battery. Using different types of chargers may have a serious impact on vehicle durability.

•

Make sure that the high voltage battery charger gauge does not reach ''L (Low)". If the vehicle is kept at ''L (Low)" for a long period, it may damage the high voltage battery and the high voltage battery may have to be replaced depending on the level of degradation.

•

If the vehicle is in a collision, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer to inspect whether the high voltage battery is still connected.

High Voltage Battery Warmer

System

The high voltage battery warmer system prevents reduction of battery output when battery temperature is low. If the charging connector is connected, the warmer system automatically operate according to the battery temperature.

Charging time may shorten compare to vehicles without the high voltage battery warmer system. But, electricity charge may increase because of high voltage battery warmer system operation.

CAUTION

The high voltage battery warmer system operates when the charging connector is connected to the vehicle.

However, the high voltage warmer system may not operate when battery temperature drops below -31°F (-35°C).

E V M E

EV Mode (if equipped)

Range

OAEEQ016003L

If you select the "EV" menu at the

AVN home screen or press the "EV" button on the right side of the airconditioning button panel, you can enter EV mode.

For details on EV Mode, refer to the

Multimedia manual that is provided separately.

The EV mode has a total of 7 menus

Range, Nearby Stations, Energy

Information, Drive Mode Settings,

ECO Driving, Charging/Climate

Settings and EV Settings.

Description

1 Reachable areas

2

Risky areas

(depending on circumstances)

3 Unreachable areas

H7

H8

E V M E ((C ON

Nearby by stations Energy Information

Stations around the current location are searched. Depending on the symbol color of the station, it is categorized as Reachable, Risky and

Unreachable.

You can check battery information and electricity use.

Battery Information

You can check the reachable range, total battery power remaining, and expected charging time for each charge type.

Energy Consumption

Power that is consumed by the drivetrain, climate and electrical components are displayed.

You can check the current reachable range and range when climate is turned off.

ECO Driving Charging and Climate Settings

You can check ECO level information and ECO driving history.

ECO Level

A total of 8 ECO levels and the average energy consumption are displayed depending on vehicle driving style.

Driving History

You can check the date (1), distance

(2), and the fuel economy (3) rating of the previous driving trips. The date with the highest ECO level is marked with a star shaped icon.

You can set the date and time of when to charge the battery and the climate control temperature. Two separate schedules can be set.

Also, you may select the time to start charging using the Off-peak Time.

H9

E V M E ((C ON

EV Settings

H10

Set Departure and Climate

Description

1

Set anticipated departure time after charging

2 Set temperature inside the vehicle

3

Select the day of the week you wish to charge your vehicle

Off-peak Time Settings

1

2

3

Description

If selected, starts charging only on the designated off-peak time

If deselected, starts charging only on the scheduled time

Set the most inexpensive time to start charging

Set the most inexpensive time to complete charging

Warning

You can select or deselect the

Range Warning.

- Range Warning : If the destination set in the navigation cannot be reached with the. remaining battery, a warning message is displayed.

Charging Current

You can adjust the current levels for

Normal charging. Select an appropriate current level for normal chargers or portable chargers that is used. If the normal charging process does not start or abruptly stops in the middle, re-select another proper level and re-try charging the vehicle.

EV Route

You can check the distance to empty of your vehicle from the starting point and to the destination you have set in the navigation.

i

Information

If a lower current level is selected, the charging time will take longer.

H11

H12

C HA GE TY PE S F OR LE TR C V EH E

Charging Information

• Normal Charge :

The electric vehicle is charged by plugging into a normal charger installed in your home or a public charging station. (For further details, refer to the 'Normal Charge'.)

• Fast Charge (if equipped):

You can charge at high speeds at public charging stations. Refer to the respective company's manual that is provided for each fast charger type.

Battery performance and durability can deteriorate if the fast charger is used constantly.

Use of fast charge should be minimized in order to help prolong high voltage battery life.

• Trickle Charge :

The Electric vehicle can be charged by using household electricity. The electrical outlet in your home must comply with regulations and can safely accommodate the Voltage /

Current (Amps) / Power (Watts) ratings specified on the portable charge.

Charging Time Information

• Normal Charge :

Takes about 4 hours 25 minutes at room temperature.

(Can be charged to 100%.)

• Fast Charge (if equipped):

- 50 kw charger : Takes about 30 minutes at room temperature when charged to 80%.

- 100 kw charger : Takes about 23 minutes at room temperature when charged to 80%.

Both 50/100 kw charger can be charged to 94%.

• Trickle Charge :

Takes about 24 hours at room temperature. (120V-12A) (Can be charged to 100%.)

i

Information

Depending on the condition and durability of the high voltage battery, charger specifications, and ambient temperature, the time required for charging the high voltage battery may vary.

Charging Types

Category

Charging Inlet

(Vehicle)

Charging Connector Charging Outlet How to Charge

Normal

Charge

OAEEQ016020N

OLFP0Q5006K

Charging Time

OLFP0Q4057N

Use normal charger installed in homes or public charging station

Approx. 4 hours 25 minutes (to fully charge, 100%)

Fast Charge

(if equipped)

OAEEQ016021N

OAEEQ016079N

OAEEQ016023

Use the fast charger at public charging station

50 kw : approx. 30 min.

100 kw : approx. 23 min. (to charge 80%)

Trickle

Charge

Use household current

Approx. 24 hours

(120V-12A, to fully charge, 100%)

OAEEQ016020N

OLFP0Q5006K OAEEQ016024

• Depending on the condition and durability of the high voltage battery, charger specifications, and ambient temperature, the time required for charging the high voltage battery may vary.

• Actual charger image and charging method may vary in accordance with the charger manufacturer.

H13

H14

C HA GE DIIC TO R L AM P F OR LE TR C V EH CL E

Charging Status

OAEEQ016025

When charging the high voltage battery, the charge level can be checked from outside the vehicle.

Operation of Charging Indicator Lamp

(1) (2) (3)

(OFF) (OFF) (OFF)

Blink

(ON)

(ON)

(ON)

Blink

(OFF)

Blink

(ON)

(ON)

Blink

(OFF)

(OFF)

Blink

(ON)

Blink

(OFF)

(OFF)

(OFF)

Blink

Blink

(OFF)

Details

Not Charged

Charging

0~33%

34~66%

67~99%

Fully charged (100%)(turns OFF in 5 seconds)

Error while charging

Charging 12 V auxiliary battery or scheduled air conditioner is operating

Scheduled charging is operating

(turns OFF after 3 minutes)

C HA GIIN G C ON CT OR OC

Charging Connector

AUTO / LOCK Mode

When the Charging Connector is Locked

Before charging

While charging

Finished charging

LOCK

O

O

O

AUTO

X

O

X

OAEEQ016059

You may select when the charging connector can be locked and unlocked in the charging inlet.

Press the button to change between AUTO mode and LOCK mode.

• LOCK mode (button indicator off) :

The connector locks when the charging connector is plugged into the charging inlet. The connector is locked until all doors are unlocked by the driver. This mode can be used to prevent charging cable theft.

unlocked when all doors are unlocked, but the charging cable is not disconnected within 10 seconds, the connector will be automatically locked again.

unlocked when all doors are unlocked, but all doors are locked again, immediately, the connector will be automatically locked again.

• AUTO mode (button indicator on) :

The connector locks when charging starts. The connector unlocks when charging is complete. This mode can be used when charging in a public charging station.

H15

H16

S CH DU ED AR GIIN

Scheduled Charging

(if equipped)

• You can set-up a charging schedule for your vehicle using the AVN or BlueLink application.

Refer to the Multimedia manual or the BlueLink manual for detailed information about setting scheduled charging.

• Scheduled charging can only be done when using a normal charger or the portable charger (ICCB: In-

Cable Control Box).

OAEEQ016026

• When scheduled charging is set and the normal charger or the portable charger (ICCB: In-Cable

Control Box) is connected for charging, the indicator lamp in the middle blinks (for 3 minutes) to indicate that scheduled charging is set.

• When scheduled charging is set, charging is not initiated immediately when the normal charger or portable charger (ICCB: In-Cable

Control Box) is connected. When immediate charging is required, use the AVN to deactivate the scheduled charge setting or press scheduled charging deactivation

( ) button.

OAEEQ016027

• If you press the scheduled charging deactivation ( ) button to immediately charge the battery, charging must be initiated 3 minutes after the charging cable has been connected.

When you press the scheduled charging deactivation ( ) button for immediate charging, the scheduled charge setting is not completely deactivated. If you need to completely deactivate the scheduled charge setting, use the AVN to finalize the deactivation.

Refer to "Normal Charge or Trickle

Charge" for details about connecting the normal charger and the portable charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box).

P RE AU TIIO NS OR HA GIIN EL EC C V EH CL E

Charging Precautions

■

Normal Charger

■

Fast Charger

OLFP0Q4057N

OAEEQ016023

Actual charger image and charging method may vary in accordance with the charger manufacturer.

WARNING

• Electromagnetic waves that are generated from the charger can seriously impact medical electric devices such as an implantable cardiac pacemaker.

When using medical electric devices such as an implantable cardiac pacemaker, make sure to ask the medical team and manufacturer whether charging your electric vehicle will impact the operation of the medical electric devices such as an implantable cardiac pacemaker.

• Check to make sure there is no water or dust on the charging cable connector and plug before connecting to the charger and charging inlet.

Connecting while there is water or dust on the charging cable connector and plug may cause a fire or electric shock.

WARNING

• Be careful not to touch the charging connector, charging plug, and the charging inlet when connecting the cable to the charger and the charging inlet on the vehicle.

• Comply with the following in order to prevent electrical shock when charging:

- Use a waterproof charger.

- Be careful when touching the charging connector and charging plug with your hands wet, or when standing in water or snow while connecting the charging cable.

- Be careful when there is lightning.

- Be careful when the charging connector and plug is wet.

H17

H18

P RE AU TIIO NS OR HA GIIN EL EC C V EH CL E ((C ON T..))

WARNING

• Immediately stop charging when you find abnormal symptoms (odor, smoke).

• Replace the charging cable if the cable coating is damaged to prevent electrical shock.

• When connecting or removing the charging cable, make sure to hold the charging connector handle and charging plug.

If you pull the cable itself

(without using the handle), the internal wires may disconnect or get damaged. This may lead to electric shock or fire.

CAUTION

•

Always keep the charging connector and charging plug in clean and dry condition. Be sure to keep the charging cable in a condition where there is no water or moisture.

•

Make sure to use the designated charger for charging the electric vehicle. Using any other charger may cause failure.

•

Before charging the battery, turn the vehicle OFF.

•

When the vehicle is switched

OFF while charging, the cooling fan inside the motor compartment may automatically operate. Do not touch the cooling fan while charging.

•

Be careful not to drop the charging connector.

The charging connector can be damaged.

C HA GIIN EL EC RIIC EH LE NO RM L C AR E))

Normal Charge

■

Normal Charger

How to Connect Normal

Charger

1. Depress the brake pedal and apply the parking brake.

2. Turn OFF all switches, shift to P


If charging is initiated without the gear in P (Park), the charging will start after the gear is automatically shifted to P (Park).

OLFP0Q4057N


OAEEQ016063N

3. Press the charging door open button ( ) to open the charging door.

H19

H20

C HA GIIN EL EC RIIC EH LE NO RM L C AR CO T..))

4. If you cannot open the charging door due to freezing weather : charging door.

2) Pull the emergency cable to open the charging door.

(When the charging door does not open, refer to "How to Unlock

Charging Door in Emergencies.")

OAEEQ016064N

5. Remove the charging inlet cover

(1).

6. Check if there is dust on the charging connector and charging inlet.

7. Hold the charging connector handle and connect it to the vehicle normal charging inlet. Push the connector until you hear a "clicking" sound. If the charging connector and charging terminal are not connected properly, this may cause a fire.

i

Information

Charging connector AUTO/LOCK mode

The charging connector is locked in the inlet at a different period according to which mode is selected.

• LOCK mode : The connector locks when the charging connector is plugged into the charging inlet.

• AUTO mode : The connector locks when charging starts.

For more details, refer to "Charging

Connector AUTO/LOCK Mode" in this chapter.

■

Normal Charger

OLFP0Q4057N

8. Connect the charging plug to the electric outlet at a normal charging station to start charging.

OAEEQ016032

9. Check if the charging indicator light of the high voltage battery in the instrument cluster is turned

ON. Charging is not done when the charging indicator lamp is

OFF.

When the charging connector and charging plug are not connected properly, reconnect the charging cable to charge.

i

Information

• Even though charging is possible with the POWER button in the

ON/START position, for your safety, start charging when the POWER button is in the OFF position and the vehicle shifted to P (Park). After charging has started, you can use electrical components such as the radio by pressing the POWER button to the ACC or ON position.

• During normal charging, the radio reception may be bad.

• During charging, the gear cannot be shifted from P (Park) to any other gear.

H21

H22

C HA GIIN EL EC RIIC EH LE NO RM L C AR CO T..))

i

Information

Depending on the condition and durability of the high voltage battery, charger specifications, and ambient temperature, the time required for charging the battery may vary.


Emergency

OAEE046193L

10. After charging has started, the estimated charging time is displayed on the instrument cluster for about 1 minute.

If you open the driver seat door while charging, the estimated charging time is also displayed on the instrument cluster for about 1 minute.

When scheduled charging is set, the estimated charging time is displayed as "--".

OAEE046010


Checking Charging Status

OAEEQ016025



(1) (2) (3)

(OFF) (OFF) (OFF)

Blink

(ON)

(ON)

(ON)

Blink

(OFF)

Blink

(ON)

(ON)

Blink

(OFF)

(OFF)

Blink

(ON)

Blink

(OFF)

(OFF)

(OFF)

Blink

Blink

(OFF)

Details

Not Charged

Charging

0~33%

34~66%

67~99%

Fully charged (100%) (turns OFF in 5 seconds)





H23

H24

C HA GIIN EL EC RIIC EH

How to Disconnect Normal

Charger

■

Normal Charger

LE NO RM L C AR CO T..))

OLFP0Q4057N

1. When charging is complete, remove the charging plug from the electrical outlet of the normal charging station.

OAEEQ016033N

2. Hold the charging connector handle and pull it while pressing the release button (1).

i

Information

To prevent charging cable theft, the charging connector cannot be disconnected from the inlet when the doors are locked. Unlock all doors to disconnect the charging connector from the inlet.

However, if the vehicle is in the charging connector AUTO mode, the charging connector automatically unlocks from the inlet when charging is completed.



Unlock Charging Connector in

Emergency

OAEEQ016034N

3. Make sure to install the charging inlet cover.

4. Make sure to completely close the charging door.

OAEEQ016057L

If the charging connector does not disconnect due to battery discharge and failure of the electric wires, open the liftgate and slightly pull the emergency cable. The charging connector will then disconnect.

H25

C HA GIIN EL EC RIIC EH LE FA ST HA E))

Fast Charge (if equipped)

■

Fast Charger

i

Information

If you use a fast charger when the vehicle is already fully charged, some quick chargers will send out an error message. When the vehicle is fully charged, do not charge the vehicle.

How to Connect Fast Charger

H26

OAEEQ016023

You can charge at high speeds at public charging stations. Refer to the respective company's manual that is provided for each fast charger type.

Battery performance and durability can deteriorate if the fast charger is used constantly.

Use of fast charge should be minimized in order to help prolong high voltage battery life.


OAEEQ016063N









OAEEQ016065N


(1).

6. Check whether there is dust or foreign substances inside the charging connector and charging inlet.

7. Hold the charging connector handle and connect it to the vehicle quick charging inlet. Push the connector until you hear a "clicking" sound. If the charging connector and charging terminal are not connected properly, this may cause a fire.

Refer to the manual for each type of fast charger for how to charge and remove the charger.

OAEEQ016032



OFF.

When the charging connector is not connected properly, reconnect the charging cable to charge it again.

During cold weather, fast charging may not be available to prevent high voltage battery degradation.

H27

H28

i

C HA GIIN EL EC RIIC EH LE FA ST HA GE ON

Information


ON/START position, for your safety, start charging when the POWER button is in the OFF position and the vehicle shifted to P (Park).

After charging has started, you can use electrical components such as the radio by pressing the POWER button to ACC or ON position.



Emergency

OAEE046010



OAEEQ016025


i

Information



(1) (2) (3)

(OFF) (OFF) (OFF)

Blink

(ON)

(ON)

(ON)

Blink

(OFF)

Blink

(ON)

(ON)

Blink

(OFF)

(OFF)

Blink

(ON)

Blink

(OFF)

(OFF)

(OFF)

Blink

Blink

(OFF)

Details

Not Charged

Charging

0~33%

34~66%

67~99%






How to Disconnect Fast

Charger

1. Remove the charging connector when fast charging is completed, or after you stop charging using the fast charger. Refer to each respective fast charger manual for details about how to disconnect the charging connector.

OAEEQ016034N



H29

C HA GIIN EL EC RIIC EH LE RIIC E C AR E))

Trickle Charge

■

Portable Charger

How to set the charge level of the portable charger

H30

Plug Electric Outlet

(1) Code and Plug (Code set)

(2) Control Box

(3) Charging Cable and Charging

Connector

OAEEQ016042

Trickle Charge can be used when

Normal Charge or Fast Charge is not available by using household electricity.

OAEE046506N

1. Check the rated current of the electric outlet prior to connecting the plug to the outlet.

2. Connect the plug to a household electric outlet.

3. Check the display window on the control box.

OAEEQ018083

4. Press the button (1) on the back of the control box for more than 1 second to adjust the charge level.

(Refer to charging cable type and example for setting the charge level.)

5. The display window on the control box changes from H and M to L every time you press the button

(1).

6. When setting the charge level is complete, start charging according to the trickle charge procedure.

❈

Example for setting the ICCB charge level

(The example is only for reference and may vary according to the surrounding environment.)

Control box display window Outlet current

14-16A

ICCB charge level

12A

13-12A

11-10A

9-8A

10A

8A

6A

How to Connect Portable

Charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control

Box)

Electric Outlet

Plug

OAEE046506N

1. Connect the plug to a household electric outlet.

H31

H32

C HA GIIN EL EC RIIC EH E ((T RIIC E C HA E)) ((C ON




If charging is initiated without the gear in P (Park), the charging will start after the gear is automatically shifted to P (Park).

OAEEQ016043

2. Check if the power lamp (green) illuminates on the control box.

OAEEQ016063N






OAEEQ016064N


(1).

8. Check if there is dust on the charging connector and charging inlet.

9. Hold the charging connector handle and connect it to the vehicle normal charging inlet. Push the connector until you hear a "clicking" sound. If the charging connector and charging terminal are not connected properly, this may cause a fire.

i

Information

Charging connector AUTO/LOCK mode

The charging connector is locked in the inlet at a different period according to which mode is selected.

• LOCK mode : The connector locks when the charging connector is plugged into the charging inlet.

• AUTO mode : The connector locks when charging starts.



H33

H34


OAEEQ016045

10. Charging starts automatically

(charging lamp blinks).

OAEEQ016032



OFF.

When the charging connector is not connected properly, reconnect the charging cable to charge it again.

i

Information


ON/START position, for your safety, start charging when the POWER button is in the OFF position and the vehicle shifted to P (Park).

After charging has started, you can use electrical components such as the radio by pressing the POWER button to ACC or ON position.


OAEE046193L

12. After charging has started, the estimated charging time is displayed on the instrument cluster for about 1 minute.

If you open the driver seat door while charging, the estimated charging time is also displayed on the instrument cluster for about 1 minute.

When scheduled charging is set, the estimated charging time is displayed as "--".

i

Information



Emergency

OAEE046010


H35

H36

C HA GIIN EL EC RIIC


EH E ((T RIIC E C HA E)) ((C ON

OAEEQ016025



(1) (2) (3)

(OFF) (OFF) (OFF)

Blink

(ON)

(ON)

(ON)

Blink

(OFF)

Blink

(ON)

(ON)

Blink

(OFF)

(OFF)

Blink

(ON)

Blink

(OFF)

(OFF)

(OFF)

Blink

Blink

(OFF)

Details

Not Charged

Charging

0~33%

34~66%

67~99%






Charging Status Indicator Lamp for Portable Charger

Control Box Indicator Details

On : Power on

Blink : Plug temperature sensor failure

(Green)

PLUG

On : Plug high temperature protection

Blink : Plug high temperature warning

(Red)

POWER On : Power on

CHARGE

FAULT

Blink : Charging In power saving mode, only the CHARGE indicator is illuminated.

Blink : Charging interrupted

CHARGE LEVEL

Charging current 12 A

The charging current changes (3 level) whenever the button



(1) is pressed for 1 sec with the charger plugged into an electrical outlet but not the vehicle.

❈

Back of the control box

Charging connector plugged

(Green)

VEHICLE Charging

(Blue)

Blink : Charging impossible

(Red)

H37

H38


Charging Status Indicator Lamp for Portable Charger

NO Control Box Status / Diagnosis / Countermeasure NO Control Box Status / Diagnosis / Countermeasure

1

• Charging connector plugged into vehicle

(Green ON)

• Plug temperature sensor failure

(Green blink)

• Plug high temperature protection

(Red blink)

• Plug high temperature warning (Red ON)

Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

2

- Charging connector plugged into vehicle (Green ON)

3

- While charging

• Charge indicator (Green blink)

• Vehicle indicator (Blue ON)

4

- Before plugging charging connector into vehicle (Red blink)

• Abnormal temperature

• ICCB (In-Cable Control Box) failure


NO Control Box Status / Diagnosis / Countermeasure NO Control Box Status / Diagnosis / Countermeasure

5

- Plugged into vehicle (Red blink)

• Diagnostic device failure

• Current leakage

• Abnormal temperature


6

- After plugging charging connector into vehicle (Red blink)

• Communication failure


7

• Plug temperature sensor failure

(Green blink)

• Plug high temperature protection

(Red blink)

• Plug high temperature warning (Red ON)


8

- Power saving mode

• 3 minutes after charging starts

(Green blink)

H39


How to Disconnect Portable Charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box)

Electric Outlet

Plug

H40

OAEEQ016033N

1. Hold the charging connector handle and pull it while pressing the release button (1).

i

Information

To prevent charging cable theft, the charging connector cannot be disconnected from the inlet when the doors are locked. Unlock all doors to disconnect the charging connector from the inlet. However, if the vehicle is in the charging connector AUTO mode, the charging connector automatically unlocks from the inlet when charging is completed. For more details, refer to

"Charging Connector AUTO/LOCK

Mode" in this chapter.

OAEEQ016034N



OAEE046507N

4. Disconnect the plug from the household electric outlet. Do not pull the cable when disconnecting the plug.

5. Close the protective cover for the charging connector so that foreign material cannot get into the terminal.

6. Put the charging cable inside the cable compartment to protect it.

Unlock Charging Connector in

Emergency

OAEEQ016057L

If the charging connector does not disconnect due to battery discharge and failure of the electric wires, open the liftgate and slightly pull the emergency cable. The charging connector will then disconnect .

Precautions for Portable

Charger (ICCB: In-Cable Control

Box)

• Use the portable charger that is certified by HYUNDAI Motors.

• Do not try to repair, disassemble, or adjust the portable charger.

• Do not use an extension cord or adapter.

• Stop using immediately when failure occurs.

• Do not touch the plug and charging connector with wet hands.

• Do not touch the terminal part of the normal charging connector and the normal charging inlet on the vehicle.

• Do not connect the charging connector to voltage that does not comply with regulations.

• Do not use the portable charger if it is worn out, exposed, or there exists any type of damage on the portable charger.

• If the ICCB case and normal charging connector is damaged, cracked, or the wires are exposed in any way, do not use the portable charger.

• Do not let children operate or touch the portable charger.

• Keep the control box free of water.

• Keep the normal charging connector or plug terminal free of foreign substances.

• Do not step on the cable or cord.

Do not pull the cable or cord and do not twist or bend it.

• Do not charge when there is lightning.

• Do not drop the control box or place a heavy object on the control box.

• Do not place an object that can generate high temperatures near the charger when charging.

• Charging with the worn out or damaged household electric outlet can result in a risk of electric shock. If you are in doubt to the household electric outlet condition, have it checked by a licensed electrician.

• Stop using the portable charger immediately if the household electric outlet or any components is overheated or you notice burnt odors.

H41

H42

D RIIV G E EC C V EH CL E

How to Start the Vehicle

1. Holding the smart key, sit in the driver's seat.

2. Fasten the seat belt before starting the vehicle.

3. Make sure to engage the parking brake.

4. Turn OFF all electrical devices.

5. Make sure to depress and hold the brake pedal.

6. While depressing the brake pedal, shift to P (Park).

7. Depress and hold the brake while pressing the POWER button.

OAEEQ016054

8. When the " " indicator is ON, you can drive the vehicle.

When the " " indicator is OFF, you cannot drive the vehicle. Start the vehicle again.

9. Depress and hold the brake pedal and shift to the desired position.

i

Information

While the charging cable is connected, the gear cannot be shift from P (Park) to any other gear for safety reasons.

10.Release the parking brake and slowly release the brake pedal.

Check if the vehicle slowly moves forward, then depress the accelerator pedal.

How to Stop the Vehicle

1. Hold down the brake pedal while the vehicle is parked.

2. While depressing the brake pedal, shift to P (Park).

3. While depressing the brake pedal, engage the parking brake.

4. While depressing the brake pedal, press the POWER button and turn off the vehicle.

OAEEQ016055

5. Check if the " " indicator is turned OFF on the instrument cluster.

When the " " indicator is ON and the gear is in a position other than P (Park), the driver can accidently depress the accelerator pedal, causing the vehicle to move unexpectedly.

Virtual Engine Sound System

The Virtual Engine Sound System generates engine sound for pedestrians to hear vehicle sound because there is no sound while the Electric

Vehicle (EV) is operating.

• If the vehicle is moving at low speed, the VESS will operate.

• When the gear is shifted to R

(Reverse), an additional warning sound will be heard.

CAUTION

•

The vehicle does not generate a sound. Be aware of your driving environment and drive safely.

•

After you park the vehicle or while you are waiting at a traffic light, check whether there are children or obstacles around the vehicle.

•

Check if there is something behind the vehicle when driving in reverse. Pedestrians may not hear the sound of the vehicle.

Distance to Empty

■

NORMAL/

ECO mode selected

■

SPORT mode selected


The distance to empty is displayed differently according to the selected drive mode in the Drive Mode

Integrated Control System.

For more information, refer to "Drive

Mode Integrated Control System" in chapter 5.

H43

H44

D RIIV G E EC RIIC EH E ((C ON

When destination is not set

• On average, a vehicle can drive about 120 miles (191 km). Under certain circumstances where the air conditioner/heater is ON, the distance to empty is impacted, resulting in a possible distance range from 80~180 miles

(130~290 km). When using the heater during cold weather or driving at high speed, the high voltage battery consumes a lot more electricity. This may reduce the distance to empty significantly.

• After "---" has been displayed, the vehicle can drive an additional 2~5 miles (3~8 km) depending on driving speed, heater/air conditioner, weather, driving style, and other factors.

• Distance to empty that is displayed on the instrument cluster after completing a recharge may vary significantly depending on previous operating patterns.

When previous driving patterns include high speed driving, resulting in the high voltage battery using more electricity than usual, the estimated distance to empty is reduced. When the high voltage battery uses little electricity in ECO mode, the estimated distance to empty increases.

• Distance to empty may depend on many factors such as the charge amount of the high voltage battery, weather, temperature, durability of the battery, geographical features, and driving style.

• Natural degradation may occur with the high voltage battery depending on the number of years the vehicle is used. This may reduce the distance to empty.

When destination is set

When the destination is set, the distance to empty may change. The distance to empty is recalculated using the information of the destination.

However, the distance to empty may vary significantly based on traffic conditions, driving habits, and condition of the vehicle.

Tips for Improving Distance to

Empty

• If you operate the air conditioner

/heater too much, the driving battery uses too much electricity. This may reduce the distance to empty.

Therefore, it is recommended that you set the cabin temperature to

73°F (23°C) AUTO. This setting that has been certified by various assessment tests to maintain optimal energy consumption rates while keeping the temperature fresh.

Turn OFF the heater and air conditioner if you do not need them.

• Depress and hold the accelerator pedal to maintain speed and drive economically.

• Gradually depress and release the accelerator pedal when accelerating or decelerating.

• Always maintain specified tire pressures.

• Do not use unnecessary electrical components while driving.

• Do not load unnecessary items in the vehicle.

• Do not mount parts that may increase air resistance.

ECO Guide

OAEQ046008

The ECO guide shows the energy consumption rate of the vehicle and the charge/discharge status of the regenerative brakes.

• POWER :

It shows the energy consumption rate of the vehicle when driving uphill or accelerating. The more electric energy is used, the higher the gauge level.

• ECO :

It shows the energy consumption rate during normal driving condition.

• CHARGE :

It shows the charging status of the battery when it is being charged by the regenerative brakes (decelerating or driving on a downhill road).

The more electric energy is charged, the lower the gauge level.

H45


State of Charge (SOC) Gauge for High Voltage Battery

Warning and Indicator Lights

(related to electric vehicle)

Ready Indicator

H46

OAEE046144

• The SOC gauge shows the charging status of the high voltage battery.

"L (Low)" position on the indicator indicates that there is not enough energy in the high voltage battery.

"H (High)" position indicates that the driving battery is fully charged.

• When driving on highways or motorways, make sure to check in advance if the driving battery is charged enough.

OAEE046102

When there are 2~3 gauge bars

(near the "L (Low)" area) on the SOC gauge, the warning lamp turns ON to alert you of the battery level.

When the warning lamp turns ON, the vehicle can drive an additional

12~18 miles (20~30 km) depending on the driving speed, heater/air conditioner, weather, driving style, and other factors. Charging is required.

NOTICE

When there are 1-2 gauge bars left for the high voltage battery, the vehicle speed is limited and then eventually the vehicle will turn OFF.

Charge the vehicle immediately.

This indicator illuminates :

When the vehicle is ready to be driven.

- ON : Normal driving is possible.

- OFF : Normal driving is not possible, or a problem has occurred.

- Blinking : Emergency driving.

When the ready indicator goes OFF or blinks, there is a problem with the system. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Service Warning Light Power Down Warning

Light

Charging Indicator Light



ON position.


• When there is a problem with related parts of the electric vehicle control system, such as sensors, etc.

When the warning light illuminates while driving, or does not go OFF after starting the vehicle, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.


When the power is limited for the safety of the electric vehicle.

The power is limited for the following reasons.

- The high voltage battery level is below a certain level or voltage is decreasing

- The temperature of the motor or high voltage battery is too high or too low

- There is a problem with the cooling system, or a failure that may interrupt normal driving


• [Red] When charging the high voltage battery.

NOTICE

Do not accelerate or start the vehicle suddenly when the power down warning light is ON.


H47

H48


High Voltage Battery

Level Warning Light

Regenerative Brake

Warning Light


Shift to P to charge

(yellow)


When the high voltage battery level low.

When the warning light turns ON, charge the battery immediately.


When the regenerative brake does not operate and the brake does not perform well. This causes the Brake

Warning light (red) and Regenerative

Brake Warning Light (yellow) to illuminate simultaneously.

In this case, drive safely and have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

The operation of the brake pedal may be more difficult than normal and the braking distance can increase.

OAEE046192L

This message is displayed if you connect the charging cable without the gear in the P (Park) position.

Shift to P (Park) before connecting the charging cable.

Remaining time Charging Door Open Charger Error! /

Quick Charger Error!

OAEE046193L

This message is displayed to notify the remaining time to fully charge the battery.

OAEE046194L

This message is displayed when the vehicle is driven with the charging door opened. Close the charging door and then start driving.

OAEE046134LOAEE046135L

This warning message is displayed when there is a problem with the charger.

H49


Stop vehicle and check brakes Check brakes Low Battery

H50

OLFH044234L

This warning message is displayed when a failure occurs in the brake system.

In this case, park the vehicle in a safe location and recommend that you tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the vehicle inspected.

OLFH044250L

This warning message is displayed when the brake performance is low or the regenerative brake does not work properly due to a failure in the brake system.

In this case, it may take longer for the brake pedal to operate and the braking distance may become longer.

OAEE046123L


The warning light on the instrument cluster ( ) will turn ON simultaneously.

Charge the high voltage battery immediately.

Charge immediately.

Power limited

Low Battery. Charge immediately Low Battery Temp.

Power limited

OAEE046125L


The warning light on the instrument cluster ( ) and the power down warning light ( ) will turn on simultaneously.


OAEE046124L


The warning light on the instrument cluster ( ) and the power down warning light ( ) will turn ON simultaneously and the distance to empty gauge will be displayed as "---".

The vehicle’s power will be reduced to minimize the energy consumption of the high voltage battery. Charge the battery immediately.

OAEE046128L

This warning message is displayed to protect battery and electric vehicle system when the high voltage battery temperature is too low.

H51

H52


NOTICE

If this warning message is still displayed even after the ambient temperature has increased, have the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Battery Overheated!

Stop vehicle

Power limited

OAEE046129L

This warning message is displayed to protect battery and electric vehicle system when the high voltage battery temperature is too high.

Turn off the POWER button and stop the vehicle so that the battery temperature decreases.

OAEE046127L

In the following cases, this warning message is displayed when the vehicle's power is limited for safety.

• When the high voltage battery is below a certain level, or voltage is decreasing.

• When the temperature of the motor or high voltage battery is too high or too low.

• When there is a problem with the cooling system or a failure that may interrupt normal driving.

NOTICE

When this warning message is displayed, do not accelerate or start the vehicle suddenly.


Stop vehicle and check power supply

Check Virtual Engine Sound

System

OLFH044230L

This warning message is displayed when a failure occurs in the power supply system.

In this case, park the vehicle in a safe location and recommend that you tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer and have the vehicle inspected.

OLFH044543L

This message is displayed when there is a problem with the Virtual

Engine Sound System (VESS).


H53

H54


Check electric vehicle system

Energy Flow

The electric vehicle system informs the drivers its energy flow in various operating modes. While driving, the current energy flow is specified in 3 modes.

Vehicle Stop

OAEE046149L

This warning message is displayed when there is a problem with the electric vehicle control system.

Refrain from driving when the warning message is displayed.


The vehicle is stopped.

(No energy flow)

OAEQ046001L

EV Propulsion Regeneration

Aux. Battery Saver+

The Aux. Battery Saver+ is a function that monitors the charging status of the 12 V auxiliary battery.

If the auxiliary battery level is low, the main high voltage battery charges the auxiliary battery.

OAEQ046020L

Only the motor power is used to drive the vehicle.

(Battery

➞

Wheel)

OAEQ046002L

The high-voltage battery is charged up by the regenerative brake system.

(Wheel

➞

Battery)

i

Information

The Aux. Battery Saver+ function will be ON when the vehicle is delivered. If the function is not needed, you may turn it off in the Users Settings mode on the cluster. For more information, refer to the following page.

H55

H56


Mode

• Cycle Mode :


OFF position with all doors, hood and liftgate closed, the Aux. Battery

Saver+ activates according to the auxiliary battery status.

• Automatic Mode :


ON position with the charging connector plugged in, the function activates according to the auxiliary battery status to prevent overdischarge of the auxiliary battery.

i

Information

• The Aux. Battery Saver+ activates maximum of 20 minutes. If the Aux.

Battery Saver+ function activates more than 10 times consecutively when in the automatic mode, the function will stop activating, judging that there is a problem with the auxiliary battery. In this case, drive the vehicle for some period of time or if the auxiliary battery returns to normal, the function will start activating.

• The Aux. Battery Saver+ function cannot prevent battery discharge if the auxiliary battery is damaged, worn out, used as a power supply or unauthorized electronic devises are used.

• If the Aux. Battery Saver+ function was activated, a message will be displayed on the instrument cluster and the high voltage battery level may have decreased.

System Setting

OAEE048433L

The driver can activate the Aux.

Battery Saver+ function by placing the POWER button to the ON position and by selecting:

'User Settings

→

Other

→

Aux.

Battery Saver+'

The Aux. Battery Saver+ function deactivates, when the driver cancels the system setting.

LCD Message

WARNING

OAEE046143L

This message is displayed when the

Aux. Battery Saver+ function has been operated while the vehicle was turned off.

However, if the LCD display message pops up frequently, we recommend that your vehicle's auxiliary battery or electric/electronic components be serviced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

OAEEQ016025

When the function is activating the third Charging Indicator

Lamp will blink and high voltage electricity will be flowing in the vehicle. Do not touch the high voltage electric wire (orange), connector, and all electric components and devices. This may cause electric shock and lead to injuries. Also, do not modify your vehicle in any way. This may affect your vehicle performance and lead to an accident.

H57

H58

S AF TY RE AU TIIO NS OR LE TR C V EH E

If an Accident Occurs

WARNING

• When a vehicle accident occurs, move the vehicle to a safe place, turn OFF the vehicle and remove the auxiliary battery (12 V) terminal to prevent high voltage electricity from flowing.

• If electric wires are exposed from inside or outside the vehicle, do not touch the wires.

Also, do not touch the high voltage electric wire (orange), connector, and all electric components and devices. This may cause electric shock and lead to injuries.

WARNING

• When a vehicle accident occurs and the high voltage battery is damaged, harmful gas and electrolytes may leak.

Be careful not to touch the leaked liquid.

When you suspect leakage of inflammable gas and other harmful gases, open the windows and evacuate to a safe place. If any leaked fluid comes in contact with your eyes or skin, immediately clean the affected area thoroughly with tap water or saline solution and have doctors inspect it as soon as possible.

WARNING

• If a small scale fire occurs, use a fire extinguisher (ABC,

BC) that is meant for electrical fires. If it is impossible to extinguish the fire in the early stage, remain a safe distance from the vehicle and immediately call 911. Also, advise them that an electric vehicle is involved.

If the fire spreads to the high voltage battery, large amount of water is needed to put out the fire. Using small amount of water or fire extinguishers not meant for electrical fires could cause serious injury or death from electrical shocks.

WARNING

If you cannot put out the fire immediately, the high voltage battery may explode. Evacuate to a safe place and do not let other people approach the site.

Contact the fire department and notify them of an electric vehicle fire.

• If the vehicle is flooded with water, immediately turn OFF the vehicle and evacuate to a safe place. Contact 911 or an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Flatbed Towing

WARNING

• Tires Locked Towing

• Tires Locked Towing

Dolly

Dolly

OAEE066015

• If towing is required, lift all four wheels off the ground and tow the vehicle. If you must tow the vehicle using only two wheels, lift the front wheels off the ground and tow the vehicle.

(Continued)

(Continued)

If necessary to roll the vehicle so that it can be rolled onto a flatbed tow truck perform the following: pedal and release the parking brake.

- While depressing the brake pedal shift to the N (Neutral) position and press the

POWER button to turn the vehicle off.

before opening the driver door and the vehicle will remain in ACC mode and in

Neutral.

- If the driver door is opened within the 3 minute period, the vehicle will automatically shift to P (Park), the vehicle will turn OFF and the front wheels will be remained locked.

H59

H60

S AF TY RE AU TIIO NS OR LE TR C V EH E ((C ON

WARNING

OAE066019

• If you tow the vehicle while the front wheels are touching the ground, the vehicle motor may generate electricity and the motor components may be damaged or a fire may occur.

• When a vehicle fire occurs due to the battery, there is a risk of a second fire. Contact

911 when towing the vehicle.

Other Precautions for Electric

Vehicle

• When you paint or apply heat treatment to the vehicle as a result of an accident, the performance of the high voltage battery can be reduced.

If heat treatment is required, contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• When you clean the motor compartment, do not use high pressure water to wash. This may cause an electric shock due to a discharge in high voltage electricity, or damage the vehicle's electric system.

• Do not use, remodel, or install nongenuine parts. This may damage the electric power system.

OAEE036004

• The high voltage battery cooling duct is located in the bottom center of the rear seats. The cooling duct cools down the high voltage battery. When the high voltage battery cooling duct is blocked, the high voltage battery may be overheated. Do not obstruct the cooling duct with any other objects.

Service Plug

OAEEQ016057

DANGER

Never touch the service plug in the luggage compartment. The service plug is attached to high voltage battery system.

Touching the service plug will result in death or serious injury.

Service personnel should follow procedures in service manual.

H61

Index

I I

Index

A

Air bag warning labels....................................................2-70

Air bags...........................................................................2-47

Additional safety precautions.....................................2-69

Air bag collision sensors ............................................2-63

Air bag inflation conditions .......................................2-65

Air bag non-inflation conditions ................................2-66

Air bag warning labels ...............................................2-70

Curtain air bags ..........................................................2-51

Do not install a child restraint on the front passenger seat..........................................................2-62

Driver's air bag ...........................................................2-49

Driver's knee airbag....................................................2-49

How does the air bags system operate? .....................2-53

Occupant classification system (OCS).......................2-58

Passenger's front air bag.............................................2-49

Side air bags ...............................................................2-50

SRS Care ....................................................................2-68

SRS components and functions..................................2-53

SRS warning light ......................................................2-53

What to expect after an air bag inflates .....................2-57

Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision ...............2-63

Air conditioning refrigerant label .................................3-124

Air conditioning system specification ..............................8-5

Air conditioning system................................................3-112

Alarm system ..................................................................3-13

Antenna .............................................................................4-2

I-2

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ......................................5-27

Appearance care..............................................................7-65

Exterior care ...............................................................7-65

Interior care ................................................................7-70

Armrest ...........................................................................2-15

Audio/Video/Navigation system (AVN system)...............4-5

Auto defogging system .................................................3-126

Auto hold ........................................................................5-23

Auto light position ..........................................................3-95

Automatic climate control system ................................3-112

Air conditioning .......................................................3-120

Air conditioning refrigerant label.............................3-119

Air intake control......................................................3-118

Automatic heating and air conditioning ...................3-113

Driver only ...............................................................3-120

EV mode...................................................................3-121

Fan speed control......................................................3-119

HEAT button.............................................................3-120

Manual heating and air conditioning........................3-114

Mode selection..........................................................3-115

OFF mode.................................................................3-121

System maintenance .................................................3-123

Temperature control..................................................3-117

Automatic ventilation ...................................................3-128

Aux, USB and iPod ..........................................................4-2

B

Battery (12 volt)..............................................................7-23

Battery recharging ......................................................7-24

Battery cooling duct........................................................2-22

Battery saver function...................................................3-101

Before driving ...................................................................5-3

Blind-spot Collision Warning (BCW) system ................5-38

Blue Link

® center ...........................................................3-19

Bluetooth

® Wireless Technology hands-free ....................4-4

Bottle holder .................................................................3-130

Brake fluid ......................................................................7-16

Brake system...................................................................5-17

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)..................................5-27

Auto hold....................................................................5-23

Disc brakes wear indicator .........................................5-18

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) ................................5-18

Electronic Stability Control (ESC).............................5-29

Good braking practices ..............................................5-37

Hill-start Assist Control (HAC) .................................5-34

Power brakes ..............................................................5-17

Vehicle Stability Management (VSM) .......................5-33

Bulb replacement ............................................................7-55

Daytime running lamp................................................7-60

Front parking lamp .....................................................7-56

Front turn signal lamp ................................................7-56

Headlamp....................................................................7-56

High mounted stop lamp ............................................7-62

Interior light bulb .......................................................7-66

License plate light bulb ..............................................7-63

Rear combination light bulb.......................................7-61

Side marker ................................................................7-56

Side repeater lamp......................................................7-61

Bulb wattage .....................................................................8-3

C

Capacities (Lubricants) .....................................................3-6

Care

Exterior care ...............................................................7-65

Interior care ................................................................7-70

Tire care......................................................................7-26

Cargo security screen....................................................3-137

Center console storage ..................................................3-128

Central door lock switch .................................................3-11

Certification label .............................................................8-7

Chains

Tire chains ..................................................................5-98

I

I-3

Index

Charging door .................................................................3-50

Checking tire inflation pressure......................................7-28

Child restraint system (CRS) ..........................................2-36

Booster seats...............................................................2-39

Forward-facing child restraint system........................2-39

Installing a child restraint system (CRS) ...................2-39

Lower anchors and tether for children

(LATCH system) .....................................................2-40

Rearward-facing child restraint system......................2-38

Securing a child restraint system seat with

"Tether Anchor" system ..........................................2-43

Securing a child restraint system with a lap/ shoulder belt ............................................................2-44

Securing a child restraint system withthe LATCH anchors system ........................................................2-42

Selecting a child restraint system (CRS) ...................2-37

Child-protector rear door lock ........................................3-12

Climate control air filter replacement.............................7-18

Clock .............................................................................3-135

Clothes hanger ..............................................................3-135

Combined instrument, see instrument cluster ................3-51

Consumer information ......................................................8-9

Coolant ............................................................................7-12

Cooling fluid, see coolant ...............................................7-12

Cruise control system .....................................................5-73

Cup holder.....................................................................3-130

Curtain air bags...............................................................2-51

D

Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel illumination..................................................................3-52

Dashboard, see instrument cluster ..................................3-51

Day/night rearview mirror ..............................................3-19

Daytime running light (DRL) .........................................3-95

Defogging (Windshield) ...............................................3-125

Defroster........................................................................3-111

Rear window defroster .............................................3-111

Defrosting (Windshield) ...............................................3-125

Dimensions .......................................................................8-2

Display illumination, see instrument panel illumination..................................................................3-52

Displays, see instrument cluster .....................................3-51

Distance to empty ...........................................................3-55

Door locks.........................................................................3-9

Auto door lock/unlock features..................................3-12

Central door lock switch ............................................3-11

Child-protector rear door lock....................................3-12

Drinks holders, see cup holders....................................3-130

Drive mode integrated control system............................5-36

ECO mode ..................................................................5-36

SPORT mode ..............................................................5-37

Driver Attention Warning (DAW) System......................5-68

Driver position memory system .....................................3-14

Easy access function ..................................................3-15

Recalling memory positions.......................................3-15

Storing memory positions ..........................................3-14

I-4

Driver's air bag................................................................2-49

Driver's knee airbag ........................................................2-49

Driving at night...............................................................5-96

Driving in flooded areas .................................................5-97

Driving in the rain...........................................................5-96

Dynamic Bending Light (DBL)....................................3-102

E

Easy access function .......................................................3-15

ECO guide.......................................................................3-53

ECO mode.......................................................................5-36

Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with HomeLink ® system, compass and Blue Link ® .............................................3-19

Electric power steering (EPS).........................................3-16

Electric vehicle specifications ..........................................8-2

Electronic Parking Brake (EPB).....................................5-18

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................................5-29

Emergency towing ..........................................................6-23

EPB (Electronic Parking Brake).....................................5-18

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items.................7-11

Exterior care....................................................................7-65

Exterior overview

Front view ....................................................................1-2

Rear view......................................................................1-3

F

Flat tire

Tire Mobility Kit (TMK)............................................6-14

Floor mat anchor(s).......................................................3-136

Fluid

Brake fluid..................................................................7-18

Washer fluid ...............................................................7-17

Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) system ......5-46

Front seat adjustment ........................................................2-6

Adjusting the height up and down .............................2-17

Manual adjustment .......................................................2-7

Power adjustment .........................................................2-9

Front seat head restraints

Removal/Reinstall ......................................................2-18

Seatback pocket..........................................................2-12

Fuse switch .....................................................................7-44

Fuse/relay panel description

Battery terminal cover................................................7-54

Instrument panel fuse panel .......................................7-46

Motor compartment fuse panel ..................................7-51

Fuses ...............................................................................7-42

Fuse switch .................................................................7-44

Fuse/relay panel description.......................................7-46

Instrument panel fuse replacement.............................7-43

Motor compartment panel fuse replacement..............7-44

Multi fuse ...................................................................7-45

I-5

I

Index

G

Gauges and meters ..........................................................3-52

Glove box......................................................................3-129

H

Hazard warning flasher.....................................................6-2

Hazardous driving conditions .........................................5-95

Head restraints ................................................................2-16

Front seat head restraints............................................2-17

Rear seat head restraints.............................................2-19

Headlamp delay function ..............................................3-101

Headlamp position ..........................................................3-96

Headlight bulb replacement ............................................7-55

Heated steering wheel.....................................................3-17

Heater ............................................................................3-112

Height adjustment ...........................................................2-27

High Beam Assist (HBA) ...............................................3-97

High beam operation.......................................................3-97

Highway driving .............................................................5-97

Hill-start Assist Control (HAC) ......................................5-34

Hood................................................................................3-46

Horn ................................................................................3-17

How to use this manual ....................................................F-6

I

If the vehicle overheats.....................................................6-6

If the vehicle stalls at a crossroad or crossing..................6-2

If the vehicle stalls while driving .....................................6-2

If the vehicle will not start................................................6-3

If you have a flat tire ......................................................6-14

If you have a flat tire while driving..................................6-3

Immobilizer system...........................................................3-8

Impact sensing door unlock ............................................3-12

Improtant safety precautions.............................................2-2

Air bag hazards ............................................................2-2

Always wear your seat belt ..........................................2-2

Control your speed .......................................................2-3

Driver distraction..........................................................2-2

Keep your vehicle in safe condition.............................2-3

Restrain all children .....................................................2-2

In case of emergency while driving..................................6-2

Indicator light..................................................................3-58

Inside rearview mirror ....................................................3-18

Instrument cluster ...........................................................3-51

Assist mode ................................................................3-83

Gauges and meters .....................................................3-52

Gear shift indicator.....................................................3-56

Icy road warning light ................................................3-57

I-6

Instrument panel illumination ....................................3-52

LCD display control ...................................................3-80

LCD display messages ...............................................3-68

LCD display modes....................................................3-81

Regenerative braking rate indicator ...........................3-57

Shift indicator pop-up ................................................3-56

Trip computer .............................................................3-91

User settings mode .....................................................3-84

Warning and indicator lights ......................................3-58

Instrument panel fuse replacement .................................7-43

Instrument panel overview ...............................................1-5

Interior care.....................................................................7-70

Interior features

Bottle holder .............................................................3-130

Cargo security screen ...............................................3-137

Clock ........................................................................3-135

Clothes hanger..........................................................3-135

Cup holder ................................................................3-130

Floor mat anchor(s) ..................................................3-136

Mobile phone holder ................................................3-133

Power outlet..............................................................3-132

Sunvisor....................................................................3-131

Wireless cellular phone charging system .................3-133

Interior lamp AUTO cut................................................3-103

Interior lights.................................................................3-103

Door lamp.................................................................3-103

Interior lamp AUTO cut ...........................................3-103

Luggage room lamp .................................................3-104

Map lamp..................................................................3-103

Rear lamps................................................................3-104

Room lamp ...............................................................3-103

Vanity mirror lamp ...................................................3-105

Puddle lamp..............................................................3-105

Interior overview...............................................................1-4

J

Jump starting.....................................................................6-4

L

Label

Air bag warning labels ...............................................2-70

Refrigerent label ...........................................................8-8

Tire sidewall labeling .................................................7-31

Tire specification and pressure label............................8-8

Vehicle certification label.............................................8-8

Lane change signals ......................................................3-100

Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) System ..............................5-59

Lap/shoulder belt ............................................................2-26

I

I-7

Index

LCD display

Assist mode ................................................................3-83

LCD display modes....................................................3-81

Quick guide help ........................................................3-82

Trip computer mode ...................................................3-82

Turn By Turn (TBT) mode.........................................3-82

User settings mode .....................................................3-84

Warning mode ............................................................3-83

LCD display messages

Aux. Battery Saver+ used while parked ....................3-75

Battery Overheated! Stop vehicle ..............................3-77

Charge immediately. Power limited ...........................3-76

Charger Error!/Quick Charger Error!.........................3-75

Charging door open ....................................................3-74

Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse ...................................3-70

Check brakes ..............................................................3-76

Check electric vehicle system ....................................3-79

Check headlamp FAN ................................................3-73

Check headlamp LED ................................................3-72

Check headlight..........................................................3-72

Check steering wheel lock system .............................3-69

Check virtual engine sound........................................3-79

Door, Hood, Tailgate Open ........................................3-70

Key not detected.........................................................3-69

Key not in vehicle ......................................................3-69

Lights mode................................................................3-73

Low battery ................................................................3-76

Low Battery Temp. Power limited .............................3-77

I-8

Low Battery. Charge immediately .............................3-77

Low Key Battery ........................................................3-68

Low pressure ..............................................................3-72

Low washer fluid........................................................3-70

Power limited .............................................................3-78

Press brake pedal to start vehicle ...............................3-69

Press POWER button again .......................................3-69

Press POWER button while turning wheel................3-69

Press POWER button with key ..................................3-70

Remaining time ..........................................................3-74

Shift to P.....................................................................3-68

Shift to P to charge .....................................................3-74

Shift to P to start vehicle ............................................3-70

Stop vehicle and check brakes ...................................3-75

Stop vehicle and check power supply ........................3-78

Sunroof open ..............................................................3-71

Turn on "FUSE SWITCH".........................................3-71

Unplug vehicle to start ...............................................3-70

Wiper ..........................................................................3-73

LCD display modes ........................................................3-81

Liftgate ............................................................................3-48

Light ................................................................................3-95

Turn signals ..............................................................3-100

Parking lamp position ................................................3-96

Lane change signals .................................................3-100

High Beam Assist (HBA)...........................................3-97

High beam operation ..................................................3-97

Headlamp position......................................................3-96

Headlamp delay function .........................................3-101

Dynamic Bending Light (DBL) ...............................3-102

Daytime Running Light (DRL)..................................3-95

Battery saver function ..............................................3-101

Auto light position......................................................3-95

Light bulbs ......................................................................7-55

Lubricants and capacities..................................................8-6

Luggage room lamp ......................................................3-104

M

Maintenance

Maintenance services ...................................................7-4

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ............7-11

Maintenance under severe usage conditions..............7-15

Normal maintenance service ........................................7-8

Owner maintenance......................................................7-5

Scheduled maintenance services ..................................7-7

Tire maintenance ........................................................7-31

Maintenance services ........................................................7-4

Mirrors ............................................................................3-18

Blue Link ® center.......................................................3-19

Day/night rearview mirror..........................................3-19

Electric Chromic Mirror (ECM) with HomeLink

® system, compass and Blue Link

®

...........................3-19

Folding/Unfolding the side view mirror ....................3-36

Inside rearview mirror................................................3-18

Reverse parking aid function .....................................3-37

Side view mirror control ............................................3-35

Side view mirrors .......................................................3-34

Mobile phone holder.....................................................3-133

Monitor (Rear view) .....................................................3-105

Moonroof, see sunroof....................................................3-42

Motor compartment ...................................................1-6, 7-3

Motor compartment panel fuse replacement ..................7-44

Motor number ...................................................................8-8

Multi box.......................................................................3-130

Multi fuse ........................................................................7-45

Multimedia system............................................................4-2

Antenna ........................................................................4-2

Audio/Video/Navigation system (AVN system) ..........4-5

Aux, USB and iPod ......................................................4-2

Bluetooth

® Wireless Technology hands-free................4-4

Steering wheel audio control........................................4-3

O

Occupant classification system (OCS) ...........................2-58

Odometer.........................................................................3-55

Outside temperature gauge .............................................3-55

Owner maintenance ..........................................................7-5

I-9

I

Index

P

Paddle shifter (Regenerative braking control)................5-16

Parking lamp position .....................................................3-96

Passenger's front air bag .................................................2-49

Power brakes...................................................................5-17

Power button .....................................................................5-5

POWER button positions .............................................5-6

Starting the vehicle.......................................................5-8

Turning off the vehicle .................................................5-9

Power outlet ..................................................................3-132

Power steering.................................................................3-16

Power window lock switch.............................................3-41

Pre-tensioner seat belt.....................................................2-29

Puddle lamp ..................................................................3-105

R

Rear center seatbelt.........................................................2-32

Rear seat adjustment .......................................................2-12

Armrest .......................................................................2-15

Folding the rear seat ...................................................2-12

Rear seat head restraints .................................................2-19

Adjusting the height up and down .............................2-19

Removal/Reinstall ......................................................2-20

Rear seat warmers...........................................................2-22

Rear view monitor ........................................................3-105

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ...................7-27

I-10

Recommended lubricants and capacities ..........................8-6

Reduction gear ................................................................5-10

Gear position ..............................................................5-10

Good driving practices ...............................................5-15

LCD display messages ...............................................5-12

Shift-lock system........................................................5-12

When the battery (12 V) is discharged ......................5-12

Refrigerent label ...............................................................8-8

Regenerative braking rate indicator................................3-57

Removable towing hook .................................................6-22

Replacement light bulb ...................................................7-55

Reporting safety defects .................................................8-10

Rocking the vehicle ........................................................5-95

Rotation (Tire) ................................................................7-29

S

Safety messages ................................................................F-6

Scheduled maintenance services.......................................7-7

Seat belt warning light

Driver's seat ................................................................2-24

Front passenger's seat .................................................2-25

Seat belts .........................................................................2-23

Additional seat belt safety precautions ......................2-32

Care of seat belts ........................................................2-35

Do not lie down..........................................................2-34

Height adjustment ......................................................2-27

Keep belts clean and dry ............................................2-35

Lap/shoulder belt........................................................2-26

One person per belt ....................................................2-34

Periodic inspection .....................................................2-35

Pre-tensioner seat belt ................................................2-29

Rear center seatbelt ....................................................2-32

Seat belt restraint system............................................2-25

Seat belt safety precautions........................................2-23

Seat belt use and children...........................................2-33

Seat belt use during pregnancy ..................................2-32

Seat belt warning light ...............................................2-24

Transporting an injured person ..................................2-34

When to replace seat belts..........................................2-35

Seat warmers

Front ...........................................................................2-20

Rear ............................................................................2-22

Seats ..................................................................................2-4

Battery cooling duct ...................................................2-22

Front seat adjustment ...................................................2-6

Front seat warmers .....................................................2-20

Head restraints............................................................2-16

Rear seat adjustment ..................................................2-12

Rear seat warmers ......................................................2-22

Safety precautions ........................................................2-5

Shift lever auto door lock ...............................................3-12

Shift-lock system ............................................................5-12

Side air bags....................................................................2-50

Side view mirrors............................................................3-34

Blind spot mirror ........................................................3-34

Smart Cruise Control With Stop & Go System..............5-78

Smart key ..........................................................................3-3

Battery replacement......................................................3-7

Liftgate unlocking ........................................................3-5

Locking.........................................................................3-3

Mechanical key ............................................................3-6

Panic button..................................................................3-5

Unlocking .....................................................................3-4

Smooth cornering............................................................5-96

Snow tires .......................................................................5-98

SOC (State of Charge) gauge .........................................3-54

Special driving conditions

Driving at night ..........................................................5-96

Driving in flooded areas.............................................5-97

Driving in the rain ......................................................5-96

Hazardous driving conditions ....................................5-95

Highway driving.........................................................5-97

Rocking the vehicle....................................................5-95

Smooth cornering .......................................................5-96

Speed sensing door lock .................................................3-12

Speedometer....................................................................3-52

SPORT mode ..................................................................5-37

Steering wheel

Heated steering wheel ................................................3-17

Horn............................................................................3-17

Power steering ............................................................3-16

Power Steering (EPS).................................................3-16

Tilt steering/Telescope steering..................................3-16

I-11

I

Index

Steering wheel audio control ............................................4-3

Storage compartment ....................................................3-128

Center console storage .............................................3-128

Glove box .................................................................3-129

Sunglass holder ........................................................3-129

Multi box ..................................................................3-130

Sunglass holder .............................................................3-129

Sunroof............................................................................3-42

Automatic reverse ......................................................3-43

Resetting the sunroof..................................................3-45

Sliding the sunroof .....................................................3-43

Sunroof opening and closing......................................3-43

Sunshade.....................................................................3-44

Tilting the sunroof ......................................................3-44

Sunvisor ........................................................................3-131

T

Theft-alarm system .........................................................3-13

Tilt steering/Telescope steering ......................................3-16

Tire chains.......................................................................5-98

Tire Mobility Kit (TMK) ................................................6-14

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .......................6-8

Tire rotation ....................................................................7-29

Tire specification and pressure label ................................8-8

Tires and wheels .............................................................7-26

All season tires ...........................................................7-39

Checking tire inflation pressure .................................7-28

Low aspect ratio tires .................................................7-40

Radial-ply tires ...........................................................7-39

Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ...............7-27

Snow tires ...................................................................7-39

Summer tires ..............................................................7-39

Tire care......................................................................7-26

Tire maintenance ........................................................7-31

Tire replacement.........................................................7-30

Tire rotation ................................................................7-29

Tire sidewall labeling .................................................7-31

Tire terminology and definitions................................7-35

Tire traction ................................................................7-31

Wheel alignment and tire balance..............................7-30

Wheel replacement .....................................................7-31

Towing ............................................................................6-21

Trip computer..................................................................3-91

Average fuel economy................................................3-92

Average vehicle speed ................................................3-92

Digital speedometer....................................................3-93

Driving Info display ...................................................3-94

Energy flow ................................................................3-94

Instant fuel economy ..................................................3-92

Timer ..........................................................................3-92

Tripmeter ....................................................................3-92

Turn signals...................................................................3-100

I-12

U

User settings mode..........................................................3-84

V

Vanity mirror lamp........................................................3-105

Vehicle certification label .................................................8-7

Vehicle data collection and event data recorders .............F-8

Vehicle identification number (VIN) ................................8-7

Vehicle load limit ..........................................................5-102

Tire loading information label..................................5-102

Vehicle modification.........................................................F-7

Vehicle Stability Management (VSM)............................5-33

Volume and weight ...........................................................8-5

W

Warning and indicator lights...........................................3-58

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) warning light ...........3-61

AUTO HOLD indicator light .....................................3-63

Charging indicator light .............................................3-59

Charging system warning light ..................................3-62

Cruise indicator light..................................................3-67

Cruise SET indicator light..........................................3-67

ECO mode indicator light ..........................................3-68

Electric power steering (EPS) warning light .............3-62

Electronic brake force warning light..........................3-61

Electronic parking brake warning light......................3-63

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) indicator light.....3-65

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

OFF indicator light..................................................3-66

Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA) System

Warning Light .........................................................3-64

High beam indicator light ..........................................3-67

High voltage battery low level warning light ............3-59

Immobilizer indicator light ........................................3-66

Lane Departure Warning (LDW) System warning light ...........................................................3-64

LED headlamp warning light .....................................3-64

Light ON indicator light.............................................3-67

Low tire pressure warning light .................................3-62

Master warning light ..................................................3-65

Parking brake & brake fluid warning light ................3-60

Power down warning light .........................................3-58

Ready indicator ..........................................................3-58

Regenerative brake warning light ..............................3-59

Seat belt warning light ...............................................3-59

Service warning light .................................................3-58

SPORT mode indicator light ......................................3-68

Supplemental restraint system warning light .............3-59

Turn signal indicator light ..........................................3-67

Warning light ..................................................................3-58

Washer fluid ....................................................................7-17

I-13

I

Index

Welcome system ...........................................................3-106

Door handle lamp .....................................................3-106

Headlamp and parking lamp ....................................3-106

Interior lamp .............................................................3-106

Puddle lamp..............................................................3-106

Wheel alignment and tire balance ..................................7-30

Wheel replacement .........................................................7-31

Windows .........................................................................3-38

Auto up/down window ...............................................3-40

Automatic reverse ......................................................3-40

Power window lock switch ........................................3-41

Resetting the windows ...............................................3-40

Windshield defrosting and defogging...........................3-125

Windshield washers ......................................................3-109

Windshield wipers.........................................................3-108

Winter driving .................................................................5-98

Snow tires ...................................................................5-98

Tire chains ..................................................................5-98

Winter Precautions........................................................5-100

Wiper blade replacement ................................................7-20

Wipers and washers ......................................................3-108

Windshield washers..................................................3-109

Windshield wipers ....................................................3-108

Wireless cellular phone charging system......................3-133

I-14